Mill Operator’s Manual

JUNE 2005

HAAS AUTOMATION INC. • 2800 STURGIS ROAD • OXNARD, CA 93030

TEL. 888-817-4227 FAX. 805-278-8561
www.HaasCNC.com

96-8000 revL
 Warranty Certificate
Covering Haas Automation, Inc., CNC Equipment
Effective January 1, 2003
LIMITED WARRANTY COVERAGE
All new HAAS VF Series Machining Centers are warranted exclusively by the Haas Automation’s ("Manufacturer") limited
warranty as follows:
Each Haas CNC machine ("Machine") and its components ("Components") (except those listed below under limits and
exclusions) is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, which is the date that a machine is installed at the end user. The foregoing is a limited warranty and it is the only
warranty by manufacturer. Manufacturer disclaims all other warranties, express or implied, including but not limited to all
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT ONLY: MANUFACTURER'S LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO
REPAIRING OR REPLACING, AT THE DISCRETION OF MANUFACTURER, PARTS, OR COMPONENTS.

An additional one-year warranty extension may be purchased from your authorized Haas distributor.

LIMITS and EXCLUSIONS of WARRANTY

Except as provided above, buyer agrees that all warranties express or implied, as to any matter whatsoever, including but
not limited to warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are excluded.
Components subject to wear during normal use and over time such as paint, window finish and condition, light bulbs,
seals, chip removal system, etc., are excluded from this warranty.
Factory-specified maintenance procedures must be adhered to and recorded in order to maintain this warranty.
This warranty is void if the machine is subjected to mishandling, misuse, neglect, accident, improper installation, improper
maintenance, or improper operation or application, or if the machine was improperly repaired or serviced by the customer
or by an unauthorized service technician. Warranty service or repair service is available from the authorized Haas distributor.
Without limiting the generality of any of the exclusions or limitations described in other paragraphs, manufacturer's warranty does not include any warranty that the machine or components will meet buyer's
production specifications or other requirements or that operation of the machine and components will be uninterrupted or error-free. Manufacturer assumes no responsibility with respect to the use of the
Machine and Components by Buyer, and manufacturer shall not incur any liability or Seller to Buyer for any failure in design, production, operation, performance or otherwise of the Machine or
Components other than repair or replacement of same as set forth in the Limited Warranty above. Manufacturer is not responsible for any damage to parts, machines, business premises or other property
of Buyer,or for any other incidental or consequential damages that may be caused by a malfunction of the Machine or Components.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND DAMAGES: MANUFACTURER IS NOT LIABLE TO BUYER, SELLER OR ANY CUSTOMER OF
BUYER FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOST DATA, LOST PRODUCTS, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF USE, COST OF DOWN
TIME, BUSINESS GOOD WILL, OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN
CONTRACT OR TORT, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE MACHINE OR COMPONENTS, OTHER PRODUCTS OR
SERVICES PROVIDED BY MANUFACTURER OR SELLER, OR THE FAILURE OF PARTS OR PRODUCTS MADE BY USING
THE MACHINE OR COMPONENTS, EVEN IF MANUFACTURER OR SELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. MANUFACTURER'S LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES FOR ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER SHALL BE LIMITED TO
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, AT THE DISCRETION OF MANUFACTURER, OF THE DEFECTIVE PARTS, COMPONENTS OR
MACHINE.
Buyer has accepted this restriction on its right to recover incidental or consequential damages as part of its bargain with
Seller. Buyer realizes and acknowledges that the price of the equipment would be higher if Seller or Manufacturer were
required to be responsible for incidental or consequential damages, or punitive damages.
This Warranty Certificate supersedes any and all other agreements, either oral or in this writing, between the parties hereto with respect to the warranties, limitations of liability and/or damages regarding
the Machine or Components, and contains all of the covenants and agreements between the parties with respect to such warranties, liability limitations and/or damages. Each party to this Warranty
Certificate acknowledges that no representations, inducements, promises, or agreements, orally or otherwise, have been made by any party, or anyone acting on behalf of any party, which are not embodied
herein regarding such warranties, liability limitations and/or damages, and that no other agreement, statement, or promise not contained in this Warranty Certificate shall be valid or binding regarding
such warranties, liability limitations and damages.

TRANSFERABILITY
This warranty is transferrable from the original end-user to another party if the machine is sold via private sale before the
end of the warranty period.

Haas Automation, Inc. 2800 Sturgis Road, Oxnard, CA 93030-8933 Phone: (805) 278-1800 FAX: (805) 278-8561

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Table Of Contents I

 Warranty Registration
Certificate
LIMITED WARRANTY COVERAGE
All new HAAS VF Series Machining Centers are warranted exclusively by the Haas Automation’s ("Manufacturer")
limited warranty as follows:
Each Haas CNC machine ("Machine") and its components ("Components") (except those listed below under limits
and exclusions) is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date
of purchase, which is the date that a machine is installed at the end user. The foregoing is a limited warranty and it
is the only warranty by manufacturer. Manufacturer disclaims all other warranties, express or implied, including but
not limited to all warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT ONLY: MANUFACTURER'S LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL

BE LIMITED TO REPAIRING OR REPLACING, AT THE DISCRETION OF MANUFACTURER, PARTS, OR
COMPONENTS.
An additional one-year warranty extension may be purchased from your authorized Haas distributor.

LIMITS and EXCLUSIONS of WARRANTY

Except as provided above, buyer agrees that all warranties express or implied, as to any matter whatsoever, includ-
ing but not limited to warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are excluded.
Components subject to wear during normal use and over time such as paint, window finish and condition, light bulbs,
seals, chip removal system, etc., are excluded from this warranty.
Factory-specified maintenance procedures must be adhered to and recorded in order to maintain this warranty.
This warranty is void if the machine is subjected to mishandling, misuse, neglect, accident, improper installation,
improper maintenance, or improper operation or application, or if the machine was improperly repaired or serviced by
the customer or by an unauthorized service technician. Warranty service or repair service is available from the
authorized Haas distributor.
Without limiting the generality of any of the exclusions or limitations described in other paragraphs, manufacturer's
warranty does not include any warranty that the machine or components will meet buyer's production specifications
or other requirements or that operation of the machine and components will be uninterrupted or error-free. Manufac-
turer assumes no responsibility with respect to the use of the Machine and Components by Buyer, and manufacturer
shall not incur any liability or Seller to Buyer for any failure in design, production, operation, performance or other-
wise of the Machine or Components other than repair or replacement of same as set forth in the Limited Warranty
above. Manufacturer is not responsible for any damage to parts, machines, business premises or other property of
Buyer, or for any other incidental or consequential damages that may be caused by a malfunction of the Machine or
Components.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND DAMAGES: MANUFACTURER IS NOT LIABLE TO BUYER, SELLER

OR ANY CUSTOMER OF BUYER FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOST DATA, LOST PRODUCTS, LOSS OF REV-
ENUE, LOSS OF USE, COST OF DOWN TIME, BUSINESS GOOD WILL, OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT, ARISING OUT OF OR RE-
LATED TO THE MACHINE OR COMPONENTS, OTHER PRODUCTS OR SERVICES PROVIDED BY MANUFAC-
TURER OR SELLER, OR THE FAILURE OF PARTS OR PRODUCTS MADE BY USING THE MACHINE OR COM-
PONENTS, EVEN IF MANUFACTURER OR SELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. MANUFACTURER'S LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES FOR ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER SHALL BE
LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, AT THE DISCRETION OF MANUFACTURER, OF THE DEFECTIVE
PARTS, COMPONENTS OR MACHINE.

II Table Of Contents 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Buyer has accepted this restriction on its right to recover incidental or consequential damages as part of its
bargain with Seller. Buyer realizes and acknowledges that the price of the equipment would be higher if Seller or
Manufacturer were required to be responsible for incidental or consequential damages, or punitive damages.
This Warranty Certificate supersedes any and all other agreements, either oral or in this writing, between the
parties hereto with respect to the warranties, limitations of liability and/or damages regarding the Machine or
Components, and contains all of the covenants and agreements between the parties with respect to such
warranties, liability limitations and/or damages. Each party to this Warranty Certificate acknowledges that no
representations, inducements, promises, or agreements, orally or otherwise, have been made by any party, or
anyone acting on behalf of any party, which are not embodied herein regarding such warranties, liability limita-
tions and/or damages, and that no other agreement, statement, or promise not contained in this Warranty
Certificate shall be valid or binding regarding such warranties, liability limitations and damages.

TRANSFERABILITY
This warranty is transferrable from the original end-user to another party if the machine is sold via private sale
before the end of the warranty period.

Should you have a problem with your machine, please consult your operator's manual first. If this does not
resolve the problem, call your authorized Haas distributor. As a final solution, call Haas directly at the number
indicated below.

Haas Automation, Inc.

2800 Sturgis Road
Oxnard, California 93030-8933 USA
Phone: (805) 278-1800
FAX: (805) 278-8561
In order to record the end-user of this machine for updates and for product safety notices, we must have the
machine registration returned immediately. Please fill out completely and mail to the above address to ATTENTION
(VF-1, VF-6, etc. — whichever is applicable) REGISTRATIONS. Please include a copy of your invoice to
validate your warranty date and to cover any additional options you may have purchased.

Company Name: _____________________________ Contact Name: ________________________

Address: _________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________________

Dealer: ________________________________________ Date Installed: ________________________

Model No. : ____________________________________ Serial Number: ________________________

Telephone: ( ___ ) ___________________________ FAX: ( _____ ) ___________________________

IMPORTANT NO
IMPORT TICE!!!
NOTICE!!! PLEASE READ IMMEDIATEL
IMMEDIATELY!!!
TELY!!!
This machine is equipped with an electronically-recorded serial number that cannot be altered. This is done to
protect you in case of theft and to track machines when sold to other owners. After approximately 800 hours of use,
the machine will automatically shut down if it has not been electronically unlocked by the Haas Factory Outlet. To
unlock the machine, we must have the above registration with the serial number. You will receive a number from the
Haas Factory Outlet that you will write in over the serial number on the setting page (#26). If, for any reason, the
serial number of the machine is erased in memory, the machine will revert back to a 200 hour limit for your
protection.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Table Of Contents III

 Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Dear Haas customer,

Your complete satisfaction and goodwill are of the utmost importance to both Haas Automation, Inc.,
and the Haas distributor where you purchased your equipment. Normally, any concerns you may have
about the sales transaction or the operation of your equipment will be rapidly resolved by your
distributor.

However, if your concerns are not resolved to your complete satisfaction, and you have discussed your
concerns with a member of the dealership’s management, the General Manager or the dealership’s owner
directly, please do the following:

Contact Haas Automation’s Customer Service Center by calling 800-331-6746 and ask for the Customer
Service Department. So that we may resolve your concerns as quickly as possible, please have the
following information available when you call:

• Your name, company name, address and phone number

• The machine model and serial number
• The dealership name, and the name of your latest contact at the dealership
• The nature of your concern

If you wish to write Haas Automation, please use this address:

Haas Automation, Inc.

2800 Sturgis Road
Oxnard, CA 93030
Att: Customer Satisfaction Manager
e-mail: [email protected]

Once you contact the Haas Automation Customer Service Center, we will make every effort to work
directly with you and your distributor to quickly resolve your concerns. At Haas Automation, we know
that a good Customer-Distributor-Manufacturer relationship will help ensure continued success for all
concerned.

Customer Feedback
If you have any concern or questions in regards to the Haas Programming and Operations manual, please
contact us via our E-mail, [email protected]. We look forward to any suggestions you may have.

IV Table Of Contents 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 The Information contained in this manual is constantly being updated.
The latest updates, and other helpful information is available online as a
free download in .pdf format (go to www.HaasCNC.com and click on
“Manual Updates” under the “Customer Services” drop-down menu in
the navigation bar).

Table of Contents
SAFETY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1

OPERATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 9
PENDANT KEYBOARD INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 11
FUNCTION KEYS ........................................................................................................................................ 12
JOG KEYS ................................................................................................................................................ 12
OVERRIDE KEYS ....................................................................................................................................... 13
DISPLAY KEYS ........................................................................................................................................... 14
CURSOR KEYS .......................................................................................................................................... 15
ALPHA KEYS ............................................................................................................................................. 15
MODE KEYS ............................................................................................................................................. 16
NUMERIC KEYS ......................................................................................................................................... 17
POSITION DISPLAYS .................................................................................................................................... 17
OFFSETS DISPLAY ...................................................................................................................................... 18
CURRENT COMMANDS DISPLAY ..................................................................................................................... 18
ALARMS / MESSAGES DISPLAY ...................................................................................................................... 19
SETTING / GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION ......................................................................................................... 20
DATE AND TIME ......................................................................................................................................... 21
SCREEN SAVER ......................................................................................................................................... 21
HELP / CALCULATOR FUNCTION .................................................................................................................... 21
SPINDLE WARM-UP PROGRAM ..................................................................................................................... 24
RUN-STOP-JOG-CONTINUE .......................................................................................................................... 24
COOLANT LEVEL GAUGE ............................................................................................................................. 25
OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................................. 25
MACHINE POWER-UP ................................................................................................................................. 29
PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 29
ALPHABETICAL ADDRESS CODES .................................................................................................................. 35
PART SETUP ............................................................................................................................................. 36
TOOLING ................................................................................................................................................. 36
TOOL CHANGER ........................................................................................................................................ 38
PALLET CHANGER (EC-SERIES AND MILL DRILL CENTER) ............................................................................... 51
TIPS AND TRICKS ...................................................................................................................................... 58

SUBROUTINES ..................................................................................................................................................... 62
LOCAL SUBROUTINES ................................................................................................................................ 62
SUBROUTINE CANNED CYCLE EXAMPLE ......................................................................................................... 63
SUBROUTINES WITH MULTIPLE FIXTURES ...................................................................................................... 63

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Table Of Contents V

ADVANCED EDITOR ............................................................................................................................................. 64
THE PROGRAM MENU ................................................................................................................................ 64
THE EDIT MENU ....................................................................................................................................... 65
THE SEARCH MENU .................................................................................................................................. 65
THE MODIFY MENU ................................................................................................................................... 65
THE I/O MENU ......................................................................................................................................... 66
THE F1: HELP MENU ................................................................................................................................ 66
ADVANCED EDITOR SHORTCUTS ................................................................................................................... 67

QUICK CODE ........................................................................................................................................................ 68

VISUAL QUICK CODE ................................................................................................................................. 73

CUTTER COMPENSATION .................................................................................................................................... 74

ENTRY AND EXIT FROM CUTTER COMPENSATION ............................................................................................... 75
FEED ADJUSTMENTS IN CUTTER COMPENSATION .............................................................................................. 75

MACROS ............................................................................................................................................................... 77
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................... 77
OPERATION NOTES ..................................................................................................................................... 78
SYSTEM VARIABLES IN-DEPTH ...................................................................................................................... 83
VARIABLE USAGE ....................................................................................................................................... 86
ADDRESS SUBSTITUTION ............................................................................................................................ 87
G65 MACRO SUBROUTINE CALL ................................................................................................................. 95
COMMUNICATION WITH EXTERNAL DEVICES - DPRNT[ ] .................................................................................. 96
FANUC-STYLE MCRO FEATURES NOT INCLUDED IN HAAS CNC CONTROL ............................................................ 98

4TH AND 5TH AXIS PROGRAMMING .................................................................................................................. 99

CREATING FIVE-AXIS PROGRAMS .................................................................................................................. 99
INSTALLING AN OPTIONAL FOURTH AXIS ........................................................................................................ 101
INSTALLING AN OPTIONAL FIFTH AXIS ........................................................................................................... 102
AUXILIARY AXIS ....................................................................................................................................... 102
DISABLEING THE AXES .............................................................................................................................. 102

G CODES (PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS)............................................................................................................ 103

M CODES (MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS) ....................................................................................................... 159

SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................................................ 167

MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................................................... 183

INDEX ................................................................................................................................................................... 197

This manual and all of its contents are copyright protected 2005, and may not be reproduced without written
permission from Haas Automation, Inc.

VI Table Of Contents 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 HAAS SAFETY PROCEDURES

THINK SAFETY!
DON’T GET CAUGHT
UP IN YOUR WORK
All milling machines contain hazards from rotating
parts, belts and pulleys, high voltage electricity,
noise, and compressed air. When using CNC
machines and their components, basic safety
precautions must always be followed to reduce the
risk of personal injury and mechanical damage.

Important – This machine to be operated only

by trained personnel in accordance with the
Operator’s manual and instructions for safe
operation of machine.

Saf ety Contents

Safety
USES AND GUIDELINES FOR PROPER MACHINE OPERATION ........................................................................... 4
MODIFICATIONS TO THE MACHINE ...................................................................................................................... 4
SAFETY PLACARDS ............................................................................................................................................... 4
AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 4
MACHINE GUARDING ............................................................................................................................................. 4
ROTATING PARTS .................................................................................................................................................. 4
CHIP AUGERS ........................................................................................................................................................ 5
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ....................................................................................................................................... 5
JOB SET-UP ............................................................................................................................................................ 5
HOT AREAS ............................................................................................................................................................ 5
MACHINE AWARENESS ......................................................................................................................................... 5
PROPER ATTIRE .................................................................................................................................................... 5
TOOLING ................................................................................................................................................................ 6
EYE-SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................................... 6
ELECTRICAL SERVICE ........................................................................................................................................... 6
SPILLS .................................................................................................................................................................... 6
FIXTURES ............................................................................................................................................................... 6
KEEP CLEAR .......................................................................................................................................................... 6
DECLARATION OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES ................................................................................... 7
SAFETY WINDOWS ................................................................................................................................................ 7

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Safety 1

 READ BEFORE OPERATING THIS MACHINE:

♦ Only authorized personnel should work on this machine. Untrained personnel present
a hazard to themselves and the machine, and improper operation will void the warranty.

♦ Check for damaged parts and tools before operating the machine. Any part or tool that is
damaged should be properly repaired or replaced by authorized personnel. Do not operate the
machine if any component does not appear to be functioning correctly. Contact your shop
supervisor.

♦ Use appropriate eye and ear protection while operating the machine. ANSI-approved impact
safety goggles and OSHA-approved ear protection are recommended to reduce the risks of sight
damage and hearing loss.

♦ Do not operate the machine unless the doors are closed and the door interlocks are
functioning properly. Rotating cutting tools can cause severe injury. When a program is running,
the mill table and spindle head can move rapidly at any time in any direction.

♦ The Emergency Stop button (also known as an Emergency Power Off button) is the large,
circular red switch located on the Control Panel. Pressing the Emergency Stop button will instantly
stop all motion of the machine, the servo motors, the tool changer, and the coolant pump. Use the
Emergency Stop button only in emergencies to avoid crashing the machine.

♦ The electrical panel should be closed and the three latches on the control cabinet should be
secured at all times except during installation and service. At those times, only qualified
electricians should have access to the panel. When the main circuit breaker is on, there is high
voltage throughout the electrical panel (including the circuit boards and logic circuits) and some
components operate at high temperatures. Therefore, extreme caution is required. Once the
machine is installed, the control cabinet must be locked and the key available only to qualified
service personnel.

♦ DO NOT modify or alter this equipment in any way. If modifications are necessary, all such
requests must be handled by Haas Automation, Inc. Any modification or alteration of any Haas
Milling or Turning Center could lead to personal injury and/or mechanical damage and will void
your warranty.

♦ It is the shop owner’s responsibility to make sure that everyone who is involved in installing and
operating the machine is thoroughly acquainted with the installation, operation, and safety
instructions provided with the machine BEFORE they perform any actual work. The ultimate
responsibility for safety rests with the shop owner and the individuals who work with the machine.

2 Safety 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 OBSERVE ALL OF THE WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS BELOW:

♦ This machine is automatically controlled and may start at any time.

♦ This machine can cause severe bodily injury.

♦ Do not operate with the doors open.

♦ Avoid entering the machine enclosure.

♦ Do not operate without proper training.

♦ Always wear safety goggles.

♦ Never place your hand on the tool in the spindle and press ATC FWD, ATC REV,
NEXT TOOL, or cause a tool change cycle. The tool changer will move in and
crush your hand.

♦ To avoid tool changer damage, ensure that tools are properly aligned with the
spindle drive lugs when loading tools.

♦ The electrical power must meet the specifications in this manual. Attempting to
run the machine from any other source can cause severe damage and will void the
warranty.

♦ DO NOT press POWER UP/RESTART on the control panel until after the
installation is complete.

♦ DO NOT attempt to operate the machine before all of the installation instructions
have been completed.

♦ NEVER service the machine with the power connected.

♦ Improperly clamped parts machined at high speeds/feeds may be ejected and

puncture the safety door. Machining oversized or marginally clamped parts is not
safe.

♦ Windows must be replaced if damaged or severely scratched - Replace damaged

windows immediately.

♦ Do not process toxic or flammable material. Deadly fumes can be present. Consult
material manufacturer for safe handling of material by-products before processing.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Safety 3

 USES AND GUIDELINES FOR PROPER MACHINE OPERATION

All milling machines contain hazards from rotating cutting tools, belts and pulleys, high voltage electricity,
noise, and compressed air. When using milling machines and their components, basic safety precautions
should always be followed to reduce the risk of personal injury and mechanical damage. READ ALL APPRO-
PRIATE WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE OPERATING THIS MACHINE.

M ODIFICATIONS TO THE MACHINE

DO NOT modify or alter this equipment in any way. If modifications are necessary, all such requests must be
handled by Haas Automation, Inc. Any modification or alteration of any Haas machining center could lead to
personal injury and/or mechanical damage and will void your warranty.

SAFETY PLACARDS

Some or all of these warnings may be on your machine.

Be aware of the possible dangers.
If a sticker is missing from the machine, or an extra one is needed to remind employees of the need to work
safely contact the Haas factory

Automatic Equipment
As this machine equipment is programmable it may start
DANGER unexpectedly. Operators and other shop personnel need to be
aware of this. Keep the doors closed at all times other than loading
THIS EQUIPMENT or unloading parts and tools.
STARTS AUTOMATICALLY

Machine Guarding
Some guarding and access panels may close unexpectedly due
to machine operation. Ensure all guarding and panels are
losed and if possible, secured. Personal injury will result if the
PINCH POINT guarding falls or the access panels swing closed.
KEEP CLEAR

Rotating Parts
If it is necessary to work on the machine, ensure the power is
disconnected before servicing the machine. Rotating parts within
the machine can cause serious or fatal injuries.

4 Safety 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 Chip Augers
The chip augers can be programmed to start and stop automatically.
Keep all body parts out of these as they may rotate unexpectedly.
Keep out of the discharge tubes as well. The collected chips will cut
you.

Dangerous Voltages
Potential lethal voltages and currents are present within the system.
Service should be done only by qualified personnel.

CAUTION
Job Set-up
Incorrect tooling, machining practices, or improperly clamped
BROKEN TOOLS, LOOSE CHUCKS
workpieces or fixtures will create devastating results. Double check
OR LOOSE PARTS WILL BE
EJECTED WITH DEADLY FORCE
your set-up before beginning any machining operations.
DOORS ARE TO PROTECT OPERATOR
FROM CHIPS AND COOLANT ONLY

Hot Areas
This warning is on areas of the machine that have a lot of heat associated
with it. Serious burns will result if personnel come in contact with these
areas.

Machine Awareness
Most areas of the machine are not designed to support the weight of the
operator.

Proper Attire
Watch for loose clothing and other personal belongings. These may be-
come entangled in the machine and cause personal injury.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Safety 5

 Tooling
Do not slow, or try to stop the rotating tools. These are extremely sharp and
will cut or cause extensive bodily harm.

Eye-Safety
Always wear safety glasses or a face mask during machine operation.
Flying hot chips will cause injury.

Electrical Service
Electrical shock is possible with any machine. Only authorized certified
personnel should service the machine. Do not open the control cabinet or
any other electrical guarding.

Spills
Clean up spills immediately. Liquids, such as machine coolant will be
slippery and will cause a hazardous work environment.

Fixtures
Improperly clamped workpieces can be thrown from the fixture with deadly
force.

Keep Clear
Do not put anything between the tool and the workpiece. Severe personal
injury can occur.

6 Safety 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 Safety Windows
Improperly clamped work pieces may be
thrown through the windows; serious personal
injury may occur. Use care and proper
machining techniques during all operations.
Replace windows immediately if they are
damaged or show signs of wear. Contact the
Haas Service Department for Replacement
parts.

DECLARATION OF WARNINGS, C AUTIONS, AND N OTES

Throughout this manual, important and critical information is contained in the following styles/formats; Warnings,
Cautions and Notes:

Warnings are used when there is an extreme danger to the operator and/or to the machine. Take all steps
necessary to heed the warning given. Do not continue if you cannot follow the warning instructions. An example
warning is:
WARNING!
NEVER PUT HANDS BETWEEN TOOL CHANGER AND SPINDLE HEAD.

Cautions are used when there is the potential for minor personal injury or mechanical damage. An example of a
caution is:

CAUTION! Power down the machine before performing any maintenance tasks.

Notes are used to give additional information to the operator about a particular step or procedure. This informa-
tion should be taken into consideration by the operator as he/she performs the step or procedure to ensure there
is no confusion. An example of a note is:

NOTE: If machine is equipped with the optional extended Z-clearance table, follow
these guidelines:
• Avoid extreme loads on the center of table or far end of table. The weight
of the part should be distributed evenly over the table or one pad.
• Flatness of part should be within 0.002".

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Safety 7

8 Safety 96-8000 rev L June 2005
 OPERATION

The following is a visual introduction to a HAAS mill. Some of the features shown will be highlighted in their
appropriate sections.

Floppy Disk Drive USB

USB Memory Device

MEMORY RUN SETUP

LOCK MODE MODE Run/Setup Mode Key
Key Memory Lock HOLD TO
Switch
RUN WORK LIGHT
I
O

Hold to Run Button

GFI
PROTECTED Work Light Switch
(GFI Protected)
Detail A
(Some Features are Optional)

Pull down Remote Jog Control Work Beacon

to Lock in
Place Tool Changer Optional
POWER ON POWER OFF

Clip Board
3 (Umbrella Type) Second
50
SPINDLE LOAD

100 150

Window
O 180

Open Home EMERGENCY STOP

(See Detail A)
Position Switch HANDLE

0 0
90
90 10
10

20 80

80
20
70

70 30
30
Operator
60
60 40
40
50 50

Push in 2 CYCLE START FEED HOLD

0

G & M Code Manual &

Reference List Assembly
Window Data
Closed Side Mount Tool Tray
Position Tool Changer Vise Handle
(SMTC) Beeper
14
11 12 13
9
10
Work Light (2) Holder
15 16

8
17 18 19

7
5 6

POWER ON POWER OFF

SPINDLE LOAD

1
50 100 150
O 180

Control Pendant
EMERGENCY STOP

Pull up 10
90
HANDLE

0 0
90
10
20 80

80
20
70

70 30
30

20HP 2-SPEED
60
60 40
40
50 50

GEAR DRIVE
CYCLE START FEED HOLD

10,000 RPM
Window 0

Tool Holding Vise Air Gun

Operator Door (2)

Chip Chute

Tool Release Button

Table
Tool Crib
SMTC Optional
Coolant Tank Double Arm P-Cool
Chip Basket Assembly Assembly

Spindle Coolant Nozzles

View Rotated 908 CW

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Introduction 9

 Serial Port 1
Serial Port 2
Ethernet

Main Circuit
Breaker Switch
Coolant Chip
Sweep Filter
(Optional)
MFIN/CLG

Coolant
Chip
Sweep
View Rotated for Clarity Cabinet Fan
replacement
Nozzle
(Optional)
Control Box Fan
(runs intermittently)

Control Box

Control Box
Air Filter
Lube Panel
Assembly Coolant Chip
Sweep Motor
Assembly
(Optional)
Tramp Oil
Container Coolant Tank Assembly

Air Filter/Regulator Oil Pressure

Oil Pump
Auxiliary Gauge TSC Filter
Hose Barb Air Port assembly
(Shop Air) 100 Micron
Intake
Primary Filter
Coolant assembly
Oil Fill Pump
MAX
Air Nozzle (To Max
Air Line Mark)
TSC
MIN
Coolant Dirt
Oil Reservoir Oil Filter Pump Indicator
assembly
Lube Panel Cover Removed

10 Introduction 96-8000 rev L June 2005

PENDANT K EYBOARD INTRODUCTION
The keyboard is broken up into eight sections: Function Keys, Jog Keys, Override Keys, Display Keys, Cursor
Keys, Alpha Keys, Mode Keys and Number Keys. In addition there are miscellaneous keys and features
located on the pendant and keyboard which are described briefly.

POWER TOOL DISPLAY

RESET UP CHANGER EDIT INSERT ALTER DELETE UNDO
RESTART RESTORE PRGRM CURNT
CONVRS POSIT OFFSET COMDS

MEM SINGLE DRY OPTION BLOCK

BLOCK RUN STOP DELETE
F1 F2 F3 F4 ALARM PARAM SETNG HELP
MESGS DGNOS GRAPH CALC
MDI ORIENT ATC ATC
TOOL NEXT TOOL PART COOLNT
OFFSET ZERO DNC SPINDLE FWD REV
MEASURE TOOL RELEASE SET
PAGE
HOME HAND .0001 .001 .01 .1
UP
JOG .1 1. 10. 100.
+B CLNT
CHIP
FWD +A +Z -Y UP
CURSOR ZERO
ALL ORIGIN SINGL
HOME
RET G28
CHIP JOG CLNT
+X -X
STOP LOCK DOWN
PAGE LIST SELECT ERASE
END SEND RECV
DOWN PROG PROG PROG
+Y -Z -A AUX
CHIP
REV -B CLNT

& @ :
SHIFT A B C D E 7 8 9
OVERRIDES
-10 100% +10 HAND % $ !
FEED RATE FEED RATE FEED RATE
CNTRL
FEED
F G H I J K 4 5 6
100% +10 HAND
*1
, ?
-10
SPINDLE SPINDLE SPINDLE
CNTRL
SPIN
L M N O P Q 2 3
+ = #
CW STOP CCW SPINDLE R S T U V W - 0
5% 25% 50% 100% / [ ] WRITE
RAPID RAPID RAPID RAPID X Y Z EOB ( ) CANCEL SPACE
ENTER

Power On- Turns the machine on.

Power Off- Turns the machine off.

Spindle Load Meter - Displays the spindle load, in percent.

Emergency Stop - This stops all axes motion, stops the spindle and tool changer, and turns off the coolant
pump.

Jog Handle - This is used to jog all axes. Can also be used to scroll through program code or menu items
while editing.

Cycle Start - Starts a program. This button is also used to start a program in Graphics mode.

Feed Hold - Will stop all axis motion. Note: Spindle will continue to turn during cutting.

Reset - Will stop the machine (axes, spindle, coolant pump, and tool changer are stopped). This is not a
recommended method to stop the machine, as it may be difficult to continue from that point.

Power Up / Restart - When this key is pressed, the axes will return to the machine zero position and a tool
change may occur. See Setting 81 in the Settings chapter for more information.

Restore - This button aids the operator in recovering the tool changer from an abnormal stop. See the tool
changer section for more information.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Introduction 11

 Memory Lock Key Switch - This switch prevent the operator from editing programs and from altering settings
when turned to the locked position. The following describes the hierarchy of locks:
Key switch locks Settings and all programs.
Setting 7 locks parameters.
Setting 8 locks all programs.
Setting 23 locks 9xxx programs.
Setting 119 locks offsets.
Setting 120 locks macro variables.

Second Home Button - This button will rapid all axes to the coordinates specified in work Offset G129. The
sequence is as follows: First, the Z axis is returned to machine zero, then the X and Y axes are moved, then
the Z axis is moved to its second home position. This feature will work in any mode except DNC.

Work Light Switch - This switch will turn on the work light inside of the machine.

Keyboard Beeper - Located at the top of the parts tray. The volume can be adjusted by turning the cover.

FUNCTION KEYS
F1- F4 Keys - These buttons have different functions depending upon which mode of operation you are in. For
example, F1-F4 will cause a different action in Editing mode, than Program mode, than Offset mode. See the
specific mode section for further descriptions and examples.

Tool Offset Meas (Tool Offset Measure) - Used to record tool length offsets during part setup.

Next Tool - Used to select the next tool from the tool changer (usually used during part setup).

Tool Release - Releases the tool from the spindle when in MDI mode, zero return mode, or handle jog mode.

Part Zero Set - Used to automatically set work coordinate offsets during part setup (see Setting Offsets in the
Operation section).

JOG K EYS
Chip FWD (Chip Auger Forward) - Starts optional chip auger in the “Forward” direction, moving chips out of the
machine.

Chip Stop (Chip Auger Stop) - Stops auger movement.

Chip REV (Chip Auger Reverse) - Starts the optional chip auger in the “Reverse” direction, which is useful in
clearing jams and debris from auger.

X/-X, Y/-Y, Z/-Z, A/-A and B/-B (axis keys)- Allows the operator to manually jog axis by holding down the
individual button or pressing the desired axes and using the jog handle.

Jog Lock - Works with the axes buttons. Press jog lock and then an axis button and the axis will move to
maximum travel or until jog lock is pressed again.

CLNT Up (Coolant Up) - Moves the optional Programmable Coolant (P-Cool) nozzle up.

CLNT Down (Coolant Down) - Moves the optional P-Cool nozzle down.

AUX CLNT (Auxiliary Coolant) - Pressing this key while in MDI mode will turn on the optional Through the
Spindle Coolant (TSC) system; pressing it a second time will turn off TSC.

12 Introduction 96-8000 rev L June 2005

O VERRIDE K EYS
These keys give the user the ability to override the speed of non-cutting (rapid) axes motion, programmed feeds
and spindle speeds.

-10 - Decreases current feedrate by 10%.

100% - Sets overridden feedrate to programmed feedrate.

+10 - Increases current feedrate by 10%.

-10 - Decreases current spindle speed by 10%.

100% - Sets overriddenspindle speed to programmed speed.

+10 - Increases current spindle speed by 10%.

Hand Cntrl Feed (Handle Control Feedrate) - Pressing this button allows the jog handle to be used to control
the feedrate in ±1% increments.

Hand Cntrl Spin (Handle Control Spindle) - Pressing this button allows the jog handle to be used to control
spindle speed in ±1% increments.

CW - Starts the spindle in the clockwise direction. This button is disabled on CE (export) machines.

CCW - Starts the spindle in the counterclockwise direction. This button is disabled on CE (export) machines.

The spindle can be started or stopped with the CW or CCW buttons any time the machine is at a Single Block
stop or the Feed Hold button has been pressed. When the program is restarted with Cycle Start, the spindle
will be turned back on to the previously defined speed.

STOP - Stops the spindle.

5% / 25% / 50% / 100% Rapid - Limits machine rapids to the value on the key. The 100% Rapid button allows
maximum rapid.

Override Usage
The feedrate can be varied from 0% to 999% of the programmed value while in operation. This is done with the
feedrate +10%, -10% and 100% buttons. The feedrate override is ineffective during G74 and G84 tapping
cycles. Feedrate override does not change the speed of any auxiliary axes. During manual jogging, the feedrate
override will adjust the rates selected from the keypad. This allows for fine control of the jog speed.

The spindle speed can also be varied, from 0% to 999%, using the spindle overrides. It is also ineffective for
G74 and G84. In the Single Block mode, the spindle may be stopped. It will automatically start up upon
continuing the program (pressing Cycle Start).

By pressing the Handle Control Feedrate key, the jog handle can be used to control feedrate from 0% to 999%
in ±1% increments. By pressing the Handle Control Spindle key, the jog handle can be used to control spindle
speed in ±1% increments (from 0% to 999%).

Rapid moves (G00) may be limited to 5%, 25%, or 50% of maximum using the keypad. If the 100% rapid is
too fast, it may be set to 50% of maximum by Setting 10.

In the Settings page, it is possible to disable the override keys so that the operator cannot select them. These
are Settings 19, 20 and 21.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Introduction 13

 The Feed Hold button acts as an override button as it sets the rapid and feed rates to zero when it is pressed.
The Cycle Start button must be pressed to proceed after a Feed Hold. The door switch on the enclosure also
has a similar result but will display “Door Hold” when the door is opened. When the door is closed, the control
will be in Feed Hold and Cycle Start must be pressed to continue. Door Hold and Feed Hold do not stop any
auxiliary axes.

The operator can override the coolant setting by pressing the COOLNT button. The pump will remain either on
or off until the next M-code or operator action (see Setting 32).

Overrides can be reset to defaults with an M30 and/or pressing Reset (See Setting 83).

D ISPLAY K EYS
Displays keys provide access to the machine displays, operational information and help pages. Some of these
keys will display additional screens when pressed more than once.

Prgrm/Convrs - Displays the currently selected program. In Edit mode, pressing the button twice will enter the
Quick Code (See Quick Code section) feature and pressing it three times will enter the Visual Quick Code
feature (See Visual Quick Code section in Quick Code).

Posit (Position) - Displays the position of the machine axes. Pressing the Page Up/Down buttons scroll
through operator, machine, work, and distance-to-go formats and displays them in larger formats.

Offset - Displays the tool length geometery, radius offsets, wear offsets, and coolant position. Pressing Offset
button twice or pressing the Page Up button will access the work offsets page.

Curnt Comds (Current Commands) - Displays the current program details (for example G, M, H and T codes),
Spindle load information and machine axes positions while the program runs. Press Page Up/ Down to view
tool load/vibration (See the tool load/vibration section), tool life (See the tool life section), maintenance, macro
variables, program timers and program code details.

Alarm / Mesgs (Alarms / Messages) - Displays the alarm viewer and message screens. There are three alarm
screens, the first shows the currently active alarms (first press of the Alarm/Mesgs button). Pressing the Right
Arrow button switches to the Alarm History screen, which keeps a history of recent alarms.

Pressing Right Arrow again switches to the alarm viewer screen. This screen shows one alarm at a time with
its description. The default will be the last alarm in the alarm history. The user can then scroll through the
alarms by pressing the Up and Down Arrow buttons. Also, the user can enter an alarm number and press
Enter/Write and the name and description will be displayed.

Pressing Alarm/mesgs a second time will display a page for user messages and notes. Use the keypad to
enter messages for other operators/programmer or write notes for a current project. If there is a message, every
time the machine is powered on the messages page will display. Messages are displayed at power up until
they are erased. See Message section for more details.

Param / Dgnos (Parameters / Diagnostics) - Displays parameters that define the machines operation. To find
a known parameter, type in the number and press the up or down arrow. Parameters are set at the factory and
should not be modified by the user.

A second press of the Param / Dgnos key will display the first page of diagnostic data. This information is
mainly used for troubleshooting by a certified Haas service technician. The first page of diagnostic data is
discrete inputs and outputs. Pressing Page Down will display the additional pages of diagnostic data.

Setng / Graph (Settings / Graphics) - Displays and allows changing of user settings. (Note that the settings
are grouped; these groups are for a specific subject). To find a known setting, type in the number and press the
up or down arrow.

14 Introduction 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Pressing the Setng / Graph key a second time enables Graphics mode. In Graphics mode the user can view
the generated tool path of the program and, if necessary, debug the program before running it (See Graphics
Mode in the Operation section)

Help / Calc (Help / Calculator) - Displays an abbreviated manual. In this on-screen manual there are brief
descriptions of G and M codes, definitions of control features, troubleshooting and maintenance issues.

Pressing Help/ Calc a second time will display the help calculator. Press the Page Down button to scroll
through the calculator pages (see the calculator section).

CURSOR KEYS
Cursor Keys give the user the ability to move to various screens and fields in the control and are used in the
editing of CNC programs.

Home - This button will move the cursor to the top-most item on the screen; in editing, this is the top left block
of the program.

Up / Down Arrows - moves up/down one item, block or field.

Page Up / Down - Used to change displays or move up/down one page when viewing a program.

Left Arrow - Used to select individually editable items when viewing a program; moves cursor to the left. It is
used to scroll through setting selections.

Right Arrow - Used to select individually editable items when viewing a program; moves cursor to the right. It
is used to scroll through setting selectionsnd moves the zoom window right when in graphics mode.

End - This button generally moves the cursor to the bottom-most item on the screen. In editing, this is the last
block of the program.

ALPHA KEYS
The alpha keys allow the user to enter the letters of the alphabet along with some special characters. Some of
the special characters are entered in by first pressing the “Shift” key.

Shift - The shift key provides access to additional characters on the keyboard. The additional characters are
seen in the upper left of some of the alpha and number keys. Pressing Shift and then the character will enter
that character on the data entry line. When entering text, UPPER CASE is the default, to enter lower case
characters, press and hold the Shift key.

When a control has a fifth axis installed, the B axis is selected for jogging by pressing the Shift button and
then the +/-A jog keys.

EOB - This is the End-Of-Block character. It is displayed as a semicolon (;) on the screen and it signifies the
end of a program line.

( ) - Parentheses are used to separate CNC program commands from user comments. They must always be
entered as a pair. Note: Any time an invalid line of code is received through the RS-232 port while receiving a
program, it is added to the program between parenthesis.

/ - The right slash is used in the Block Delete feature and in Macro expressions. If this symbol is the first
symbol in a block and a Block Delete is enabled, then that block is ignored at run time. The symbol is also
used for division (divide by) in macro expressions (see the Macro section).

[ ] - Square brackets are used in macro functions. Macros are an optional software feature (see the Macro
section).

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Introduction 15

 MODE KEYS
Mode keys change the operational state of the CNC machine tool. Once a mode button is pressed, the buttons
in the same row are made available to the user. The current mode is always displayed on the top line just to
the right of the current display inbetween parenthesis.

Edit- Selects edit mode. This mode is used to edit programs in controls memory.

Insert - Pressing this button will enter commands into the program in front of the cursor. This button will also
insert the text from the clipboard to the current cursor location, and is also used to copy blocks of code in a
program (See Advanced Editor Section)

Alter - Pressing this button will change the highlighted command or text to the newly entered commands or
text. This button will also change the highlighted variables to the text stored in the clipboard, or move a se-
lected block to another location.

Delete - Deletes the item that the cursor is on, or delete a selected program block.

Undo - Undoes up to the last 9 edit changes, and deselect a highlighted block.

MEM (Memory) - Selects the memory mode. This page displays the current program that is selected in the list
of programs.

Single Block - Turns single block on or off. When single block is on, only one block of the program is ex-
ecuted, for every press of Cycle Start.

Dry Run - This is used to check actual machine movement without cutting a part. (See the Dry Run section in
the Operation Chapter)

Opt Stop (Optional Stop) - Turns on and off optional stops. Also see G103 in the G-Code chapter.

When this feature is ON and an M01 (optional stop) code is programmed, the machine will stop when it
reaches the M01. The machine will continue once Cycle Start is pressed. However, depending on the look-
ahead function (G103), it may not stop immediately (See block look ahead section). In other words, the block
look-ahead feature may cause the Optional Stop command to ignore the nearest M01.

If the Optional Stop button is pressed during a program it will take effect on the line after the highlighted line
when the Opt Stop button is pressed.

Block Delete - Turns On/Off block delete function. Blocks with a slash (“/”) as the first item are ignored (not
executed) when this option is enabled. If a slash is within a line of code, the commands after the slash will be
ignored if this feature is enabled. Block Delete will take effect two lines after Block Delete is pressed, except
when cutter compensation is used, in this case, block delete will not take effect until at least four lines after
the highlighted line. Processing will slow down for paths containing block deletes during high-speed machining.
Block Delete will stay active when power is cycled.

MDI/DNC - MDI mode is the “Manual Data Entry” mode where a program can be written but it is not entered
into memory. DNC mode “Direct Numeric Control”, allows large programs to be “drip fed” into the control so it
can be executed (See DNC mode section)

Coolnt (Coolant) - Turns the optional coolant on and off.

Orient Spindle - Rotates the spindle to a given position and then locks the spindle. Can be used during setup
to indicate parts.

ATC FWD - Rotates the tool turret to the next tool. To load a specific tool into the spindle, enter MDI mode,
type a tool number (T8) and press ATC FWD.

ATC REV - Rotates the tool turret to the previous tool. To load a specific tool into the spindle, enter MDI mode,
type a tool number (T10) and press ATC REV.

16 Introduction 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Handle Jog - Selects axis jogging mode .0001, .1 - 0.0001 inches (metric 0.001mm) for each division on the
jog handle. For dry run, .1 inches/min.

.0001/.1, .001/1., .01/10., .1/100. - The first number (top number), when in inch mode, selects that amount to
be jogged for each click of the jog handle. When the mill is in MM mode the first number is multiplied by ten
when jogging the axis (e.g. .0001 becomes 0.001mm). The second number (bottom number) is used for dry run
mode and is used to select the speed feedrate and axis motions.

Zero Ret (Zero Return) - Selects Zero Return mode, which displays axis location in four different categories,
they are; Operator, Work G54, Machine and Dist (distance) to go. You can page up or down to view each
category in a larger format by itself.

All - Returns all axes to machine zero. This is similar to Power Up/Restart except a tool change will not occur.
This can be used to establish the initial axes zero position.

Origin - Sets selected displays and timers to zero.

Singl (Single) - Returns one axis to machine zero. Press the desired axis letter and then press the Singl Axis
button. This can be used to establish the initial axis zero position.

HOME G28 - Returns all axes to machine zero in rapid motion. Home G28 will also home a single axis in the
same manner if you enter an axis letter and press the home G28 button. CAUTION! There is no warning
message to alert the operator of any possible collision. For example, if the Z-axis is down in amongst parts on
the table when X or Y is zeroed, a crash can result.

List Prog (List Programs) - Displays the programs stored in the control.

Select Prog - Makes the highlighted program, in the program list, the current program. Note: The current
program will have an “*” preceding it in the program list.

Send - Transmits programs out the RS-232 serial port. (See RS-232 section)

Recv - Receives programs from the RS-232 serial port. (See RS-232 section)

Erase Prog - Erases the highlighted program in Memory mode or the entire program when in MDI mode.

N UMERIC KEYS
The numeric keys give the user the ability to enter numbers and a few special characters into the control.

Cancel - The Cancel key is used to delete the last character entered.

Space - Used to format comments placed into programs or in the message area.

Write / Enter - General purpose enter key.

- (Minus sign)- Used to enter negative numbers.

. (Decimal Point)- Used for decimal precision.

POSITION D ISPLAYS
The following are the position displays.

Home Page
This display shows the four displays (Operator, Work, Machine and Distance-to-go) simultaneously. Use the
Page Up/Down keys or the UP/Down Arrows to scroll through these pages.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Introduction 17

 Operator Display
This display is used to show the distance the operator has jogged any of the axes. This does not represent the
actual distance the axis is from machine zero. Each axes can be zeroed by selecting an axis (X, Y or Z) and
pressing the Origin key.

Work Display
This displays the position of X, Y and Z in relation to the part; not machine zero. On power-up, it will display the
value in work offset G54 automatically. The position can only be changed by entering values in work offsets
G54 through G59, G110 through G129, or by commanding a G92 in a program.

Machine Display
This display is the actual axes position away from machine zero.

Distance To Go
This display shows the distance remaining before the axes reaches its commanded position.

O FFSETS D ISPLAY
There are two offsets pages. The first offset page is the Tool Geometry/Wear page. The second is the Work
Zero offset page.

Tool Geometry/Wear
The Tool/Geometry page is displayed by pressing the Offset button. This page displays tool numbers, tool
length geometry and wear values, tool radius geometry and wear values, flutes values and actual diameter
values. If the mill has the optional programmable coolant unit, this page will also display the coolant position
entered for each tool. To enter values into these fields key in a number and press F1. Keying in a number and
pressing F2 will set the negative of the entered value into the offsets. Entering a value and pressing Write/Enter
will add the value to what is currently entered. To clear all the values on the page press Origin, the mill will
prompt the operator with "Zero All (Y/N) press Y to zero all or press N to leave all the values unchanged.

Work Zero Offset

The Work Zero Offset page is displayed by pressing the Offset button twice. This page displays the values
entered so that each tool knows where the part is located on the table. A value can be set for each axis (X,Y
and Z). The operator can scroll to each column by using the arrow key or by pressing the Page Up or Down
buttons to access the other offsets in the Work Zero section. In order for each tool to locate the part, the tools
used in a program must be "Touched off" the part (See the Operations section) . A value can also be entered by
typing in a number and pressing F1, or the value can be added to an existing value by pressing Enter/Write.
Keying in a number and pressing F2 will set the negative of the entered value into the offsets. To clear all the
values on the page press Origin, the mill will prompt the operator with "Zero All (Y/N) press Y to zero all or
press N to leave all the values unchanged.

CURRENT COMMANDS D ISPLAY

The following are several Current Command pages in the control. Press the Current Commands button and use
the Page Up/Down buttons to navigate through the pages.

Program Command Check Display This display shows a current overview of the important commands. It
shows the programmed spindle speed (PGM), the commanded spindle speed commanded by the program
(CMD), and the actual spindle speed (ACT). In addition, this display shows the CW, CCW, or stopped com-
mand being sent to the spindle and the current transmission gear (if equipped) position.

This display also shows the position of the axes. There are four coordinates displayed (operator, work, ma-
chine, or distance to go) (See Positions Display section above for description) and are selected using the
cursor Up/Down or Page Up/Down keys.

18 Introduction 96-8000 rev L June 2005

If the machine has the optional Programmable Coolant (P-Cool), the current spigot position will be displayed as
well.

Current Display Command This display shows the current program codes and their current value. These
values may not be changed in this display.

Macro Variables Display This display shows a list of the macro variables and their present values. As the
control runs the program, the variables will be updated. In addition the variables may be modified in this display;
refer to the “Macros” section for more information.

Operation Timers Display This display shows the current power-on time, cycle start time (the amount of total
time the machine has been running a program), and the feed time (total amount of time the machine has been
feeding). These times may be reset to zero by using the cursor up and down keys to highlight the desired title
and pressing the ORIGIN button.

Listed below these times are two M30 counters, these counters are used for counting completed parts. They
may be set to zero independently to provide for the number of parts per shift and total parts.

Tool Life display This display shows the time the tool is used in a feed (Feed-Time), the time the tool is in the
spindle (Total-Time), and the number of times the tool has been selected (Usage). This information is used to
assist in predicting tool life. The values in this display can be reset to zero by highlighting the value and
pressing the Origin button. Note: The maximum value is 32767, once this value is reached, the control will start
back at zero.

This display may also be used to generate an alarm when a tool has been used a specific number of times.
The last column is labeled “Alarm,” entering a number in that column will cause the machine to generate an
alarm (#362 Tool Usage Alarm) when that count is reached.

Tool Load Monitor and Display The operator can enter the maximum amount of tool load, in %, that is
expected for each tool. The operator can select the appropriate action to be taken when this load is exceeded.
This display provides for the entry of this alarm point and also displays the largest load that tool has seen in a
previous feed.

NOTE: Surface Feet per Minute (SFM) and Chip Load are displayed on the Current Commands page. SFM is
displayed as fpm (feet per minute) or mpm (meters per minute).

The tool load monitor function operates whenever the machine is in a feed operation (G01, G02, or G03). If the
limit is exceeded the action specified in Setting 84 will occur (See settings section for a description)

Axis Load Monitor Axis load is 100% to represent the maximum continuous load. Up to 250% can be shown,
however an axis load above 100%, for an extended period of time, can lead to an overload alarm.

Maintenance This page allows the operator to activate and deactivate a series of checks (see Maintenance
section).

A LARMS / M ESSAGES D ISPLAY

Alarms
The Alarms display is selected by pressing the ALARM / MESGS button. There are three types of Alarms
screens. The first shows any current alarms. Pressing the Right Arrow key switches to the Alarm History
screen, which shows the previously received alarms. Pressing Right Arrow again switches to the alarm viewer
screen. This screen shows one alarm at a time with its description. The user can then scroll through all the
alarms by pressing the Up and Down Arrow keys. Also, the user can enter an alarm number and press Write/
Enter and the name and description will be displayed. Pressing Page Down will display a page for user mes-
sages and notes.

Note: The Cursor and Page Up and Page Down buttons can be used to move through a large number of alarms.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Introduction 19

 Messages
The Message Display can be selected by pressing the Alarm/Mesgs button twice. This is an operator message
display and has no other effect on operation of the control. Use the keypad to enter the messages. The cancel
and space keys can be used to remove existing messages and the Delete button can be used to remove an
entire line. Data is automatically stored and maintained even in a power-off state. The message display page
will come up during power-up if there are no alarms present.

S ETTING / G RAPHIC D ISPLAY F UNCTION

The Settings are selected by pressing the Setng/Graph button. There are some special functions in the
settings which change the way the mill behaves; refer to the “Settings” section for a more detailed description.

The Graphics function is selected by pressing the Setng/Graph button twice. Graphics is a visual dry run of
your part program without the need to move the axes and risk tool or part damage from programming errors.
This function may be considered more useful than the Dry Run mode, because all of your work offsets, tool
offsets, and travel limits can be checked before running the machine. The risk of a crash during setup is greatly
reduced.

Graphics Mode Operation

To run a program in Graphics, a program must be loaded and the control must be in either MEM or MDI mode.
Press the Setng/Graph key twice to select the Graphics Mode.

The Graphics display has a number of features within it.

Key Help Area The right side of the top line is the function key help area. Function keys that are currently
available are displayed here with a brief description of their usage.

Locator Window The lower right part of the screen has two modes. It can display the whole table area and
indicate where the tool is currently located during simulation. Or it can be used to display four lines of the
program that is being executed. The F4 key is used to toggle between these two modes.

Tool Path Window In the center of the display is a large window that represents a top view of the X and Y
axes. It displays tool paths during a graphics simulation of the program. Rapid moves are displayed as dotted
lines, while feed motion is displayed as fine continuous lines. (Note: Setting 4 can disable the rapid path.) The
places where a drilling canned cycle is used are marked with an X. Note: Setting 5 can disable the drill mark.

Scaling the Tool Path Window The tool path window can be scaled. After running a program, pressing F2
will scale the tool path. Use the Page Down key and the arrow keys to select the portion of the tool path to be
magnified. Pressing F2 will display a rectangle (zoom window) indicating the magnified area. Note: The Help
area will flash, indicating the view rescaling process. The locator window (small view at the bottom right) shows
the entire table with an outline of where the Tool Path window is zoomed. The Page Up key reduces the zoom
(unzooms) the rectangle one step. After sizing and/or moving the zoom window, pressing the Write/Enter key
will complete the zoom process and re-scale the Tool Path window. After the Tool Path window is re-scaled, the
Tool Path window is cleared and the program must be re-run to see the tool path.

The scale and position of the Tool Path window is saved in Settings 65 through 68. Leaving graphics to edit the
program and then returning to Graphics will keep the previous scaling in effect.

Pressing F2 and then the Home key will expand the Tool Path window to cover the entire table.

Z Axis Part Zero Line This feature consists of a horizontal line displayed on the Z-axis bar at the top-right
corner of the graphics screen to indicate the position of the current Z-axis work offset plus the length of the
current tool. While a program is running, the shaded portion of the bar indicates the depth of Z-axis motion. The
user will be able to watch the position of the tool tip relative to the Z-axis part zero position as the program
runs.

20 Introduction 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Control Status The lower left portion of the screen displays control status. It is the same as the last four lines
of all other displays.

Position Window The location of all enabled axes can be viewed in this window. Press F3 to open this
window. Additional presses of the F3 key or the up and down arrows will display the various position formats.
This window also displays the current scale of the tool path window and the current simulated tool number.

D ATE AND T IME

The control contains a clock and date function. To view the time and date, press the Help button until the date
and time appears.

Setting the date and time, use the Up and Down arrow keys to select the date or time. Use the Right and Left
arrow keys or the jog handle to make adjustments.

SCREEN SAVER
The Haas machine includes a screen saver for the operator’s pendant. After a period of time, with no keyboard
activity the screen saver will start. When the screen saver is active, the words “Screen saver” will be displayed
and will change positions every 2 seconds. The screen saver is cancelled by any key press, jog handle motion
or machien alarm. the screen saver will not activate if the control is in Sleep, Jog, Edit, Graphics, MEM or MDI
mode with the PRGRM screen displayed.

H ELP / C ALCULATOR F UNCTION

Help
The Help Feature is selected by pressing the Help button, which will display a mini-manual

Use the alphanumeric keys to select the topics, or use the Page Up/Down button or Up/Down arrows to
navigate through the help topics and descriptions.

Calculator
The Calculator function is selected by pressing the Help key twice. Use the Page Up / Down keys to move
through the pages.

All of the Calculator functions will do simple add, subtract, multiply, and divide operations. When one of the
functions is selected, a calculator window appears with the possible operations (LOAD, +, -, *, and /). LOAD is
initially highlighted, and the other options can be selected with the left and right cursor arrows. Numbers are
entered by typing them in and pressing the Write/Enter key. When a number is entered and LOAD is selected,
that number will be entered into the calculator window directly. When a number is entered when one of the
other functions (+ - * /) is selected, that calculation will be performed with the number just entered and any
number that was already in the calculator window. The calculator will also accept a mathematical expression
such as 23*4-5.2+6/2. It will evaluate it (doing multiplication and division first) and place the result, 89.8 in this
case, in the window.

Function Keys: The function keys can be used to copy and paste the calculated results into a section of a
program or into another area of the Calculator feature.

F3 In EDIT and MDI modes the F3 key will copy the highlighted triangle/circular milling/tapping value into the
data entry line at the bottom of the screen. This is useful when the calculated solution will be used in a pro-
gram.

In the Calculator function, pressing F3 copies the value in the calculator window to the highlighted data entry for
Trig, Circular or Milling/Tapping calculations.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Introduction 21

 F4 In the Calculator function, this button uses the highlighted Trig, Circular or Milling/Tapping data value to
load, add, subtract, multiply, or divide with the calculator.

Trigonometry Help Function

The Trigonometry calculator page will help solve a triangular problem. Enter the lengths and the angles of a
triangle and when enough data has been entered, the control will solve for the triangle and display the rest of
the values. Use the Cursor Up/Down buttons to select the value to be entered with WRITE. For inputs that have
more than one solution, entering the last data value a second time will cause the next possible solution to be
displayed.

HELP (MEM) O00000 N00000000

CALCULATOR

0.000000000
LOAD + - * /
ANGLE 3
(MACHINE) ANGLE 1 40.000
X 0.0000 in ANGLE 2 72.000
Y 0.0000 in ANGLE 3 68.000
Z 3.5179 in SIDE 2 SIDE 1
SIDE 1 10.0000
SIDE 2 14.7958
SIDE 3 14.4244
ANGLE 1 ANGLE 2
SIDE 3
F3 copies calculator value to highlighted field in this
or other calculator screens. F3 also copies calculator
value to the data entry line of edit screens.
F4 copies highlighted data to the calculator field.

Circular Interpolation Help

The Circular calculator page will help solve a circle problem. You enter the center, radius, angles, start and end
points; when enough data has been entered, the control will solve for the circular motion and display the rest of
the values. Use the Cursor Up/Down buttons to select the value to be entered with Write. In addition, it will list
alternate formats that such a move could be programmed with a G02 or G03. The formats can be selected
using the Cursor Up/Down buttons, and the F3 button will import the highlighted line into a program you are
editing.

HELP (MEM) O00000 N00000000

CALCULATOR
0.000000000 CENTER X 13.0000
CENTER Y 20.0000 E
LOAD + - * / START X 4.0000
(MACHINE) START Y 10.0000
X 0.0000 in END X 7.0000
Y 0.0000 in END Y 32.0416
Z 3.5179 in RADIUS 13.4536
ANGLE 111.527
DIRECTION CW
S
16 19. J10.
16 R13. 4536
16 19. J10
G91 G2 X3. Y22. 0416 R13. 4536

For inputs that have more than one solution, entering the last data value a second time will cause the next
possible solution to be displayed. To change the CW value to the CCW value, highlight the CW/CCW column
and press the Write/Enter button .

Circle-Line Tangent Calculator

This feature provides the ability to determine points of intersection where a circle and a line meet as tangent.
Enter two points, A and B, on a line and a third point, C, away from that line, the control will calculate the point
of intersection. The point is where a normal line from point C will intersect with the line AB, as well as, the
perpendicular distance to that line.

22 Introduction 96-8000 rev L June 2005

CIRCLE-CIRCLE TANGENT
CIRCLE1 X 5.0000 CIRCLE-LINE TANGENT
CIRCLE1 Y 6.0000
RADIUS 1 4.0000 a b
CIRCLE2 X 0.0000 POINT A X 5.0000
CIRCLE2 Y 0.0000 Y 3.0000
RADIUS 2 2.0000 POINT B X 1.0000
Y 4.0000 a
TANGT A X 1.3738 c b POINT C X 0.0000
Y 7.6885 Y 0.0000
TANGT B X 7.3147 c
Y 2.7378 d
TANGT C X -1.8131 RADIUS 4.1231
Y 0.8442 Type: STRAIGHT TANGT PT X 1.0000
TANGT D X 1.1573 TANGT PT Y 4.0000
Use F and T to form G-code.
Y -1.6311
F1 for alternate solution

Circle-Circle Tangent Calculator

This feature provides the ability to determine points of intersection between two circles or points. The user
provides the location of two circles and their radii. The control then calculates all the intersection points that
are formed by lines tangent to both circles. Note: For every input condition where there are two disjointed
circles, there are up to eight intersection points. Four points are obtained from drawing straight tangents and
four points by forming cross tangents. The F1 key is used to toggle between the two diagrams. When "F" is
pressed, the control will prompt for the from and to points (A, B, C, etc.) that specify a segment of the diagram.
If the segment is an arc, the control will also prompt for C or W (CW or CCW). Sample G code is then dis-
played at the bottom of the screen. When "T" is entered, the previous to point becomes the new from point and
the control prompts for a new to point. To enter the solution (line of code), switch to MDI or Edit and press F3,
as the G-code is already on the input line.

Milling/Tapping Help
The Milling/Tapping Help page will help you solve equations relating to milling and tapping. They are:

1. SFM (Surface Feet per Minute) = (CUTTER DIAMETER IN.) * RPM * 3.14159 / 12

2. (FEED IN./MIN.) = RPM / (THREAD PITCH)

3. (CHIP LOAD IN.) = (FEED IN./MIN.) / RPM / #FLUTES

Enter all but one of the values and the control will compute the remaining value. Note that the RPM value for
the first two equations are the same entry.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Introduction 23

 HELP (MEM) O00000 N00000000
CALCULATOR
MILLING
0.000000000
CUTTER DIA 0. 5000 IN
LOAD + - * / SURFACE SPEED 5. 0000 FT/MIN RECOMMENDED
(MACHINE) RPM 38
X 0.0000 in FLUTES 4
Y 0.0000 in FEED 6. 0000 IN/MIN
Z 3.5179 in CHIP LOAD 0. 0365 IN RECOMMENDED
MATERIAL LOW CARBON UNALLOYED STEEL
TOOL TYPE CARBIDE
CUT WIDTH 2. 0000 IN
CUT DEPTH 0. 0500 IN REQUIRED POWER
PGM F0. TAPPING
ACT F0. THREADS 3. 0000 /IN
PGM S0 RPM 40
CMD S0 FEED 13. 3333 IN/MIN
ACT S0

Note: When metric units are selected, the units displayed change to millimeters, threads per mm, mm per
minute, and meters, respectively.

Materials
The Milling calculator includes a field called MATERIAL, which, when highlighted, allows the operator to select
a type of material from the list using the left and right arrow keys.

A recommended surface speed and chip load will be displayed based on the material chosen, as shown.

SURFACE SPEED *.*** FT/MIN RECOMMENDED **** TO *****

CHIP LOAD *.*** IN RECOMMENDED *.*** TO *.***

Also, the required horsepower will be calculated and displayed as shown below on the right.

CUT DEPTH *.*** IN REQUIRED POWER *.* HP

When in metric mode, the required power is displayed as KW.

Drill/Tap Chart
Pressing the Help/Calc button a third time displays a Drill and Tap chart

SPINDLE WARM-UP PROGRAM

All spindles, which have been idle for more than 4 days, must be thermally cycled prior to operation. This
warm-up will prevent possible overheating of the spindle due to the settling of lubrication. A 20-minute warm-up
program (number O02020) has been supplied with the machine which will bring the spindle up to speed slowly,
allowing the spindle to thermally stabilize. This program may also be used daily for spindle warm-up prior to
high-speed use.

RUN-STOP-JOG-CONTINUE
This feature allows the operator to stop a running program, jog away from the part, and then resume program
execution. The following is an operation procedure:

1. Press Feed Hold to stop the running program

2. Press X, Y or Z followed by the Handle Jog button. The control will store the current X, Y, and Z positions.
Note: Axes other than X, Y, and Z cannot be jogged.

24 Introduction 96-8000 rev L June 2005

3. The control will display the message "Jog Away". Use the jog handle, remote jog handle, jog and jog-lock
buttons to move the tool away from part. Control buttons such as AUX CLNT (optional Through Spindle Coolant
- TSC), or Coolnt to turn on/off the coolant (AUX CLNT requires that the spindle is rotating and the door is
closed). The spindle can be controlled by pressing CW, CCW, Stop, Tool Release. Tools can be swapped out
and the associated length and diameter offsets adjusted, however, when the program is continued, the old
offsets will be used for the return position. Therefore, it is unsafe and not recommended to change tools and
offsets when the program is interrupted.

4. Jog to a position as close as possible to the stored position, or to a position where there will be an unob-
structed rapid path back to the stored position.

5. Return to the previous mode by pressing MEM, MDI, or DNC. The control will only continue if the mode that
was in effect when stopped is re-entered.

6. Press Cycle Start. The control will display the message Jog Return and rapid X and Y at 5% to the position
where Feed Hold was pressed, then return the Z-axis. Caution: The control will not follow the path used to jog
away. If Feed Hold is pressed during this motion, the mill will enter a feed hold and display the message "Jog
Return Hold". Pressing Cycle Start will cause the control to resume the Jog Return motion. When the motion is
completed, the control will again go into a feed hold state.

7. Press Cycle Start again and the program will resume normal operation.

COOLANT LEVEL GAUGE

The coolant level is displayed on the control on the Current Commands page. A vertical bar on the left of the
screen shows the status of the coolant. The display will flash once the coolant reaches a point that could
cause intermittently coolant flow.

OPTIONS
200 Hour Control Option Try-Out
Options that normally require a unlock code to activate (Rigid Tap, Macros, etc.) can now be activated and
deactivated as desired simply by entering the number "1" instead of the unlock code to turn it on. Enter a "0"
to turn off the option. An option activated in this manner will be automatically deactivated after a total of 200
power-on hours. Note that the deactivation only occurs when power to the machine is turned off, not while it is
running. An option can be activated permanently by entering the unlock code. Note that the letter "T" will be
displayed to the right of the option on the parameter screen during the 200 hour period. Note that the safety
circuit option is an exception; it can be turned on and off only by unlock codes.

To enter a 1 or 0 into the option you must have setting 7 (Parameter Lock) turned off and the Emergency Stop
button pressed in.

When the option reaches 100 hours the machine will give an alarm warning that the try out time is almost up.

To permanently activate an option, contact your dealer

Rigid Tapping
Synchronized tapping eliminates the need for expensive, floating tap holders, and prevents lead-thread distor-
tion and start-thread pullout.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Introduction 25

 Auto Door
The auto door option opens the machine doors automatically via the part program. This reduces operator
fatigue, or allows for unattended operation when used with a robotic loader.

Hard Disk Drive, USB and Ethernet

Store and transfer data between your Haas machine(s) and a network. Program files are easily transferred to
and from memory, and allows DNC of large files at up to 800 blocks per second.

Auto Air Gun

Provides a constant air blast to the cutting tool to clear chips safely and automatically during dry machining, or
blow chips and coolant out of deep pockets. Activated by M code, the air blast can be programmed to turn on
while the spindle is turning, or at the end of a cycle (air consumption 6 scfm).

High Intensity Lighting

Halogen lights provide bright, even illumination of the work area for part inspection, job setup and changeovers
— ideal for jobs like mold making. Lights turn on and off automatically when doors open and close, or can be
activated manually via a switch on the lights.

Macros
Create subroutines for custom canned cycles, probing routines, operator prompting, math equations or func-
tions, and family-of-parts machining with variables.

Rotation and Scaling

Use rotation in conjunction with work offset probing to speed workpiece setup, or to rotate a pattern to another
location or around a circumference, etc. Use scaling to reduce or enlarge a toolpath or pattern.

Part Probing
Renishaw - This tool probe option incorporates an easy-to-use Renishaw tool probe with macros. This optional
package enables all Haas VMCs to automatically define tool offsets; and when combined with macro program-
ming, it allows operators to automatically update tool offsets (length and diameter) and check for broken tools
while in process.

Marposs - Marposs ML75 laser/non-contact tool check system and T25 high precision, contact, work setting
and inspection probe for Haas 40 taper VMCs. ML75 measures tools up to 6.88" (175mm) diameter. Customer
must provide own tool holder to accommodate 1/2" cal bar.

M-Function Relays
Adds extra relays to increase productivity. These additional M code outputs may be used for activating probes,
auxiliary pumps, part loaders, etc.

Remote jog Handle

The versatile Haas Remote Jog Handle can be used to move all axes, as well as edit programs, override
spindle speeds and feedrates, single-block scroll through programs — and much more.

Programmable Coolant Spigot

The optional programmable coolant spigot allows the user to direct the coolant stream to the most optimum
location in order to flush out chips from the cutting area. The direction of the coolant can be changed by the
CNC program.

Automatic Chip Auger

The automatic chip auger assists the user in removal of chips for jobs with heavy material removal.

Through the Spindle Coolant (TSC)

The Haas Through The Spindle Coolant (TSC) option uses an auxiliary coolant pump to supply high-pressure
coolant to the cutting tool.

26 Introduction 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Extra Rapid Traverse
With the XRT option, high-pitch ballscrews combined with powerful brushless servomotors provide faster rapids
and cutting feeds. Reducing non-cutting time during machining, especially on repetitive parts and multiple
fixtures, means faster cycle times and lower cost per part.

Rotation and Scaling

Use rotation in conjunction with work offset probing to speed workpiece setup, or to rotate a pattern to another
location or around a circumference, etc. Use scaling to reduce or enlarge a tool path or pattern.

Linear Scales
When absolute positioning accuracy is necessary, linear scales are the only way to ensure exact axis posi-
tioning under the fluctuating conditions that exist in todays machine shops. Linear scales ensure positioning
accuracy along X, Y and Z axes by compensating for the thermal variations inherent in all machine tools. These
scales deliver positioning accuracy of 2 microns to guarantee the type of precision that mold making and other
high-tolerance machining applications demand.

Memory Lock Key Switch

Locks memory to prevent accidental or unapproved program editing by unauthorized personnel. It can also be
used to lock settings, parameters, offsets and macro variables.

Spindle Orientation
The Spindle Orientation option allows spindle positioning to a specific, programmed angle, using the standard
spindle motor and the standard spindle encoder for feedback. This option provides inexpensive, accurate (0.1
degree) positioning.

Second Home Button

This option allows the operator to quickly send the axes to a second, user-defined Home position in addition to
the machine’s standard Home position.

Programmable Coolant
P-Cool is a multi-position programmable nozzle that automatically directs coolant precisely at the part. The
position of the nozzle is controlled via the program, saving operator time by eliminating constant adjustments

Remote Jog Handle

The versatile Haas Remote Jog Handle can be used to move all axes, as well as edit programs, override
spindle speeds and feedrates, single-block scroll through programs etc.

High Speed Machining

High speed machining makes it possible for an increase in the removal rate of material, improve surface finish,
and reduce cutting forces which will reduce machining costs and extend the life of the tools.

High Speed Machining is most often required for the machining of smoothly sculpted shapes as is typical of
mold making. The Haas High Speed Machining option increases the amount of lookahead to 80 blocks and
allows full speed (500 inches per minute) blending of feed strokes.

It is important to understand that high speed machining works best with smoothly blended shapes where the
feed rate can remain high through the blend of one stroke to the next. If there are sharp corners, the control will
always need to slow down or corner rounding will occur.

The affect that blending of strokes can have on feed rate is always to slow down motion. The programmed feed
rate (F) is thus a maximum and the control will sometimes go slower than that in order to achieve the required
accuracy.

Too short of a stroke length can result in too many data points. Check how the CAD/CAM system generates
data points to insure that it does not exceed 1000 blocks per second.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Introduction 27

 Too few data points can result in either “facetting” or blending angles which are so great that the control must
slow down the feed rate. Facetting is where the desired smooth path is actually made up of short, flat, strokes
that are not close enough to the desired smoothness of the path.

High Speed Tooling – The tool holders should be an AT-3 or better with a nylon back-up screw. The toler-
ances maintained in the AT-3 design are the minimum that would be recommended for a high speed process.
The nylon back-up screw increases collet grip on the tool and creates a better seal to aid in coolant transfer.

Use single angle collet chucks and collets for best grip and concentricity. These collet systems are made up of
a long single angle located in the holder. The angle per side should be eight degrees or less for best results.
Avoid double angle collet systems when maximum rigidity and close tolerance are dictated. It is recommended
that minimum engagement of 2/3 of the full length of the bore in the double split single angle collet. However for
better results 3/4 to full engagement is preferred if possible.

28 Introduction 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 MACHINE POWER-U P
Turn the machine on by pressing the Power-On button on the pendant.
The machine will go through a self test and then display either the Messages screen, if a message was left, or the
Alarms screen. In either case the mill will have one alarm present (102 SERVOS OFF). Pressing the Reset button
a couple times will clear the alarms. If an alarm cannot be cleared the machine may need servicing, if this is the
case call your dealer.
Once the alarms are cleared the machine needs a reference point to start all operations from; this point is called
“Home”. To home the machine, press the Power-Up Restart button. Caution: Automatic motion will begin once this
button is pressed Keep away from the inside of the machine and the tool changer. Note that pressing the Power-
Up button will automatically clear alarm 102 if it was present.
After home is found the Current Commands page is displayed, and the machine is now ready to run.

PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION
Manual Data Input (MDI)
Manual Data Input (MDI) is a means to command automatic CNC moves without using a formal program.
Press the MDI button to enter this mode. Programming code is entered by typing in the commands and pressing
Enter at the end of each line. Note that an End of Block (EOB) will be automatically inserted at the end of each
line.
PROGRAM (MDI) N00000000

G97 S1000 ;
G00 X2. Z0.1 ;
G92 X1.8 Z-1. F0.05 ;
X1.78 ;
X1.76 ;
X1.75 ;

To edit the MDI program use the keys to the right of the Edit button. Cursor to the point that is changing, then the
different edit functions can be used.
To enter an additional command to the line, enter the command and press Enter.
To change a value use the arrow buttons or the jog handle to highlight the command, enter the new command and
press Alter
To delete a command, highlight the command and press Delete.
The Undo key will reverse changes (up to 9 times) that have been made to the MDI program.

An MDI program can be saved to the memory of the control. To do so cursor to the beginning of the program (or
press Home), enter a program name (programs need to be named using the format Onnnnn; the letter “O” followed
by up to 5 numbers) and press Alter. This will add the program to the list of programs and clear MDI. To re-access
the program, press List Prog and select it.
The data in MDI is retained after exiting MDI mode and when the machine is turned off

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 29

To clear the current MDI commands press the Erase Prog button.
Numbered Programs
To create a new program, press LIST PROG to enter the program display and the list of programs mode. Enter a
program number (Onnnnn) and press Select Prog key or Enter. If the program exists, it will be selected. If it does
not yet exist, it will be created. Press Edit to show the new program. A new program will consist of only the
program name and an End of Block (;).
Numbered programs are retained when the machine is turned off
Basic Editing of MDI and Numbered Programs
The only difference between an MDI program and a numbered program is the O code. To edit an MDI program,
simply press MDI. To edit a numbered program, select it, then press Edit.
Type in the program data and press enter. Program data falls into three categories, addresses, comments or
EOBs.
PROGRAM (EDIT) O00741 F1 KEY TURNS MENU ON/0FF
PROGRAM EDIT SEARCH MODIFY I/O HELP
O00005
O00741

G00 X0 Z0.1 ;
G74 Z-0.345 F0.03 K0.1 ;
;
G00 X2. Z0.1 ;
G74 X1. Z-4. I0.2 K0.75 D255 ;
G00 X3. Z0.1 ;
G74 X4. Z-4. I0.2 K0.75 D255 ;
G00 X2. Z0.9 ;
G74 X1. Z4. I0.2 K0.75 D255 ;
G00 X3. Z0.9 ;
G74 X4. Z4. I0.2 K0.75 D255 ;
;
G00 X0 Z0.5 T101 ;
G83 Z-1.5 Q0.25 R0.03 ;
G51 ;

To add program code to the existing program, highlight the code that the additional code will go in front of, type in
the data and press the Insert key. More than one code, such as X, Y, and Z, can be entered before pressing Insert.
Address data is a letter followed by a numeric value. For example: G04 P1.0. The G04 commands a dwell (pause)
and the P1.0 is the length (1 second) of the dwell.
Comments can be either alpha or numeric characters, but must be prefaced with parentheses. For example: (1
second dwell). Comments can be a maximum of 80 characters.
Lower-case text is to be entered between parentheses (comments). To type lower case text, press the Shift key
first (or hold it in) and then the letter or letters.
End of Blocks are entered by pressing the EOB button and are displayed as a semicolon (;). These are used like a
carriage return at the end of a paragraph. In CNC programming an EOB is entered at the end of a string of program
code.
An example of a line of code using the three types of commands would be:
G04 P1. (1 second dwell);
There is no need to put any symbols or spaces between the commands. Usually a space is put between elements
for ease of reading (Editing).
To alter characters, highlight a portion of the program using the arrow keys or the jog handle, enter the replacement
code, and press Alter.
To remove characters, highlight the characters and press Delete.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 30

To delete characters , highlight the command and press Delete.
Use the Undo button to reverse any changes. The Undo button will work for the last nine entries.
There is no save command, as the program is saved as each line is entered.
Converting an MDI program to a numbered program
An MDI program can be converted to a numbered program. To do so cursor to the beginning of the program (or
press Home), enter a program name (programs need to be named using the format Onnnnn; the letter “O” followed
by up to 5 numbers) and press Alter. This will add the program to the list of programs and clear MDI. To re-access
the program, press List Prog and select it.
Searching the program
While in MDI, EDIT or MEM mode, the cursor up and down keys can be used to search the program for specific
codes or text. To search for particular character(s), enter the character(s) on the data entry line (i.e. G40) and
press the cursor up or down keys. The cursor up key will search for the entered item backwards (towards the start
of the program) and the cursor down key will search forward (towards the end of the program).
Deleting Programs
To delete a program, press LIST PROG. Use the cursor up or down keys to highlight the program number (or type
in the program number) and press the ERASE PROG key.
Highlighting ALL at the end of the list and pressing the ERASE PROG key will delete all the programs in the list.
There are some important programs that you will receive with your machine; they are O02020 (spindle warm up)
and O09997, O09999 (Visual Quick Code). You will want to save these programs to a floppy disk or to your PC
before erasing all programs.
Note: The UNDO key will not recover programs that are deleted.
Renaming Programs
After creating a program, the program number can be renamed by changing the name (Onnnnn), in Edit mode, on
the first line and pressing the Alter key. Another method of changing the program name is to enter the list of
programs (press List Prog) cursor to the program, type in the letter “O” followed by a five-digit number, such as
O12345, and press the Alter key.
Maximum Number of Programs
If the maximum number of programs (500) is in the controls memory, the message “DIR FULL” will display and the
program cannot be created.
Program Selection
Enter the program directory by pressing “List Prog”; this will display the stored programs. Scroll to the desired
program and press “Select Prog” to select the program. Entering the program name and pressing “Select Prog” will
also select a program.
Once “Select Prog” is pressed, an asterisk (“*”) appears next to the program name. This is the program that will be
run when the mode is changed to MEM and CYCLE START is pressed. It is also the one that you will see on the
EDIT display.
When in MEM mode, another program can selected and displayed quickly by entering the program number
(Onnnnn) and pressing the Up/Down arrow, or F4.
The selected program will remain selected after the machine is turned off.
Loading Programs to the CNC Control
Numbered programs can be copied from the CNC control to a personal computer (PC) and back again. It is best if
the programs are saved to a file that ends in “.txt”. That way, they will be recognized by any PC as a simple text
file. Programs can be transferred by many different methods such as RS-232 and floppy disk. Settings, offsets
and macro variables can be transferred between the CNC and a PC in a similar manner.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 31

Corrupted program data, if received by the CNC, is converted into a comment, stored in the program, and an alarm
is generated. However, the data will still be loaded in to the control.
RS-232
RS-232 is one way of connecting the Haas CNC control to another computer. This feature enables the programmer
to up and download programs, setting and tool offsets from a PC.
Programs are sent or received through the RS-232 port (Serial Port 1) located on side of the control box (Not the
operators pendant).
A cable (not included) is necessary to link the CNC control with the PC. There are two styles of RS-232 connec-
tions the 25-pin connector and the 9-pin connector. The 9-pin connector is more commonly used on PCs.

Pin #1 Shield Ground

Pin #2 TXD-Transmit Data
Pin #3 RXD-Receive Data
25 4 Pin #4 RTS (optional)
Pin Pin 1
Pin #5 CTS (optional)
Pin #7 Signal Ground
14 5
Pin Pin 2
ALE n 13 E Pin 1
FEM MAL
Pi in 13
P 4
Pin
1
Pin
9 Pin 1
25-25 Pin Cable
2 5
ALE Pin
FEM MAL
E
Pin 1
3
1 Pin 1
Pin
9-25 Pin Cable
WARNING!
One of the biggest causes of electronic damage is a lack of a good
ground on both the CNC mill and the computer. The lack of grounding
will damage the CNC, or the computer, or both.

Cable length
The following lists baud rate and the respective maximum cable length.
9,600 baud rate: 100 feet (30 m) RS-232
38,400 baud rate: 25 feet (8 m) RS-232
115,200 baud rate: 6 feet (2 m) RS-232
The settings between the CNC control and the other computer must match. To change the setting in the CNC
control, enter the Settings page (press Setng/Graph) and scroll to the RS-232 settings (or enter “11” and press the
up or down arrow). Use the up/down arrows to highlight the settings and the left and right arrows to change the
values. Press Enter when the proper selection is highlighted.
The settings (and defaults) that control the RS-232 port are:
11 Baud Rate (9600) 24 Leader to Punch (None)
12 Parity (Even) 25 EOB Pattern (CR LF)
13 Stop Bits (1) 37 Number Data Bits (7)
14 Synchronization Xon/Xoff
There are a number of different programs that can link with the Haas control. An example is the Hyper Terminal
program that is installed with most Microsoft Windows applications. To change the settings on this program go to
the “File” drop down menu at the top left. Chose the “Properties” selection from the menu and then press the
“Configure” button. This will open up the port settings; change these to match what is in the CNC control.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 32

To receive a program from the PC, push the LIST PROG key. Move the cursor to the word ALL and push the RECV
RS-232 key and the control will receive all main and sub programs until it receives a “%” indicating end of input. All
programs sent to the control from the PC must begin with a line containing a single “%” and must end with a line
containing a single “%”. Note that when using “ALL”, your programs must have a Haas formatted program number
(Onnnnn). If you do not have a program number, type in a program number before you push RECV RS-232 and the
program will be stored under that number. You can also select an existing program for input and it will be replaced.
To send a program to the PC, use the cursor to select the program and push the SEND RS-232 key. You can
select “ALL” to send all of the programs in the memory of the control. A setting (Setting 41) can be turned on to add
spaces to the RS-232 output and improve the readability of your programs.
Parameters, settings, offsets, and macro variables pages may also be sent individually via RS-232 by selecting the
“LIST PROG” mode, selecting the desired display screen, and pushing the SEND key. They can be received by
pushing the RECV key and selecting the file on the PC that is to be received.
The file can be viewed on a PC by adding “.txt” to the file name from CNC control. Then open the file on a PC using
a program such as Windows Notepad.
If an abort message is received, check the set-up between the mill and the PC and the cable.
Optional Floppy Drive
All files must be on MS-DOS formatted 1.44M floppy disks and must reside in the root directory. This means that
the desired file cannot be in a folder on the disk.
All programs must begin with a line beginning an ending with a single “%”. Note: Files saved by the control will
have these lines.
To load a program from a floppy disk, press the LIST PROG button, enter the floppy disk file name and press F3
button. The control will receive all main and sub programs.
Please note that when using the “ALL” command to receive every program on the disk, all the programs must have
a Haas-convention file name (Onnnnn).
To save a program to a floppy disk, press the PRGRM button and then the LIST PROG button. Enter a file name
and press the F2 key. You can select “ALL” to send all of the programs in memory. Note: Setting 23 (Program Edit
Lock) must be turned off.
To erased a file from the floppy drive, press the List Prog button, type “DEL <file name>” where “<file name>” is the
name of the file on the floppy disk. Do not use the program number, unless it is also the file name. Press Write/
Enter.
Parameters, Settings, Macro Variables, and Offsets are sent to the floppy disk by pressing LIST PROG, selecting
the desired display screen (PARAM, SETNG, OFSET, or the Macro Variables page of CRNT CMDS), entering a file
name and pressing the F2 key. They can be received by pressing the F3 key.
Note: It is not recommended that parameters be loaded into the machine. If parameters need to be loaded contact
the Haas service department.
Disk Directory
To get a program directory listing, select the PRGM/LIST PROG mode, and press F4. This will generate a disk
directory listing that will be saved in a program (the default program is O08999). Press Edit to view the contents of
the disk.
File Delete
On the List Prog page, type “DEL <filename>” where <filename> is the name of a file on the floppy disk. Press
WRITE. The message “DISK DELETE” will appear, and the file will be deleted from the floppy disk.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 33

Direct Numeric Control (DNC)
Direct Numeric Control (DNC) is another method of loading a program into the control.
Direct Numeric Control (DNC) is the ability to run a program as it is received through the RS-232 port. This feature
differs from a program loaded through the RS-232 port in that there is no limit to the size of the CNC program. The
program is run by the control as it is sent to the control; the program is not stored in the control.

PROGRAM (DNC) N00000000 PROGRAM (DNC) N00000000

;
WAITING FOR DNC . . . O01000 ;
(G-CODE FINAL QC TEST CUT) ;
(MATERIAL IS 2x8x8 6061 ALUMINUM) ;
;
(MAIN) ;
;
M00 ;
(READ DIRECTIONS FOR PARAMETERS AND SETTINGS) ;
(FOR VF - SERIES MACHINES W/4TH AXIS CARDS) ;
(USE / FOR HS, VR, VB, AND NON - FORTH MACHINES) ;
(CONNECT CABLE FOR HA5C BEFORE STARTING
THE PROGRAM) ;
(SETTINGS TO CHANGE) ;
(SETTING 31 SET TO OFF) ;
;
;

DNC RS232 DNC RS232

DNC END FOUND

DNC Waiting for program Program received from DNC

DNC is enabled using Parameter 57 bit 18 and Setting 55. Turn the parameter bit on (1) and change Setting 55 to
On. It is recommended that DNC be run with Xmodem or parity selected because an error in transmission will then
be detected and will stop the DNC program without crashing. The settings between the CNC control and the other
computer must match. To change the setting in the CNC control, enter the Settings page (press Setng/Graph) and
scroll to the RS-232 settings (or enter 11 and press the up or down arrow). Use the up/down arrows to highlight the
variables and the left and right arrows to change the values. Press Enter when the proper selection is highlighted.
The recommended RS-232 settings for DNC are:
Settings: 11 Baude Rate Select: 19200
12 Parity Select: NONE
13 Stop Bits:1
14 Synchronization: XMODEM
37 RS-232 Date Bits: 8

DNC is selected by pressing MDI twice (The DNC page “Program DNC)” at the top of the page. Note: DNC needs a
minimum of 8k bytes of user memory available. This can be done by going to the List Programs page and checking
the amount of free memory on the bottom of the page.
The program sent to the control must begin and end with a %. The data rate selected (Setting 11) for the RS-232
port must be fast enough to keep up with the rate of block execution of your program. If the data rate is too slow,
the tool may stop in a cut.
Start sending the program to the control before the Cycle Start button is pushed. Once the message “DNC Prog
Found” is displayed, press Cycle Start.
Floppy Disk DNC
Floppy disk DNC is selected by entering the floppy disk file name and pressing MDI a second time when (must be
in MDI mode). Note: Pressing MDI a third time will stop the DNC and the message “DISK ABORT” will be received.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 34

DNC Notes
While a program is running in DNC, you cannot change modes. Therefore, editing features such as Background
Edit is not available.
DNC supports Drip Mode. The control will perform one block (command) at a time. Each block will be performed
immediately with no block look-ahead. The exception is when Cutter Compensation is commanded. Cutter Com-
pensation requires three blocks of motion commands to be read prior to a compensated block being performed.
Full duplex communication during DNC is possible by using the G102 command or DPRNT to output axes coordi-
nates back to the controlling computer.

ALPHABETICAL ADDRESS CODES

The following is a list of the address codes used in programming the CNC.

A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z Axis motion – Specifies N Number of block – Identifies or numbers each

axis motion (distance or angle). block of a program (optional).
D Tool diameter selection – Selects the tool O Program number/name – Used to identify a
diameter or radius used for cutter compensation. program. It is followed by a number between 0 and
See the Cutter Compensation section. 99999.
E Contouring accuracy – Used, with G187, to select P Delay time or program number – Used to enter
the accuracy required when cutting a corner during either a time in seconds or a program number for a
high-speed machining operations. See the section subroutine call.
on Contouring Accuracy. Q Canned cycle optional data – Used in canned
F Feed rate – Used to enter a feed rate; the value is cycles and is followed by a signed number, between
entered in inches per minute or mm per minute. 0 and 8380.000 for inches or between 0 and
G, M Preparatory functions – See the chapters on 83800.00 for metric.
G or M codes. R Canned cycle and circular optional data –
H Tool length offset selection – Selects the tool Defines the reference plane for canned cycles and
length offset. The H is followed by a number circular interpolation. R is followed by a signed
between 0 and 200. number between -15400.0000 and 15400.0000 for
inches or between -39300.000 and 39300.000 for
I, J, K Canned cycle and circular optional data – millimeters.
These address characters are used to specify data
for some canned cycles and circular motions. They S Spindle speed command – Used to specify the
are entered either as inches or mm. spindle speed.
L Loop count for repeated cycles – Specifies a T Tool selection code – Used to select the tool for
repetition count for some canned cycles and the next tool change.
auxiliary functions.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 35

 PART SETUP
It is necessary to properly secure the part to the table. This can be done a number of ways, using vises, chucks or
using T-bolts and toe clamps.

Chuck

Toe Clamp Vise

TOOLING
Tool Functions (Tnn)
The Tnn code is used to select the next tool to be placed in the spindle from the tool changer. The T address does
not start the tool change operation; it only selects which tool will be used next. M06 and will start a tool change
operation, for example T1M06 will put tool 1 in the spindle.
NOTE: There is no X or Y motion required prior to performing a tool change and, however, if your work piece or
fixture is large, you may need to position X or Y prior to a tool change in order to prevent a crash between the tools
and the part or fixture.
You may command a tool change with the X, Y, and Z axes in any position, and the control will bring the Z axis up
to the machine zero position prior to starting the tool change. The control will move the Z axis to a position above
machine zero during a tool change but will never move below machine zero. At the end of a tool change, the Z axis
will be at machine zero.

Tool Holders
There are number of different spindle options for the Haas mills. Each of these types requires a specific tool holder.
The most common spindles are the #40 and #50 taper. 40 taper spindles are divided into two types, BT and CT;
these are referred to as BT40 and CT40. The tool changer is only capable of holding one type. The decal on the
front of the machine will tell what type of tooling the machine is set up for.
The 50-taper spindle option use CT #50 taper tool holders; referred to as “CT 50.”

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 36

Pull Studs
A pull stud or retention knob is required to secure the tool holder into the spindle. Pull studs are threaded into the
top of the tool holder and are specific to the type of spindle. The following chart describes the pull studs used on
the Hass mill. Do not use the short shaft or pull studs with a sharp right angle (90-degree) head; they will not work
and will cause serious damage to the spindle.

40T CT 0.990 TSC only

C 24-Piece Kits 5/8-11 Inch Threads 0.172 Thru.
D
• TPS24CT (TSC) o
• PS24CT (Non-TSC) JMTBA Standard MAS 403 P40T-1 45
B
50T CT 1.780
1”-8 Inch Threads 1.386 TSC only
A • TPS24CT50 (TSC)
E 0.31 Thru.
• PS24CT50 (Non-TSC)
o
JMTBA Standard MAS 403 P50T-1 45

40T BT 1.104 TSC only

M16 X 2 Threads 0.172 Thru.
• TPS24BT (TSC)
A B C D E • PS24BT (non-TSC)
CT CAT V-Flange JMTBA Standard MAS 403 P40T-1 45o
40T 2.69 2.50 .44 5/8”-11 1.75
1.780
50T 4.00 3.87 .44 1”-8 2.75 50T BT
M24 X 3 Threads 1.386 TSC only
BT MAS 403 • TPS24E50 (TSC)
2.57 2.48 .65 M16X2 1.75 • PS24E50 (Non-TSC) 0.31 Thru.
40T 45 o

50T 4.00 3.94 .91 M24X3 2.75 JMTBA Standard MAS 403 P50T-1

Tool Holder Assembly

Tool holders and pull studs must be in good condition and tightened together with wrenches or they may stick in
the spindle. Clean the tool holder body (the part that goes into the spindle) with a lightly oiled rag to leave a film,
which will prevent rusting.
40 Taper CT Tool Holder

Pull Stud Tool (Center Drill)

Install a tool into the tool holder as instructed by the tool manufacture.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 37

 TOOL CHANGER
There are two types of tool changers available for the Haas mills; these are the side mount tool changer and the
umbrella style. Both types are commanded in the same manner, but each one is set up differently.
Before loading tools the mill must be zero returned (power up restart button), which should have been done at
machine power up.
The tool changer is manually operated using the tool release button and the ATC FWD and ATC REV buttons.
There are two tool release buttons; one on the side of the spindle head cover and the second on the keypad.
Loading the Tool Changer
Specifications – Do not exceed the maximum specifications
Side-Mount Shuttle
40-Taper 40-Taper 50-Taper 50-Taper 40-Taper
VF1-4, (MDC 500), VF 5 VF 6-11 (HS 3-7), VF1-5
(EC300-500) VF 5-11 [EC-1600]

Max.Tool Diameter
with all pockets full 3" 3" 4" 4"(4.9”) [4”] 8”

Max.Tool Diameter
if tool is declared 5” (6”) 6” 7” 10" (9.8”) [20”] N/A
oversized

Max.Tool Length
from gauge line 11” 16” (12”) 16” 16" (23.6”) [30”] N/A

Max.Tool Weight 12 lb. 12 lb. 30 lb. 30 lb. 12 lb.

120 lb Max.
Total Tool Weight

CAUTION! Extremely heavy tool weights should be distributed evenly. This means heavy tools should be located
across from one another, not next to each other. Ensure there is adequate clearance between tools in the tool
changer; this distance is 3.6" for a 20-pocket.
Note: Low air pressure or insufficient volume will reduce the pressure applied to the tool unclamp piston and will
slow down tool change time or will not release the tool.
CAUTION: Keep clear of the tool changer during power up, power down, and any tool changer operations.
Tools are always loaded into the tool changer by first installing the tool into the spindle. Never load a tool di-
rectly into the tool changer.
Note: Tools that make a loud bang when being released indicate a problem and should be checked before serious
damage to the tool changer occurs.
Tool Loading for a Side Mount Tool Changer
NOTE: A normal size tool has a diameter of less than 3" for 40-taper machines, or less than 4" for 50-taper ma-
chines. Tools larger than these measurements are considered large size.
1. Ensure the tools you will be loading are of the correct pull stud type for your mill.
2. Enter Handle Jog mode.
3. Press the OFSET button. From a fresh Power Up/Restart, press the End key, then the Page Down key once to
reach the Tool Pocket Table display. From a normal operating state, press Page Up/Down until you reach the Tool
Pocket Table.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 38

4. Clear any current “Large” or “Heavy” tool designations. Use the cursor keys to scroll to any tool pocket that has
an “L” or “H” next to it. Press Space, then Write/Enter to clear the “Large” or “Heavy” tool designations.

1 2

Large (and heavy) tool with surrounding pockets empty Heavy Tool (not large)

5. Press Origin to reset the Tool Pocket Table to default values. This will place tool 1 in the spindle, tool 2 in pocket
1, tool 3 in pocket 2, etc. This is done to clear the previous Tool Pocket Table settings as well as renumber the Tool
Pocket Table for the next program. Another way to reset the Tool Pocket Table is to enter 0 (zero) and press Origin,
this will reset all the values to zero.

NOTE: You cannot have two different tool pockets holding the same tool number.
Trying to enter a tool number already displayed in the Tool Pocket Table will
result in an “Invalid Number” error.
6. Determine if your next program will need any large tools. A large tool has a diameter of greater than 3" for 40-
taper machines and greater than 4" for 50-taper machines. If you will not be using any large tools, proceed to Step
10. If you will be using large tools, proceed to the next step.
7. Organize your tools to match to your CNC program. Determine the numerical positions of any large tools and
designate those pockets as Large in the Tool Pocket Table. To designate a tool pocket as “Large”, scroll to that
pocket and press L, then Write/Enter.

NOTE: When setting up the tooling for your CNC program, large tools need to have
the surrounding pockets empty to prevent a tool changer crash. However, large
tools can share adjoining empty pockets. Placing large tools next to each other
will help conserve space in the tool changer.
CAUTION! A large tool cannot be placed in the tool changer if one or both of the surrounding pockets already
contain tools. Proceeding with this action will cause the tool changer to crash.
8. When you have designated all necessary Large and Heavy tool pockets, press the Origin key to renumber the
Tool Pocket Table. At this point, the machine is ready to accept tool 1 into the spindle.
9. Take tool 1 in your hand and insert the tool (pull stud first) into the spindle. Turn the tool so that the two cutouts
in the tool holder line up with the tabs of the spindle. Push the tool upward while pressing the Tool Release button.
When the tool is fitted into the spindle, release the Tool Release button.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 39

 Tool Release Button

10. Press the “Next tool” button.

11. Repeat Steps 9 and 10 until all the tools are loaded.

High-Speed Side Mount Tool Changer

The high-speed tool changer has an additional tool assignment, which is “Heavy”. Heavy tools are defined as tools
weighing more than 4 pounds. If a tool, heavier than 4 pounds is used, the tool must be entered in the table with an
“H” (Note: All large tools are considered heavy). During operation an “h” in the tool table* denotes a heavy tool in a
large pocket.
As a safety precaution, the tool changer will run at a maximum of 25% of the normal speed if changing a heavy
tool. The pocket up/down speed is not slowed down. The control restores the speed to the current rapid, once the
tool change is complete. If problems are encountered changing unusual or extreme tooling, contact the Haas
Service Department for assistance.

Note: The high-speed side-mount tool changer has the added ability to designate
a tool as “Heavy” in the Pocket-tool table. A “Heavy Tool” is defined as a tool
weighing 4 pounds or heavier.
H - Heavy, but not necessarily large (large tools require empty pockets on either side).
h - Heavy small diameter tool in a pocket designated for a large tool (must have empty pocket on both sides). The
lower case “h” is placed by the control; never enter a lower case “h” into the tool table.
Large tools are assumed to be heavy.
Heavy tools are not assumed to be large.
On non-high speed tool changers, “H” and “h” have no effect.
This means that pockets designated as normal size are not dedicated to any particular tool; during tool change
operations a normal size tool can be taken from one pocket and put back into another. Tool pockets designated as
large size are dedicated only to large tools; large tools will not migrate to an empty normal pocket during a tool
change.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 40

Tool Loading Flowchart
Loading the
Side Mount Tool (from Power On)
Changer

Press POWER UP/RESTART

Wait for Zero Return

Enter Handle
Jog Mode

Press OFFSET, END

PAGE DOWN to view
the Tool Pocket Table. A “Heavy Tool” is a tool weighing 4 or more pounds.

Remove Large A “Large Tool” has a diameter greater than 3"

Any Large or Heavy Y tool designations by
scrolling to each “L”
for 40-taper mills, or greater than 4" for
tool designations and pressing SPACE, 50-taper mills.
displayed? WRITE.

N Do not enter a lower case “h” or lower case

Press ORIGIN.
“l”(L) in the tool table.

Organize your tools

Will you need any
Large or Heavy
Y according to your CNC
program. Determine
numerical positions of
tools? Large tools.

N Scroll to the tool

Insert Tool into the pocket that will hold
spindle. a large tool and press
L, WRITE. (Or press H
for a heavy tool )
Press PAGE UP, HOME
to display Offset Tool
Length screen. Do you have
additional large tools
Y
to designate?
Jog Z-Axis to set tool offset.
Press TOOL OFFSET MESUR.
Press NEXT TOOL.
N
Press ORIGIN

Y Do you have additonal

tools to load?

N
END

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 41

Using 0 for a Tool Designation
A 0 (number zero) can be inserted in the tool table in place of a tool number. If this is done the tool changer does
not “see” this pocket and will never try to install or retrieve a tool from pockets with a “0” designation.
A 0 cannot be used to designate the tool inserted into the spindle. The spindle must always have a tool number
designation.
To designate a pocket as an “always empty” pocket: Use the arrow keys to move to and highlight the pocket to be
empty, press the 0 button on the numeric keypad and then press
Moving Tools in the Carousel
Should you need to move tools around in the carousel, follow the steps below.
CAUTION: Plan out your reorganization of the tools in the carousel ahead of time. To reduce the potential for tool
changer crashes, keep your tool movement to a minimum. If you have any large or heavy tools currently in the tool
changer, ensure that you only move them between tool pockets designated as such.
Creating Room for a Large Size Tool
The tool changer pictured has an assortment of normal size tools. For the purposes of this example, tool 12 will be
moved to pocket 18 to create room for a large size tool to be placed in pocket 12.
1. Select MDI mode. Press the OFSET button. Press Page Up/Down (if necessary) until you reach the Tool Pocket
Table display. Verify which tool number is in pocket 12.
2. Enter Tnn into the control (where Tnn is the tool number from step 1). Press ATC FWD. This will place the tool
from pocket 12 into the spindle.
3. Enter P18 into the control, then press ATC FWD. This will place the tool currently in the spindle into pocket 18.

Tool 12 to Pocket 18
Large Tool In Pocket 12

4. Scroll to pocket 12 in the Tool Pocket Table and press L, Write/Enter to designate that pocket as Large.
5. Enter the tool number into SPNDL (spindle) on the Tool Pocket Table. Insert the tool into the spindle.

NOTE: You cannot have two different tool pockets holding the same tool number.
Trying to enter a tool number already displayed in the Tool Pocket table will
result in an “Invalid Number” error.
6. Enter P12 into the control and press ATC FWD. The tool will be placed into pocket 12.
Umbrella Tool Changer
Tool Loading Tools are loaded into the umbrella tool changer by first loading the tool into the spindle. To load a
tool into the spindle, prepare the tool
1. Ensure the tools you will be loading are of the correct pull stud type for your mill.
2. Enter Handle Jog mode.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 42

3. Organize your tools to match to your CNC program.
4. Take tool 1 in your hand and insert the tool (pull stud first) into the spindle. Turn the tool so that the two cutouts
in the tool holder line up with the tabs of the spindle. Push the tool upward while pressing the Tool Release button.
When the tool is fitted into the spindle, release the Tool Release button.
5. Press the “Next Tool” button.
6. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until all the tools are loaded.
Umbrella Tool Change Recovery
If the tool changer jams, the control will automatically come to an alarm state. To correct this, push the Emergency
Stop button and remove the cause of the jam. Push the RESET button to clear the alarms. Push the Tool Changer
Restore button to reset the tool changer.
CAUTION! Never put your hands near the tool changer when powered unless the EMERGENCY STOP button is
pressed first.
Tool Changer Recovery
If a problem occurred during a tool change, a tool changer recovery needs to be performed. Enter the tool changer
recovery mode by pressing Tool Changer Restore. Once in tool changer recovery mode, the operator is given
instructions and questions to perform a proper tool changer recovery. The entire tool changer recovery process
must be completed before exiting. If an exit was done prematurely the tool changer recovery must be started from
the beginning.
Side Mount Tool Changer Recovery
If a problem occurred during a tool change, a tool changer recovery needs to be performed. Enter the tool changer
recovery mode by pressing Tool Changer Restore. Once in tool changer recovery mode, the operator is given
instructions and questions to perform a proper tool changer recovery. The entire tool changer recovery process
must be completed before exiting. If an exit was done prematurely the tool changer recovery must be started from
the beginning.
EC-300 / EC-400 / MDC Tool Changer Door and Switch Panel
The Manual/Auto switch must be set to "Auto" for automatic tool changer operation. If the switch is set to
"Manual", the other two buttons, labeled CW and CCW, are enabled and automatic tool changes are disabled. The
CW and CCW buttons rotate the tool changer in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions. The door has a
switch which detects when the door is open.
Operation
If the cage door is opened while a tool change is in progress, the tool change will stop and not resume until the
cage door is closed. However, any machining operations that are in progress will continue.
If the switch is turned to "Manual" while a tool change is in progress, current tool changer motion will be com-
pleted. The next tool change will not execute until the switch is turned back to "Auto". Any machining operations
that are in progress will continue.
The carousel will rotate one position whenever the CW or CCW button is pressed once, while the switch is set to
"Manual"

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 43

During tool changer recovery, if the cage door is open or the switch is in the “Manual” position and Tool Changer
Restore is pressed, a message is displayed telling the operator the door is open or is in manual mode. The opera-
tor must close the door and set the switch to the automatic position in order to continue.

Side Mount Tool Changer Recovery Flow Chart

TOOL CHANGE RESTORE SIDEMOUNT MILL TOOL RECOVERY
SIDEMOUNT SCREEN TEXT = UPPER CASE
pressing “TCR” button
ACTIONS - DECISIONS = LOWER CASE
S = SITUATION
ALARMS EXIST, THEY MUST BE CLEARED. M = NEXT MODE
if alarms
exist? Y PRESS ‘Y’ TO CONTINUE, THEN ‘RESET’
TO CLEAR ALARMS THEN RETRY
N

IS THERE A TOOL
IN THE ARM arm at
OR THE SPINDLE origin?
Y
(Y/N)?
N
N
Y
AT ORIGIN,
CONTINUE TO PKT
WILL THE ARM RESTORE (Y)?
PREVENT ANY TOOL IN The “atc fwd/rev” can
THE SPINDLE OR THE still move arm at this
N POCKET FROM BEING time.
REMOVED (Y/N)? cnc waits for ‘Y’ before
continuing
PRESS LEFT OR
Y RIGHT ARROW KEY
TO MOVE CAROUSEL
THE TOOL MAY FALL DURING THE TOOL RECOVERY Y OR PRESS ‘WRITE’ carousel between Y
carousel between
PROCESS. PLACE SOMETHING SOFT UNDER TOOL pockets? TO CONTINUE pockets?
TO CATCH IT. DO NOT USE YOUR HANDS TO CATCH THE TOOL. WITH AUTOMATIC
PRESS ‘Y’ TO CONTINUE THE PROCESS N RECOVERY
move to next
cnc waits for ‘Y’ before continuing cnc waits for ’write’
pocket
before continuing
RESTORING POCKETS, N
PLEASE WAIT
USE THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS UNTIL YOU CAN REMOVE
ALL THE TOOLS FROM THE SPINDLE AND THE ARM
CAROUSEL CAN BE MOVED WITH RIGHT AND LEFT ARROWS CHECK CURRENT TOOL CHANGE offset page with
CAROUSEL POCKET, RECOVERY pockets displayed
ATC FWD. OR REV. - ROTATE ARM FWD. OR REV. ENTER CURRENT COMPLETE! PRESS
TOOL RELEASE - TOGGLE TOOL UN/CLAMP POCKET NUMBER, ‘Y’ TO CONTINUE
UP OR DOWN ARROW - MOVES PKT UP OR DOWN THEN PRESS THE PLEASE UPDATE
ORIENT SPINDLE - SPINDLE ORIENTATION ‘ENTER’ KEY. POCKET & TOOL
PAGE
NOTE IF YOU WANT TO MOVE THE SPINDLE UP OR DOWN,
THE ARM MUST BE AT ORIGIN, AND YOU MUST EXIT
TL CHANGER RECOVERY
END
ARE YOU FINISHED USING COMMANDS (Y)?
cnc waits for ‘Y’ before continuing

orient spindle
pressed Y
ABOUT TO ORIENT THE
N SPINDLE CAUTION! THIS MAY
DAMAGE THE TOOL ARM IF
REMOVE ALL TOOLS FROM ARM AND SPINDLE
SPINDLE INTERFERES WITH ITS
MOTION PRESS ‘O’ TO ORIENT,
USE TOOL RELEASE BUTTON WHILE HOLDING TOOL TO
‘N’ TO CANCEL
REMOVE ANY TOOL FROM SPINDLE

DEPRESS TOOL-CLAMP-RELEASE STUD ON ARM WHILE N

HOLDING TOOL AND SLIDE TOOL OUT. NOTE THERE IS ‘N’ or ‘O’
A TOOL-CLAMP-RELEASE STUD FOR EACH END OF ARM
O
ARE ALL THE TOOLS REMOVED (Y)?
cnc waits for ‘Y’ before continuing orient spindle

arm at
origin? USE ATC FWD/REV TO ROTATE ARM TO ORIGIN

Jog Mode
Jog Mode allows you to jog each of the axes to a desired location. Before jogging the axes it is necessary to home
(beginning axes reference point) the axes (See the Machine Power-up Section).

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 44

To enter jog mode press the handle jog button, then press one of the desired axes (e.g. X, Y, Z, A or B etc.) and
either use the handle jog buttons or the jog handle to move the axes. There are different increment speeds that can
be used while in jog mode they are; .0001, .001, .01 and .1.
An optional Remote Jog Handle (RJH) can also be used to jog the axes. The RJH consists of a the jog handle,
Cycle Start button, Feed Hold button, Axes selection dial and an increment dial.
To jog the axes with the optional Remote Jog Handle (RJH) select the desired axes (X, Y, Z, A, B, C or V) using the
dial, choose the increment value (X1, X10 or X100) and use the jog handle to move the axes.
Setting Offsets
In order for the mill to accurately machine a work piece, the mill needs to know where the part is located on the
table. Jog the mill with a pointer tool in the spindle, until it reaches the top left corner of the part (see the following
illustration) this position is part zero. The values will be entered into G54 on the Work Offset page.
Offsets can also be entered manually by choosing one of the offsets pages, moving the cursor to the desired
column, typing a number and pressing Write or F1. Pressing F1 will enter the number in the selected column.
Entering a value and pressing Write will add the amount entered to the number in the selected column.

Typical Work Offset Set-up

1. Place the material in the vise and tighten
2. Load a pointer tool in the spindle
3. Press Handle Jog (A)
4. Press .1/100. (B) (The mill will move at a fast speed when the handle is turned)
5. Press +Z (C)
6. Handle jog (D) the Z-axis approximately. 1" above the part
7. Press .001/1. (E) (The mill will move at a slow speed when the handle is turned)
8. Handle jog (D) the Z-axis approximately. 0.2" above the part
9. Select between the X and Y axes (F) and handle jog (D) the tool to the upper left corner of the part (See the
following illustration)
10. Press Ofset (G)
11. Press Page Up (H) repeatedly until you see the Work Zero Offset Page
12. Cursor (I) to G54 Column X
13. Press Part Zero Set (J) to load the value into the X-axis column. the second press of Part Zero Set (J) will load
the value into the Y-axis column.
CAUTION! Do Not Press Part Zero Set a third time; doing so will load a value into the Z-axis. This will cause a
crash or Z-axis alarm when the program is run.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 45

 C J G H A B

D F I E Spindle at top left of the front

Setting the Tool Offset

The next step is to touch off the tools. Doing this defines the distance from the tip of the tool to the top of the part.
Another name for this is Tool Length Offset, which is designated as H in a line of machine code; the distance for
each tool is entered into the Tool Offset Table.
1. Load the tool in the spindle (See 5 Cutting Tools in this guide)
2. Press Handle Jog (A)
3. Press .1/100. (B) (The mill will move at a fast rate when the handle is turned)
4. Select between the X and Y axes (C) and handle jog (D) the tool near the center of the part
5. Press +Z (E)
6. Handle jog (D) the Z axis approximately 1" above the part
7. Press .0001/.1 (F) (The mill will move at a slow rate when the handle is turned)
8. Place a sheet of paper between the tool and the work piece. Carefully move the tool down to the top of the
part, as close as possible, and still be able to move the paper
9. Press Ofset (G)
10. Press Page Up (H) until the page with “Coolant - Length - Radius at the top and scroll to tool #1.
11. Cursor (I) to Geometry for position #1
12. Press Tool Ofset Mesur (J)
This will take the Z position located in the bottom left of the screen and put it the tool number position
CAUTION! The next step will cause the spindle to move rapidly in the Z axis
13. Press Next Tool (K)

J K E G H A B
Tool Length
is measured
Tip of Tool
from
the tip of the
tool
to the top of
the
part with the Top of Part
Z axis at its
home
position.
D C I F

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 46

Additional Tooling Set-up
There are other tool set-up pages within the Current Commands. Press Curnt Comds and then use the Page Up/
Down buttons to scroll to these pages.
The first is the page with “Spindle Load” and “Vibration” at the top of the page. The programmer can add a tool load
limit for spindle load and vibration. The control will reference these values and can be set to do a specific action
should the limitations be reached (See setting 84).
The second page is the Tool Life page. On this page there is a column called “Alarm”. The programmer can put a
value in this column which will cause the machine to stop once the tool has been used that amount of times.
Setting Part (Work piece) Zero
Part Zero is a user defined reference point that the CNC control will use to program all moves from.
1. Select tool #1 by pressing MDI, enter “T1” and press ATCFWD.
2. Jog X and Y until the part is approximately under the spindle.
3. Jog the Z-axis down, first by using the .1 jog increment
4. Press .0001/.1
5. Place a sheet of paper between the tool and the work piece. Carefully move the tool down to the top of the part,
as close as possible, and still be able to move the paper. Do not jog any further or damage to the tool will result.
6. Set the G54 work offsets by highlighting G54 X-axis on the Work Offsets screen and press Part Zero Set.
7. The control will automatically switch to the Y-axis. Press Part Zero Set again the Y position will be copied to the
G54 Y offset.
8. Repeat steps 1-7 for all the tools used in the program.
Advanced Tool Management
Introduction
Advanced Tool Management (ATM) allows the programmer to setup and access duplicate tools for the same
or a series of jobs. The ATM page is located in the Current Commands mode (Press Current Commands button and
page up once). A sample of the ATM screen follows; the screen has “(TOOL GROUP) in the title.
Duplicate or backup tools are classified into specific groups. The programmer specifies a group of tools instead of a
single tool in the G-code program. ATM will track the usage of individual tools in each tool group and compare it to
user defined limits. Once a limit (e.g. number of times used, or tool load) has been reached the mill will automati-
cally choose one of the other tools in the group the next time that tool is needed.
To activate ATM, make sure that Setting 7 (Parameter lock) is off and press E-stop. Under Parameter 315, bit 28,
change the value from “0” to “1” and press F4 to switch between windows. Use the cursor keys (left, right, up,
down) to move to different items inside the active window. Pressing the Enter key will select, modify or clear values
in each item depending on the selection.
The bottom right corner displays simple help information for selected items.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 47

 Active Window Label

COMMAND (MEM) O00000 N00000000 (TOOL GROUP)

Tool Group Window
PRESS F4 TO CHANGE ACTIVE WINDOW

GROUP ID: 1000 USAGE: 0

<PREVIOUS> <NEXT> <ADD> <DELETE> HOLES: 0
<RENAME> <SEARCH> FEED TIME: 0 Allowed Limits Window
GROUP USAGE: IN ORDER TOTALTIME: 0
DESCRIPTION: TOOL LOAD: 0 TL ACTION: ALARM

TL IN SPINDLE 1
CRNT PKT H-CODE D-CODE FLUTES
TOOLS EXP LIFE
0
0
0
Tool Data Window
0 HOLES FEED TIME TOTAL TIME USAGE LOAD
0
0
0

Press WRITE/ENTER to display

the previous tool groups data
Help Text

Operation
Tool Group
In the Tool Group Window the operator defines the tool groups used in the programs.
PREVIOUS – Highlighting <PREVIOUS> and pressing Enter changes the display to the previous group.
NEXT – Highlighting <NEXT> and pressing Enter changes the display to next group.
ADD – Highlight <ADD>, enter a number between 1000 and 2999, and press Enter to add a tool group.
DELETE – Use <PREVIOUS> or <NEXT> to scroll to the group to delete. Highlight <DELETE> and press Enter.
You will be asked to confirm the deletion; answering ‘Y’ will complete the deletion; answering ‘N’ will cancel the
deletion.
RENAME - Highlight <RENAME>, enter a number 1000 and 2999 and press enter to renumber the group ID.
SEARCH - To search for a group, highlight <SEARCH>, enter a group number and press enter.
GROUP ID – Displays the group ID number.
GROUP USAGE – Enter the order in which the tools in the group are called. Use the left and right cursor keys to
select how the tools are used.
DESCRIPTION – Enter a descriptive name of the tool group.
Allowed Limits
The Allowed Limits window contains the user defined limits to determine when a tool is worn out. These variables
affect every tool in the group. Leaving any variable set to zero causes them to be ignored.
FEED TIME – Enter the total amount of time, in minutes, a tool is used in a feed.
TOTAL TIME – Enter the total time, in minutes, a tool is used.
TOOL USAGE – Enter the total times a tool is used (number of tool changes).
HOLES – Enter the total number of holes a tool is allowed to drill.
TOOL LOAD – Enter the maximum tool load (in percent ) for the tools in the group.
TL ACTION* – Enter the automatic action to be taken when the maximum tool load percentage is reached. Use the
left and right cursor keys to select the automatic action.
Tool Data
TL IN SPINDLE – Tool in the spindle.
TOOL – Used to add or remove a tool from a group. To add a tool press F4 until the Tool Data window is outlined.
Use the cursor keys to highlight any of the areas under the “Tool” heading and enter a tool number. Entering zero
will clear the tool or highlighting the tool number and pressing ORIGIN will reset the H-Code, D-Code and Flutes
data to the default values.
EXP (Expire) – Used to manually obsolete a tool in the group. To obsolete a tool, enter a ‘*’ or to clear a ‘*’, press
enter.
LIFE – The percentage of life left in a tool. This is calculated by the CNC control, using actual tool data and the
limits the operator entered for the group.
CRNT PKT – The tool changer pocket the highlighted tool is in.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 48

H-CODE* – The H-code (optional P-cool position) that will be used for the tool. H-code cannot be edited unless
Setting 15 H & T Code Agreement is set to Off. The operator can change the H-code by entering a number and
pressing Enter. The number entered will correspond to the tool number in the tool offsets display.
D-CODE* – The D-code that will be used for that tool. D-code can be changed by entering a number and pressing
Enter.

*Note: By default the H and D-codes in Advanced Tool Management are set to
equal the tool number that is added to the group.
FLUTES – The number of flutes on the tool. This can be edited by selecting it, entering a new number, and press-
ing Enter. This is the same as the "Flutes" column listed on the tool offsets page.
Highlighting any of the following sections (Holes through Load) and pressing ORIGIN will clear their values. To
change the values, highlight the value in the specific category, enter a new number and press enter.
LOAD – The maximum load, in percent, exerted on the tool.
HOLES – The number of holes the tool has drilled/ tapped/ bored using Group 9 canned cycles .
FEED TIME – The amount of time, in minutes , the tool has been in a feed.
TOTAL TIME – The total amount of time, in minutes, the tool has been used.
USAGE – The number of times the tool has been used.

Tool Group Setup

To add a tool group press F4 until the Tool Group window is outlined. Use the cursor keys until <ADD> is high-
lighted. Enter a number between 1000 and 2999 (this will be your group ID number). To change a group ID number,
highlight the <RENAME> feature, enter a new number and press enter.

Tool Group Usage

A tool group must be setup prior to using a program. To use a tool group in a program first set up a tool group.
Next, substitute the tool group ID number for the tool number and for the H-codes and D-codes in the program. See
the following program for an example of the new programming format.
Example:
T1000 M06 (tool group 1000)
G00 G90 G55 X0.565 Y-1.875 S2500 M03
G43 H1000 Z0.1 (H-code 1000 same as group ID number)
G83 Z-0.62 F15. R0.1 Q0.175
X1.115 Y-2.75
X3.365 Y-2.875
G00 G80 Z1.0
T1000 M06 (this will check if the tool in that group is still good to use)
G00 G90 G56 X0.565 Y-1.875 S2500 M03
G43 H00 Z0.1 (H00 cancels H Code)
G83 Z-0.62 F15. R0.1 Q0.175
X1.115 Y-2.75
X3.365 Y-2.875
G00 G80 Z1.0
M30

Macros
Tool Management can use macros to obsolete a tool within a tool group. Macros 8001 to 8200 represents tool 1
through 200. By setting one of these macros to 1, the operator can expire a tool.
Example:
#8001 = 1 (this will expire tool 1 and it will no longer be used )
#8001 = 0 (if tool 1 was expired manually or with a macro, then setting macro 8001 to 0 will
make tool 1 available again for use)

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 49

See the Operator manual for further information on macros.
Save and Restore Advanced Tool Management tables
The control can save and restore the variables associated with the Advanced Tool Management (ATM) feature to
floppy disk and RS-232. These variables hold the data that is entered on the ATM screen. The information can be
saved, either as part of an overall backup by using the LIST PROG/POSIT page, or save only the ATM information
by bringing up the ATM display screen and pressing F2. When the Advanced Tool Management data is saved as
part of an overall backup, the system creates a separate file with a .ATM extension. The ATM data can be saved
and restored via the RS232 port by pressing the SENDRS232 and RECV232 buttons while the Advanced Tool
Management screen is displayed.
Optional Programmable Coolant Spigot
The optional programmable coolant (P-cool) spigot allows the user to direct the coolant stream at the work piece in
order to flush chips from the cutting area. The direction of the coolant can be changed by the CNC program.
An additional column on the tool offset page titled CLNT POS will be displayed. The spigot will be moved to the
position entered into the specific field when the associated H code and M08 is called.
Programmable Coolant (P-Cool) Set-up
1. Press the OFSET button to enter the offsets page, press the CLNT UP or CLNT DOWN button to move the P-
cool nozzle into the desired position. Press the COOLNT button to turn on the coolant in order to check the P-cool
position. Note: The P-cool position is displayed at the bottom left corner of the screen.
2. Enter the coolant position number for the tool in the Coolant Position column.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each tool.
4. Enter the coolant position as an H code (for example H2 will command the coolant to the position entered in the
Tool 2 Coolant Position column) in the program.
If setting 15 (H & T Agreement) is on the H code and T code commanded in the program must be the same (e.g. T1
H1 must be commanded). If setting 15 is turned off the H code and T code commanded does not need to be the
same (e.g. T1 H2 can be commanded).

PROGRAMABLE COOLANT
DO NOT ADJUST NOZZLE
BY HAND

Home

H01

H20

Warning
Do not rotate the coolant spigot by hand. Serious motor damage will
occur.

Graphics Mode
A safe way to trouble shoot a program is by running it in Graphics mode. No movement will occur on the machine,
instead the movement will be illustrated on the screen.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 50

Graphics mode can be run from Memory, MDI or DNC modes. To run a program press the SETNG/GRAPH button
until the Graphics page is displayed. To run DNC in graphics, you must select DNC first, then go to graphics
display and send your program to the machines control (See the DNC section). There are three helpful display
features in Graphics mode that can be accessed by pressing one of the function keys (F1, F2, F3 and F4). F1 is
the help button, which will give a short description of each of the functions possible in Graphics mode. F2 is the
zoom button, which will zoom in on an area of the graphics screen by using the arrow buttons and pressing the
Write button. F3 is the positions button, which will allow you to view the different Positions pages while in graphics
mode. F4 is the program button, which will display the current program.
NOTE: Not all machine functions or motions are simulated in graphics.
Dry Run Operation
The Dry Run function is used to check a program quickly without actually cutting parts. Dry Run is selected by
pressing the Dry Run button while in MEM or MDI mode. When in Dry Run, all rapids and feeds are run at the
speed selected with the jog speed buttons.
Dry Run can only be turned on or off when a program has completely finished or the Reset button is pressed. Dry
Run will still make all of the requested tool changes. The override keys can be used to adjust the Spindle speeds in
Dry Run. Note: Graphics mode is just as useful and may be safer as it does not move the axes of the machine
before the program is checked (see the previous section on the Graphics function).
Running Programs
To run a program one must be loaded on the machine. Once a program is entered and the offsets are set, run the
program by pressing the Cycle Start button. It is suggested that the program is run in Graphics mode before doing
any cutting.
Background Edit
Background Edit will allows editing of one program while another program is running.
Background Edit is activated in Mem mode by pressing the Prgrm/Convrs button, typing the name (Onnnnn) of a
program to edit and pressing F4. If the program name is not entered the Program Review is displayed, which will
allow the program currently running to be edited. Selecting any other display or pressing F4 will exit from Back-
ground Edit. While a program is running, press the List Prog button to display a list of programs in the mill.
All of the changes made during Background Edit will not affect the running program, or its subprograms. The
changes will go into affect the next time the program is run.
The Cycle Start button may not be used while in Background Edit. If the program contains a programmed stop
(M00) exit Background Edit (press F4) and then press Cycle Start to resume the program.

P ALLET C HANGER (EC-S ERIES AND M ILL D RILL C ENTER )

Introduction
The pallet changer is commanded through a program in CNC memory. The M50 (execute pallet change) function
consists of unlocking, lifting and rotating the pallets, then lowering and locking the pallets again. The pallet changer
rotates the pallets 180o, then back; it does not continuously rotate in the same direction.
The pallet changer is provided with an audible signaling device to alert nearby personnel when a pallet change is
taking place. However, do not depend on the signal to avoid mishaps.
Pallet Changer Warnings and Cautions
• Large workpieces may collide into frame during a pallet change.
• Verify tool length clearance during pallet changes. Long tools may collide with workpiece.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 51

 Items Beyond the Maximum
Radius and Height Limits
Will Damage the Machine
When the Pallet Rotates

Plane3

EC-300 Shown

Maximum Pallet Loads

EC-300 550lb (249kg) per station, balanced within 20%
MDC 700lb (318kg) per station, balanced within 20%
EC-400 1 and 45 degree indexer – 1000 lb per pallet
Full 4th Axis – 660 lb per pallet
Pallet Changer Operation
The Pallet Changer is commanded using M Codes.
M50 determines if a pallet has been scheduled. The pallets will change if a pallet is scheduled or the program will
pause and prompt the operator the pallet is not scheduled.
G188 uses the pallet schedule table to load and run the program scheduled for the current pallet. Once the part
program completes, the M99 command loops back to the M50 (pallet change) in order to load the next pallet.
M36 is not used in this method, as M50 monitors the pallet scheduling. M36 is provided for backward compatibility,
and to program pallet changes without using PST.
Messages aid the operator with loading/unloading and pallet changes. For example, at the beginning of the M50
pallet change, if the load station is not ready, a message is displayed on the screen. The message will not stop
flashing and the pallet change will not continue until the load station is ready and the Part Ready button is pressed.
At the beginning of a pallet change, if the load station is ready, no messages appears, and no button press is
required, and the pallet change starts directly.
M46 – Qn Pmm
Jump to line mm in the current program if pallet n is loaded, otherwise go to the next block.
M48 – Validate that current program is appropriate for loaded pallet
Checks in the Pallet Schedule Table that the current program is assigned to the loaded pallet . If the current
program is not in the list or the loaded pallet is incorrect for the program, an alarm is generated. M48 can be in a
program listed in the PST, but never in a subroutine of the PST program. An alarm will occur if M48 is incorrectly
nested.
M49Pnn Qmm – Sets the status of pallet nn to a value of mm.
Without a P-code, this command sets the status of the currently loaded pallet. The status of each pallet are
defined in the pull-down menu of the (PST).

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 52

Operator Load Station (EC-300, EC-400, MDC)
To ease loading/unloading parts and to speed production pallet changing mills have an additional load area. The
load station is guarded by a door, and a sub-panel includes a few buttons to control the pallet changer. As a safety
precaution the load station door must be closed before a pallet change can occur.

Note: The EC-400 must have the pallet in the load station at home to do a pallet
change.
Sub-Panel Controls
Emergency Stop: The button behaves just like the one on the operator's pendant.
Rotary Index (EC-300 only): Rotates the load station pallet (see Setting 164).
Part Ready: Used to indicate the pallet is ready. It also contains a light that 1) blinks when the control is waiting for
the operator or 2) is on when the operator is ready for a pallet change.

Pallet Changer G-Code

G188 Get Program From PST
Calls the parts program for the loaded pallet based on the PST entry for the pallet

Pallet Changer Programming

The Pallet Changer can be programmed to run the same parts program on both pallets, or a different program on
each pallet. See “Sample Programs” for some of the options available for pallet change programming.

Method 1
The following method is the preferable to accomplish a pallet change.
To perform automatic pallet sequencing and part program selection, each pallet must be “scheduled” and must have
a part program assigned to it. Scheduling is done in two ways, the first is a pallet can be scheduled with the Part
Ready button on the operator’s panel. Pushing the button schedules the pallet that is outside of the machining
area.
The second is the pallets can be scheduled from the Pallet Schedule Table (PST). This display can be found by
pressing the CURNT COMDS key and then pressing the Page Up or Page Down keys until the Pallet Schedule
Table page is reached. Use the arrow keys to highlight the “Load Order” box for the pallet. Enter a pallet number
and then the Write/Enter key. If there is already a priority number for that pallet, the “Load Order” numbers of the
other pallets will be updated as necessary. A pallet that is on the receiver (in the work area) will have an asterisk in
the “Load Order” column; this pallet cannot be scheduled.
Assigning a part program is also done in the PST display. The arrow keys are used to highlight the “Program
Number” box for the pallet. The program number is entered by keying the number and then pressing the Write/Enter
key. For example, keying "O123", then Write/Enter will put the program number O00123 into the table.
If a parts program encounters an M50 (without a P code) and the Part Ready button has not been pressed, the
control will pause operation, the beacon will blink green, and the message “None Scheduled” is displayed. The mill
will wait until the Part Ready button has been pressed, or the PST has been updated, before performing the pallet
change. This feature prevents a pallet change from occurring before the operator is ready. The Part Ready button
can be pressed at any time and will be recognized when the next pallet change is required.

Method 2
Although the previous method is recommended, the pallet changer can also be operated without automatic se-
quencing or PST inputs. This is done using M50 with a P code. For proper operation M50 must be preceded by
M36. M36 P1 before the M50 P1 will check that pallet #1 is ready.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 53

Pallets can be changed without automatic sequencing or PST inputs. This is done using M50 with a P code. M50
P1 will load pallet #1 without checking to see if it is scheduled. If the PART READY button has been pressed, then
pallet #1 will be loaded. If the PART READY button for pallet #1 has not been pressed, the indicator light on the
button will flash and the message, “Schedule Pal#1” is displayed.
Pallet Schedule Table
The pallet schedule table incorporates a number of features to help the user with their routine.
Load Order and Pallet Status These two features work together to show which pallet is currently in the machining
area.
Pallet Usage This feature gives the number of times the specific pallet has been loaded into the machining area.
The counter will turn over to 0 after 32767 pallet changes.
Program Number This detail shows which program number has been assigned to the pallet.
Program Comment This area displays the comments that are written in the part program.
There are 30 different pallet status values to use. The first four: Unscheduled, Scheduled, Loaded, and Completed,
are fixed and cannot be changed. The remaining 26 can be modified and used as needed.
Changing or adding status text can be done in the PST. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the “Pallet
Status” column, and press the F1 key. A selection menu will appear over the “Pallet Status” column (Pressing F1
again or Reset will close the menu.) The number to the left of the text is the status number. This number is used
with the M49 command to set the status from the part program. The items in the menu can be selected with the Up
and Down arrow keys, or the jog handle. Enter the text, then press F3. Note: All pallets use the same list of status
items. Pressing F1 closes the menu without changing the status of any of the pallets.
Resetting a status item to "User" is done by selecting an item from the menu and pressing F4. All status items can
be reset at the same time with the Origin key.
Changing the status of an individual pallet can be done from the PST or with the M49 command. In the PST, move
the table cursor to the “Pallet Status” column for the pallet desired. Press F1 for the status item menu. Use the
arrow keys to select the status, then press F2 or Write/Enter.. See the previous description of M49 and in the
following examples for setting the pallet status from a program.

Caution: The following commands can cause either rotary products to move:
Zero Return
Handle Jog

Load Machining
Area Area

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 54

M48 must be placed at the beginning of the program (or section of program) that is run for the current pallet. This
will check each time that a program is run, that the program matches the pallet. For example:
Oxxxx (Users program)
M48
;
; (Users part program for pallet 1)
;
M30
Oxxxx (Users program)
M48
;
; (Users part program for pallet 2)
;
M30
An alarm will be generated, “A (or B) not in Position”, if the pallet in the machine is not the one associated with the
part program. If this alarm is generated, verify the correct program is running for the loaded pallet.
Important: Verify that the rotary table on pallet one is plugged into “Connector 1”, and that the rotary table on
pallet two is plugged into “Connector 2”.
Sample Programs
Example #1
A basic pallet change program that loads the next scheduled pallet and runs the parts program. The following is a
sample of the PST, which indicates that pallet #1 is loaded and pallet #2 is scheduled. Pallet #2 will be loaded next
(see column 2, “Load Order”) and program O06012 will be used to cut parts on that pallet (see column 5, “Program
Number”). The program comment is captured from the program.
Pallet Schedule Sample Table 1
Pallet Load Pallet Pallet Program Program
Number Order Status Usage Number Comment
1 * Loaded 23 O04990 (Rough and Finish)
2 1 Scheduled 8 O06012 (Cut Slot)
O00001 (Program Number)
M50 (Perform pallet change to next scheduled pallet, after Part Ready button is pressed)
G188: (Calls the parts program for the loaded pallet based on the PST entry for the pallet.)
M99 (Loop to top of main program)
O04990
Part Program (User’s part program)
M99 (Return from subroutine)
O06012
Part program (User’s part program)
M49Q12 Set current pallet status to 12 actual string defined by operator. In this case, status
number 12 is defined as “Last Pallet”.
M99 (Return from subroutine.)
Description: The first loop through program O00001 will load pallet #2 (M50) and run program O06012 (G188
selects program from PST for pallet #2). The PST will then resemble Sample Table 2. The asterisk for pallet #2 in
the “Load Order” column indicates that this pallet is in the mill.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 55

Pallet Schedule Sample Table 2
Pallet Load Pallet Pallet Program Program
Number Order Status Usage Number Comment
1 0 COMPLETED 23 O04990 (Rough and Finish Tog)
2 * LOADED 9 O06012 (Cut Slot)
Description: In the next loop through program O00001, the M50 will detect that no pallets are scheduled. The
beacon light will flash green and program O00001 will pause until the operator schedules a pallet or presses Reset.
A pallet can be scheduled by pressing the Part Ready button.
Example #2
Basic pallet change program that tracks which part is to be machined on each pallet. Each pallet has a different
machining operation. Note that the P code for M46 is a line number in the current program, not a subroutine
number.
Oxxxxx Program number
M50 (Perform pallet change after the Part Ready button is pressed or PST is updated)
M46 Q1 Pxx1 This line will check to see if pallet #1 is on the machine. If it is then it will jump to line xx1.
If the pallet is not on the machine, then it will continue to the next line. (See description of
M46.)
M46 Q2 Pxx2 (If pallet #2 is loaded, program will jump to line xx2, otherwise it will go to the next line.)
M99 Pxxxx (Jump to line Nxxxx: see the "Mcode" section for a more detailed description of M99)
Nxx1 (Line number.)
Part program (User’s part program for Pallet #1.)
for Pallet #1
M99 Pxxxx (Jump to line Nxxxx: see the "Mcode" section for a more detailed description of M99)
Nxx2 (Line number)
Part program (User’s part program for Pallet #2)
for Pallet #2
M99 Pxxxx (Jump to line Nxxxx)

Nxxxx (Line number)

M99 (Repeat program: see the "Mcode" section for a more detailed description of M99)
Example #3
This is an alternate method to Example #2 that uses subroutine calls, but does not jump if the pallet is unsched-
uled.

Note: For proper operation M50 with a P code must be preceded by M36.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 56

M36 P1 (Flash “No Pallet Scheduled” on display, flash green beacon, on Schedule
Pallet button for pallet #1 until button is pushed or pallet is scheduled in PST)
M50 P1 (Load Pallet #1)
M98 Pxxx1 (Control jumps to program Oxxx1 and runs this program. See the "Mcode" section for a
more detailed description of M99)
M36 P2 (Wait for pallet to be scheduled)
M50 P2 (Load Pallet #2)
M98 Pxxx2 (Control jumps to program Oxxx2 and runs this program.)
M99 (Repeat program: see the M-codes section for a more detailed description of M99)

Note: M99 at the end of a program will cause continuous operation. M30 at the end
of a program will cause the control to wait for the operator to press Cycle Start.
EC-300 Pallet and 4th axis Operation
The rotary table in the machining area will always appear, and operate, as the A axis. The rotary axis on pallet 1 is
referred to by “A1” and the other axis, on pallet 2, by “A2”.
Operation examples:
To jog axis A1, enter “A1” and press “HAND JOG”.
To key jog, use the +/-A jog buttons to jog the A1 axis and +/-B buttons to jog the A2 axis.
To zero return the A axis on pallet #2, enter "A2" press ZERO SINGL AXIS.
Mirroring Feature: If G101 is used to mirror the A axis, then mirroring is turned on for both A axes. When pallet #1 is
in the machining area, A1-MIR will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. When pallet #2 is in the machine, A2-
MIR will be displayed. The behavior of the Mirror Settings is different, if Setting 48 Mirror Image A-Axis is ON, only
the A axis on pallet #1 is mirrored and the message A1-MIR is displayed.
If setting 80 (parameter 315, bit 20 MAP 4TH AXIS is a 1, the name for setting 80 is the same as that for Setting
48, i.e. Mirror Image A-Axis) is ON mirroring will be turned on for the A-axis on pallet #2. When pallet #2 is inside of
the mill, A2-MIR will be displayed.

Pallet Changer Recovery (EC-300, EC-400, MDC)

EC-300 or MDC
If the pallet change is interrupted another M50 must be run; use M50P1 or M50P2. If this puts the wrong pallet into
the mill, then an additional M50 must be run.

EC-400
The control has a pallet changer recovery mode to assist the operator if the pallet changer fails to complete a pallet
change. To enter the pallet changer recovery mode press "Tool Changer Restore" and then press the specific
function key (F2) for pallet changer recovery mode. Note that is the pallet is in the proper position, the pallet
changer restore function is not available.
The most convenient way to recover from a failed pallet change attempt is to press "Y" and follow the on-screen
help text. A message will prompt the operator to command an individual step of the pallet change sequence. More
than one step may need to be completed, as each step is done, press "Y" for the next step. The control will exit
the recovery screen once the pallet changer has recovered.

Pallet Replacement (EC-400)

The pallets can only be loaded into the mill through the load station. Note the orientation of the pallet; the pallet
can only be loaded one way. A cut-out is machined into the pallet to insure the proper orientation of the pallet.
1. Orient the pallet 90 degrees from home in either direction.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 57

 Pallet Alignment
Cut-Out

2. Attach a suitable lifting device to the top of the fixture(s) or use eye bolts screwed into the pallet holes.
3. Raise the pallet approximately .25” (6.35mm) to position it above the load station pins, but below the load station
lock plate.

4. Pull the pallet towards you until it has cleared the load station.

Pallet Storage (EC-400)

When removing the pallet, be sure to set it on a soft surface such as a wooden pallet. The bottom side of the pallet
has machined surfaces that must be protected.

T IPS AND T RICKS

General Tips
Cursor Searching for a Program. When in EDIT or MEM mode, you can select and display another program
quickly by entering the program number (Onnnnn) and pressing the Up/Down arrow, or F4.
Searching for a Program Command. Searching for a specific command in a program can be done in either
MEM or EDIT mode. Enter the address letter code (A, B, C, etc.) or address letter code and value (A1.23), and
press the Up/Down arrow. If the address code and no value is entered, the search will stop at the next use of that
address code, regardless of the value
Spindle Command. You can stop or start the spindle with CW or CCW any time you are at a Single Block stop or
a Feed Hold. When you restart the program with CYCLE START, the spindle will be turned back on to

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 58

Saving an MDI Program. You can save a program from MDI to the list of programs. To do so, make sure the
cursor is at the beginning of the MDI program, enter a program number (Onnnnn) and press ALTER.
To Rapid an Axis Home. You can rapid all axes to machine zero by pressing the HOME G28 key. You can also
send just one axis to machine zero in rapid motion. Enter the axis letter (e.g. X), then press HOME G28. CAU-
TION! There is no warning to alert you of any possible collision.
Program /Conversation
Program Review. Program Review allows you to cursor through and review the active program on the right side of
the display screen, while also viewing the same program as it is running on the left side of the screen. To enter
Program Review, press F4 while running a program in MEM mode and PRGRM display.
Background Edit. This feature allows you to edit a program while a program is running. Press MEM and then
PRGRM, enter the program number to edit and press F4. Edits are possible as the program runs, however, edits to
the running program will not take effect until the program ends with an M30 or RESET.
Position
DIST-TO-GO Display. To zero the position display for a distance reference move, use the DIST-TO-GO position
display. When you are in the POSIT display and in Handle Jog mode, press any other operation mode (EDIT, MEM,
MDI, etc.) and then go back to Handle Jog; this will zero all axes on the DIST-TO-GO display.
POS-OPER Display. This display is used for reference only. Each axis can be zeroed independently. To zero a
specific axis, Page up/down in the POSIT display to the large-digit POS-OPER page. Pressing Origin will zero the
selected axis. Or press the X, Y, or Z button and then Origin to zero that axis display. To enter a value for an xis,
enter the axis letter and a value (e.g. X2.125), and press Origin.
Offset
Entering Offset Values. Pressing OFSET again will toggle between the Tool Length Offsets and Work Zero Offsets
pages. Pressing Write/Enter will add the number entered to the selected offset value. Pressing F1 will replace the
selected offset with the entered number. Pressing F2 will enter the negative value into the offsets.
Coolant Spigot Position. The coolant nozzle position is displayed in the lower left corner of the Tool Geometry
Offset page.
Clearing All Offsets and Macro Variables. When you are in the Tool Length Offset display, you can clear all the
offsets by pressing the Origin key. This also works on the Work Zero Offset and Macro Variables page.
Current Commands
Programmed (PGM) and Actual (ACT feedrate and spindle speed are displayed on the first page of the CURNT
COMDS, as PGM Fnnnn, PGM Snnnn, ACT Fnnnn and CMD Snnnn.
Calculator
Transferring Simple Calculations. The number in the simple calculator box (in the upper left corner) can be
transferred to any cursor-selected data line by moving the cursor to the line and pressing F3.
Transferring to EDIT or MDI. Pressing F3 will transfer the number in the calculator box (when the cursor is on the
number in the box) to either the EDIT or MD mode. Enter the letter (X, Y or Z) you wish to use with the number from
the calculator.
Circular Calculator. The Circular Calculator will list four different ways that a circular move can be programmed
using the values entered. One of the solutions can be transferred to either EDIT or MDI modes. To do so, cursor
onto the program line you wish to use. Press either EDIT or MDI. Press the F3 key, which will transfer the circular
move to the data entry line at the bottom of the display. Press Insert to add that circular command line into your
program.
One-Line Expressions. The calculator allows a simple, one-line expression without parentheses, such as
23*45.2+6/2, to be solved. It will be evaluated when the Write/Enter button. Note: Multiplication and division are
performed before addition and subtraction.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 59

Edit
Lower-Case Text. Lower-case text can be used if it is between parentheses (comments); use the Shift key.
Exiting Block Edit. Block Edit highlighting is cancelled by pressing the Undo; the cursor will remain where you are
at in the program. Undo will not change back an edit done in Block Edit. RESET will also turn off the block
highlight, but the cursor will return to the beginning of the program.
Advanced Editor Searching. When “Find Text” is used and the text is found, pressing F1 will automatically
select the Find Again option. Also, when “Select Text” is used, “Copy Selected Text” will be the next menu selec-
tion.
Editing Two Versions of the Same Program. In Edit mode, F4 is the hot key that displays another version of the
active program for editing. The same program will be displayed on both halves of the screen, and each program can
be edited by using the EDIT key to switch from one side to the other. Both programs will be updated as the edits
are done. This is useful for editing a long program; you can view and edit one section of the program on one side of
the screen and another section on the other side.
A Quick Cursor Arrow in the Advanced Editor. A cursor arrow can be called up within the program. To do this,
Enter the Advanced Editor, press F2 and use the jog handle to scroll through the program. To exit from this mode,
and remain at that position in the program, press the UNDO key.
Programming
Quick Reverse Out of a G84 Rigid Tapping Cycle. This rigid tapping feature has the tap exit faster than it
entered. A J code on the G84 line commands this, for example, J2 retracts twice as fast, J3 retracts three times as
fast, etc. up to J9. The J code must be specified in each block.
Duplicating a Program in LIST PROG. In the List Prog mode, a program can be duplicated by selecting the
program number, typing in a new program number (Onnnnn), and pressing F1. The Advanced Editor can also be
used to duplicate a program, using the Program menu and the Duplicate Active Program selection.
Communications
Receiving Program Files from a Floppy Disk. Program files can be loaded from a floppy disc using the I/O
menu and the Floppy Directory selection of the Advanced Editor. Pressing Write/Enter in the Floppy Directory will
display a list of the programs. Use the arrow keys or the jog handle to select the file to load, then press Write/
Enter. The floppy directory will remain displayed to the selection of more files. Use Reset or Undo to exit.
I/O Menu Send RS232 or Send Floppy Commands. Programs can be sent to the RS232 port or a floppy disk
from the Advanced Editor. Select the menu item (Send RS232 or Send Floppy), and a program list is displayed.
Choose the program to save, or select “All” to send all programs under one file name. Use the up and down arrow
keys or the jog handle, and the Insert button to mark the programs to send. If programs are not selected using the
Insert key, the currently highlighted program will be sent.
Sending Multiple Programs Using Program Numbers. The Send Floppy under the I/O menu of the Advanced
Editor allows programs to be saved to floppy disk. It will prompt, “Enter Floppy File Name”; enter a file name and
press Write/Enter. If a file name is not entered, the control will save each program using the five-digit program
number as the file name.
Sending a Program File from LIST PROG Display. Files can be sent to a floppy disk or through the RS-232
port from the LIST PROG display. Use the cursor arrows and the Insert key to select the program(s), or “ALL” to
send all of them under one file name. When F2 is pressed (to send the selected programs), the control will ask for
a file name (8CHRCTRS.3XT). Press F2 a second time to send it. You can also use the I/O menu in the Advanced
Editor to send and receive program files.
Sending Multiple Programs from LIST PROG Using SEND RS232. Several programs can be sent to the serial
port by typing all the program names together on the input line without spaces (e.g., O12345O98765) and pressing
SEND RS232.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 60

Send and Receive Offsets, Settings, Parameters and Macro Variables to/from Disk. Offsets, settings,
parameters and macro variables can be saved to a floppy disk. Press List Prog, and select a display page (e.g.
OFSET, SETNG). Type in a file name and press F2 (or F3 to read that file from a disk).
Send and Receive Offsets, Settings, Parameters and Macro Variables to/from RS232. Offsets, settings,
parameters and macro variables can be saved to the RS-232 port. Press List Prog, and select a display page (e.g.
OFSET, SETNG). Enter a file name and press Send RS232 to send that display page to the RS-232 port. Press
RECV RS232 to read the file via RS-232.
Deleting a Program File from a Floppy Disk. A file can be erased from the floppy drive from the LIST PROG
display. Type “DEL <file name>” and press Write Enter.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Operation 61

 SUBROUTINES

Subroutines (subprograms) are usually a series of commands that are repeated several times in a program. Instead
of repeating the commands many times in the main program, subroutines are written in a separate program. The
main program then has a single command that “calls” the subroutine program. A subroutine is called using M97 or
M98 and a P address. The P code is the same as the program number (Onnnnn) number of the subroutine to be
called.

Canned Cycles are the most common use of subroutines. The X and Y locations of the holes are placed in a
separate program and then called. Instead of writing the X, Y locations once for each tool, the X, Y locations are
written once for any number of tools.

The subroutines can include an L or repeat count. If there is an L, the subroutine call is repeated that number of
times before the main program continues with the next block.

LOCAL SUBROUTINES

A local subroutine is a block of code in the main program that is referenced several times by the main program.
Local subroutines are commanded (called) using an M97 and a Pnnnnn which refers it to the N line number of the
local subroutine.

The local subroutine format is to end the main program with an M30 then enter the local subroutines after the M30.
Each subroutine must have an N line number at the start and a M99 at the end that will send the program back to
the next line in the main program.

Subroutine Example
O00104 (sub program with an M98) Sub Program
T1 M06 O00105
G90 G54 G00 X1.5 Y-0.5 X.5 Y-.75
S1406 M03 Y-2.25
G43 H01 Z1. M08 G98 X1.5 Y-2.5
G81 G99 Z-0.26 R0.1 F7. G99 X3.5
M98 P105 (Call Sub-Program O00105) X4.5 Y-2.25
Y-.75
T2 M06 X3.5 Y-.5
G90 G54 G00 X1.5 Y-0.5 G80 G00 Z1.0 M09
S2082 M03 G53 G49 Z0. M05
G43 H02 Z1. M08 4.50 M99
G83 G99 Z-.75 Q0.2 R0.1 F12.5 3.50
M98 P105 (Call Sub-Program O00105) 1.50
.50 .50
2.25
T3 M06
G90 G54 G00 X1.5 Y-0.5 8
.75 2 1 7
S750
3 4 6
G43 H03 Z1. M08 5
G84 G99 Z-.6 R0.1 F37.5 2.50
M98 P105 (Call Sub-Program O00105)
G53 G49 Y0.
M30 (End Program) .375

.75

62 Subroutines 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 SUBROUTINE C ANNED CYCLE EXAMPLE
Sub Program
O1234 (Canned Cycle Example Program) O1000 (X,Y Locations)
T1 M06 X 1.115 Y-2.750
G90 G54 G00 X.565 Y-1.875 S1275 M03 X 3.365 Y-2.875
G43 H01 Z.1 M08 X 4.188 Y-3.313
G82 Z-.175 P.03 R.1 F10. X 5.0 Y-4.0
M98 P1000 M99
G80 G00 Z1.0 M09
T2 M06
G00 G90 G54 X.565 Y-1.875 S2500 M03
G43 H02 Z.1 M08
G83 Z-.720 Q.175 R.1 F15.
M98 P1000
G00 G80 Z1.0 M09
T3 M06
G00 G90 G54 X.565 Y-1.875 S900 M03
G43 H03 Z.2 M08
G84 Z-.600 R.2 F56.25
M98 P1000
G80 G00 Z1.0 M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30

SUBROUTINES WITH MULTIPLE FIXTURES

Subroutines can also be useful when cutting the same part in different X and Y locations within the machine. For
example, there are six vises mounted on the table. Each of these vises will use a new X, Y zero. They will be
referenced in the program using the G54 through G59 work offsets. Use an edge finder or an indicator to establish
the zero point on each part. Use the part zero set key in the work coordinate offset page to record each X, Y
location. Once the X, Y zero position for each workpiece is in the offset page, the programming can begin.

The figure shows what this setup would look like on the machine table. For an example, each of these six parts will
need to be drilled at the center, X and Y zero.
Main Program Subroutine
O2000 O3000
T1 M06 X0 Y0
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 S1500 M03 G83 Z-1.0 Q.2 R.1 F15.
G43 H01 Z.1 M08 G00 G80 Z.2
M98 P3000 M99
G55
M98 P3000
G56 G54 G55 G56
M98 P3000 X0, Y0 X0, Y0 X0, Y0
G57
M98 P3000
G58
M98 P3000
G57 G58 G59
G59 X0, Y0 X0, Y0 X0, Y0
M98 P3000
G00 Z1.0 M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Subroutines 63

 ADVANCED EDITOR

The HAAS Advanced Editor gives the user the ability to edit programs using pull-down menus.
Pressing the EDIT button enters the Advanced Editor. The user can switch between the Advanced Editor, the
standard editor, and Quick Code with multiple presses of the PRGRM/CONVRS button.
To edit a program, enter the program name (Onnnnn) and press F4, the program will open in the active window.
Pressing the F4 button will open another copy of that program. Use the jog handle or the down/up arrows buttons to
scroll through the program code.
Use the EDIT button to select between the two programs.
The following figure illustrates the layout of the advanced editor.

Mode PROGRAM (EDIT) Onnnnn F1 KEY TURNS MENU ON / OFF

Menu bar PROGRAM EDIT SEARCH MODIFY I/O HELP
Onnnnn

Active Edit
Display Inactive Edit Display

Messages Context Sensitive Help

Input Alarm Messages

The Advanced Editor Screen Layout.

THE PROGRAM MENU

Create New Program

This menu item will create a new program. To do so, enter a program name (Onnnnn) (that is not already in the
program directory) and press Enter to create the program.

Select Program From List

Choose this menu item to edit a program that exists in the directory.

When this menu item is selected, the programs in the control are displayed. Scroll through the list by using the
cursor buttons or the jog handle. Pressing Enter or Select Prog will select the highlighted program to replace the
program list with the selected program.

Duplicate Active Program

This selection will copy the current program. The user will be prompted to enter a program (Onnnnn) number for the
duplicate program.

Delete Program From List

This menu item will delete a program from the program directory.

Switch To Left Or Right Side

This will switch the active window between the two programs, to make the active program inactive and the inactive
program active.

64 Advanced Editor 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 T HE E DIT M ENU

Undo
The last edit operation will be undone, up to the last 9 editing operations.
Select Text
This menu item will select lines of program code to set the start point of the text selection. Then use the arrow
buttons or the jog handle to scroll to the last line of code to select and Press F2 or Write/Enter button. The se-
lected text will be highlighted. To deselect the block, press Undo.
Move Selected Text
This feature works with the “Select Text” feature. Scroll the cursor arrow to desired part of code and press the
Write/Enter button to move the selected text to its new location. The selected text will be moved to the point
following the cursor (>).
Copy Selected Text
To select text, scroll the cursor arrow (>) to a portion of text and press the Write/Enter button. The text copied will
be highlighted. Scroll the cursor arrow to the part of text you want to insert the copied text into. Press F2 or Write/
Enter to insert the copied text to the point following the cursor (>).
Delete Selected Text
To select text, scroll the cursor arrow (>) to a portion of text and press the Write/Enter button. The text copied will
be highlighted. Once highlighted, press the Write/Enter button to delete the text. If no block is selected, the
currently highlighted item is deleted.
Cut Selection To Clipboard
All selected text will be moved from the current program to a new program called the clipboard. Any previous
contents of the clipboard are deleted
Copy Selection To Clipboard
All selected text will be copied from the current program to a new program called the clipboard. Any previous
contents of the clipboard are deleted.
Paste From Clipboard
The contents of the clipboard are copied into the current program at the line following the current cursor position.

THE S EARCH MENU

Find Text
This menu item will search for text or program code in the current program.

Find Again
This menu item will search again for the same program code or text.

Find And Replace Text

This menu item will search the current program for specific text or program and optionally replace each (or all) with
another G-Code item.

THE M ODIFY MENU

Remove All Line Numbers

This menu item will automatically remove all unreferenced N-Codes (line numbers) from the edited program. If a
group of lines is selected only these lines will be affected.

Renumber All Lines

This menu item will either renumber all selected blocks in the program or, if a group of lines is selected the renum-
ber feature will affect those lines only.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Advanced Editor 65

Renumber By Tool
Searches for T (tool) codes, highlights all the program code up to the next T code and renumbers the N code (line
numbers) in the program code.

Reverse + & - Signs

This menu item will reverse the signs of the numeric values. Press the enter key to start the process and then enter
the axes (e.g. X, Y, Z etc.) that is to change. When using this feature be cautious if your program contains a G10
or G92 (See the G Code section for a description).

Reverse X & Y
This feature will change X address codes in the program to Y address codes and Ys to Xs.

T HE I/O M ENU

Send RS-232
This menu will send program(s) to the RS-232 port. When this menu item is selected, the program list is displayed.
To select a program, cursor to the program number and press the Insert button. A highlighted space will appear
before the program to indicate it has been selected. (Press Insert again to deselect the program). The Delete button
can be used to deselect all selected programs.
To send the selected program(s), press the Write/Enter button. If more than one program or “All” is selected, the
data will be sent with a “%” at the beginning of the stream and a “%” at the end.
Receive RS-232
This menu item will receive program(s) from the RS-232 serial port.
On the List Prog display “ALL” must first be highlighted before using this menu item. Note, “ALL” must be
reselected on the List Prog screen after each file transfer.
Send Disk
This menu item will send program(s) to the floppy disk. When this menu item is selected the program list is
displayed.
To select a program, cursor to the program number and press the Insert button (or enter a file name, Onnnnn, and
press the Write/Enter button). A highlighted space will appear before the program to indicate it has been selected
(Press Insert again to deselect the program). The Delete button can be used to deselect all selected programs.
Receive Disk
This menu item will receive programs from the floppy disk. Type in the filename (Text, e.g. JOB5.NC, or Onnnnn) of
the disk file being received, and press the Enter button.

Disk Directory
This menu item will display the directory of the floppy disk. To select a file, press the up and down arrow buttons or
use the jog handle to scroll through the directory list and press Write/Enter to load a file.

T HE F1: H ELP M ENU

How To Use The Editor
The help is displayed whenever a menu is accessed. The help menu gives a brief description of the editor and its
features. The up and down arrows and the jog handle control the menus, and the Page Up, Page Down Home and
End buttons are used to scroll through the help display. In addition, if the F1 button is pressed during the use of
one of the menu options, the help is likewise displayed. Pressing F1 again will exit the help display. Pressing the
Undo button returns to the active program.

66 Advanced Editor 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 ADVANCED EDITOR SHORTCUTS

Pressing these buttons, when in the Advanced Editor display, will quickly get you to these menu items without
having to press the F1 button and cursoring to that selection.
Hot Keys Description
Will quickly bring up the program list on the inactive side of edit display to select
SELECT
PROG program from list.

This key will begin to select text and define the starting line of a block to be edited.
F2 Scroll down to the last line in the block definition, and press the F2 or WRITE key.
The selected block of text will then be highlighted.

This key can be used to switch to the left or right side between two programs that
EDIT have been selected to edit.

Pressing F4 will open another copy of the same program on the other side of the
F4 Advanced Editor display. The user can quickly edit two different locations in the same
program. The edit key will switch you back and forth and update between the two
programs.

If you enter the program number (Onnnn) and then press F4 or the arrow down key,
that program will be brought up on the other side of the Advanced Editor.
INSERT can be used to copy selected text in a program to the line after where you
INSERT place the cursor arrow point.

ALTER can be used move selected text in a program to the line after where you place
ALTER the cursor arrow point.

DELETE can be used to delete selected text in a program.

DELETE

If a block has been selected, pressing undo will simply exit a block
UNDO
definition.

Pressing the Send key will activate that I/O menu selection.
SEND

Pressing Recv key will activate that I/O menu selection.

RECV

ERASE Pressing the Erase Prog key will activate that I/O menu selection. This will bring up
PROG program list on the inactive side of edit display for you to cursor to a program and
delete it.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Advanced Editor 67

 QUICK CODE
Quick Code simplifies writing a program by explaining G code commands in plain English commands. On the right
side of the screen you have English commands that describe the operation to perform. By selecting the operation
from the Group Window feature and with one button push, the code is inserted in your program on the left side of
the screen. The groups can be selected by turning the jog handle in the clockwise direction. To view and cursor
through items within a group, turn the jog handle in the counter clockwise direction. Another feature is the ability to
cursor through a program and Quick Code will describe what the G and M codes mean, shown at the bottom of the
screen.

QUICKCODE (EDIT) O0001

O0001 QUICKCODE
GROUP
GROUP
ITEM
ITEM
GROUP
EDIT WINDOW GROUP WINDOW

HELP WINDOW

PROMPTING COMMENTS COMMAND DESCRIPTION

INPUT LINE WARNING MESSAGES

The Quick Code Display.

Accessing Quick Code

Enter Quick Code by selecting Edit mode and then pressing the Prgrm/Convrs key twice. The first press of the
Prgrm/Convrs key enters the standard editor, the second press of this key will enter the Quick Code feature. Each
additional press of this key will switch between Visual Quick Code, Advanced Editor, the standard editor, and Quick
Code modes.

The Edit Window

Each time that you select a group item, as described in the next section, the edit window will update to show you
what code has been added to the currently edited program. All the edit functions with the exception of the jog
handle and the block copy function keys. In Quick Code, the jog handle is used to maneuver through the group list.
You can cursor through the program text by using the cursor keys provided on the center of the keypad. Switch to
standard edit mode by pressing the Progrm/Convrs key to access the jog handle (for long comments) and the block
copy functions. Quick Code is not available while in BACKGROUND EDIT MODE (See the Background Edit
Section in Operation Chapter).

The Group Window

The group window displays a list of groups that are available in Quick Code.

The Help Window

The help window is just below the group window. It is used to display Quick Code help messages and warnings and
program examples.

A Sample Quick Code Session

The following illustrates how Quick Code can be used to build a program. A program will be built to spot, drill, and
tap 5 holes on a circular bolthole pattern. We will assume that tool 1 is a spot drill, tool 2 is a drill for a 10-32 tap,
and tool 3 is the tap. Verify that Quick Code source program, O9999, is one of the programs in the control, before
starting.
The jog handle is an integral part of using Quick Code and is used quite often.

68 Quick Code 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Create A Program
Quick Code will not generate the new program number for you. To create a program, press List Prog, enter a
program number (e.g. O00005) and press Write/Enter. Or select a program to edit. In order to edit the program
press the Edit button and then press the Prgrm/Convrs key twice to enter Quick Code (Note that in the advanced
edit menus under the HELP menu is a sub menu selection for Quick Code.
QUICKCODE (EDIT) O00005 N00000
O00005 QUICKCODE
START UP COMMANDS...
1. MACHINE MOVES...
2. CUTTER COMP. MOVES...
3. DRILL /TAP/BORE CYCLES...
4. DRILL /TAP/BORE LOCATIONS...
5. CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING...
6. CUSTOM SETTINGS...
7. MISC COMMANDS...
ENDING COMMANDS...

Select The Start Up Commands

1. Turn Jog Handle clockwise (CW) until the group titled “Start Up Commands” in the group window is highlighted.
2. Turn the Jog Handle counter clockwise (CCW) one click. The items belonging to Start Up Commands will appear
and the item, “Program Name” is the one highlighted.
3. Press the Write key. This will enter in a (T), for you to cursor arrow left twice onto the “T” in-between the paren-
thesis, then type in a program name and press Alter.
The following figure shows what the screen with a program name entered looks like.
QUICKCODE (EDIT) O00005 N00000
O00005 ; QUICKCODE
(PROGRAM NAME) ; START UP COMMANDS...
Program Name..
Set Machine Defaults..
Sequence Comment..
Call Tool..
Tool Start Up Commands..
Done--Choose an Operation..
-------------------------------------------------

Start a Program Using Quick Code.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Quick Code 69

Call Tool 1
1. While on the “Start Up Commands” menu, turn the jog handle CCW to highlight the group item titled “Call Tool.
2. Press the Write button to have the control ask you for a tool number for your program, and the control will be
flashing with a 1 in the lower left corner as the default value. Press Write to accept the number 1.
3. Highlight the group item titled “Tool Start Up Commands”.
4. Press the Write key to have the control ask you for the commands to define the start up of tool 1, and enter into
your program.

QUICKCODE (EDIT) O00005 N00000

O00005 ; QUICKCODE
(PROGRAM NAME) ; START UP COMMANDS...
T1 M06 (T) ; Program Name..
G90 G54 G00 X0 Y0 ; Set Machine Defaults..
S750 M03 ; Sequence Comment..
G43 H01 Z1. M08 ; Call Tool..
Tool Start Up Commands..
Done--Choose an Operation..
--------------------------------------------------
1. MACHINE MOVES...
2. CUTTER COMP. MOVES...
3. DRILL /TAP/BORE CYCLES...

Programmed with the Start Up Command Selections Entered in with Quick Code for Tool 1.

For this example, the material is aluminum and that the work coordinate zero for G54 is at the center of the
bolthole pattern.
Invoke the Spot Drilling Canned Cycle G82
1. Scroll and highlight the group titled “4. Drill/Tap/Bore Cycles”.
2. Scroll CCW two clicks. “Drill with Dwell G82” will be highlighted.
3. Press the Write button to start the prompts.
Note that Quick Code defined a block of code to execute a spot drill cycle at that present location. More X and Y
drill cycle locations can be added, if needed, by selecting “6. Drill/Tap/Bore Locations”.
Note: The part does not have a hole drilled at X0 Y0, which is the center of the bolthole circle; manually enter an L0
on the end of the G82 command line. This will ignore the G82 canned cycle until the next location.
The program will look like this:
QUICKCODE (EDIT) O00005 N00000
O00005 ; QUICKCODE
3. DRILL/TAP/BORE CYCLES...
(PROGRAM NAME) ;
Drill G81..
T1 M06 (T) ;
Drill with Dwell G82..
G90 G54 G00 X0 Y0 ;
Deep Hole Peck Drill G83..
S750 M03 ;
High Speed Peck Drill G73..
G43 H01 Z1. M08 ;
H.S.P.D. W/Return R plane G73..
G82 G99 Z-0.109 P0.2 R0.1 F5. ;
Bore IN Bore OUT G85..
Bore IN Rapid OUT G86..
Bore IN Shift Rapid OUT G76..
Right Hand Tapping G84..
G80 CANCEL Canned Cycle..

Program with Spot Drilling Invoked.

70 Quick Code 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Execute a Circular Bolt Hole Pattern
Scroll CW and highlight the group titled “6. Drill/Tap/Bore Locations”. Scroll CCW and highlight the group titled “Bolt
Hole Circle Locations”. Press the Write button and the control will ask for the code on positioning around a bolthole
circle. Enter in the numbers to answer all the questions.
Example:
QUICKCODE (EDIT) O00005 N00000
O00005 ; QUICKCODE
4. DRILL/TAP/BORE LOCATIONS...
(PROGRAM NAME) ;
X Location..
T1 M06 (T) ;
Y Location..
G90 G54 G00 X0 Y0 ;
X & Y Location..
S750 M03 ;
A Location..
G43 H01 Z1. M08 ;
Initial Point or R Plane Return..
G82 G99 Z-0.109 P0.2 R0.1 F5. ;
Bolt Hole Circle Locations..
G70 X0 Y0 I2.5 J30. L5 ;
Bolt Hole Arc Locations..
Bolt Holes At Angle Locations..
More Bolt Hole Pattern Help..
G80 CANCEL Canned Cycle..

Program with a Bolt-hole Circle Added.

The remaining selections are similar to what has been done.

Call Tool 2
1. Scroll CW to the group titled “Start Up Commands” then scroll CCW and highlight the group item titled “Call
Tool”. Press the Write button and the control will ask for a tool; enter in the number 2.
2. Scroll CCW and highlight the group item titled “Tool Start Up Commands”. Press the Write key and the control
will ask for information necessary to use tool 2 in the program.

Call the Spot Drilling Canned Cycle G83

Scroll CW and highlight the group titled “4. Drill/Tap Cycles”. Scroll CCW until “Deep Hole Peck Drill G83” is
highlighted. Press the Write button and the control will ask for the information to drill with G83.
Note that Quick Code defined a block to execute a spot drill cycle at that present location. More X and Y drill cycle
locations can be added, if needed, by selecting “6. Drill/Tap/Bore Locations”.
Note: Manually enter an L0 on the end of the G82 command line to stop the mill from drilling a hole at the center of
the bolt hole circle. This will ignore the G82 canned cycle until the next location.

Execute a Circular Bolt Hole Pattern

Scroll CW and highlight the group titled “6. Drill/Tap/Bore Locations”. Scroll CCW and highlight the group titled “Bolt
Hole Circle Locations”. Press the Write button and the control will ask for the information to position around a bolt
hole circle. Enter in the numbers to answer all the questions in the lower left corner of the control screen, to define
all the commands necessary to position around to drill a Bolt Hole Circle with a G83 canned cycle.

Call Tool 3
1. Scroll CW to the group titled “ Start Up Commands” then scroll CCW and highlight the group item titled Call Tool.
Press the Write button and the control will ask for a tool to enter into number 3.
2. Scroll CCW and highlight the group item titled “Tool Start Up Commands”. Press the Write button and the control
will ask for the information necessary to use tool 3 in the program.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Quick Code 71

Call the Tapping Canned Cycle G84
Scroll CW and highlight the group titled 4. Drill/Tap Cycles. Scroll CCW until Right Hand Tapping G84 is high-
lighted. Press the Write key and the control will ask for the information to set up tapping with G84.
Note that Quick Code defined a block to execute a tapping cycle at that present location. Enter the appropriate
speed and feed for this tapping cycle. More X and Y tap cycle locations can be added, if needed, by selecting “6.
Drill/Tap/Bore Locations.
Note: Manually enter an L0 at the end of the G84 command line so the mill will not tap a hole at X0 Y0. This will
ignore the G84 canned cycle until the next location.
Execute a Circular Bolt Hole Pattern
1. Scroll CW and highlight the group titled “6. Drill/Tap/Bore Locations”. Scroll CCW and highlight the group titled
“Bolt Hole Circle Locations”. Press the Write button and the control will ask for the information to position around a
bolthole circle.
2. Answer the questions in the lower left corner of the control screen, this will define the commands necessary to
tap a bolt hole circle with a G84 canned cycle.
To move the table forward to ease the removal of the part use the following instructions:
Rapid Z-axis / Coolant Off
Scroll CW and highlight the group titled “Ending Commands”. Scroll CCW until the “Rapid Z Axis Coolant Off” is
highlighted and press Write.
The control will ask for the location to rapid the Z axis to..
Sending the Machine Home and Ending the Program
1. Scroll CW and highlight the group titled “Ending Commands”. Scroll CCW until “Home Y and Z Axes” is high-
lighted and press Write.
2. Scroll CCW and highlight the group titled “End Program, Reset M30” and press Write.
The program is ready to run. Run the program in graphics to make certain that all the steps are entered.

72 Quick Code 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 V ISUAL Q UICK C ODE
To start Visual Quick Code (VQC), enter Edit mode then press the PRGRM/CONVRS key three times. Another
way is to enter VQC is to use the pull down menus in the Advanced Editor under HELP.
Selecting a Category
Use the arrow keys to select the parts category whose description closely matches the desired part and press
Write. A set of illustrations of the parts in that category will appear.

VQC (EDIT) O00001 N00000 VQC (EDIT) O00001 N00000

I=?
J=?
NumHoles=?
ToolNo=?
WrkOfset=?
XPos=?
YPos=?
SpdleRpm=?
J DrlDpth=?
Rplain=?
Dwell=?

G70 BOLT HOLE CIRCLE

VQC Bolt-Hole Circle Category Bolt-Hole Circle Data Entry Screen

Selecting a Part Template

Use the arrow keys to select a template on the page. Pressing Write will display an outline of the part and wait for
the programmer to enter values to make the selected part.

Entering the Data

The control will prompt the programmer for information about the selected part. Once the information is entered, the
control another asks the user where the G-code is to be placed:
1) Select/Create a Program
A window will open prompting the user to select a program name. Highlight the desired name and press Write. This
will add the new lines of code to the selected program. If the program already contains code, VQC enter the lines of
code to the beginning of the program, before the existing code. The user also has the option to Create a new
program by entering a program name and by pressing Write, this will add the lines of code to the new program.
2) Add to Current Program – The code generated by VQC will be added after the cursor.
3) MDI – The code will output to MDI. Note: Anything in MDI will be overwritten.
4) Cancel – The window will close and the program values will be displayed.
Note: The program is also available for editing and viewing in the Advanced Editor. It is a good idea to check the
program by running it in Graphics mode.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Quick Code 73

 CUTTER COMPENSATION
Cutter compensation shifts the programmed tool path so that the centerline of the tool is moved to the left or right
of the programmed path. The OFFSET (Length and Radius) page is used to enter the amount that the tool is
shifted. The offset is entered as either a diameter/radius value (see setting 40) for both the geometry and wear
values. Note that If diameter is specified, the cutter compensation shift amount is half of the value entered. The
compensated value is calculated by the control from the values entered in the Radius (radius of the tool) and the
Wear (wear of the tool) values in the offsets page. In 2D machining cutter compensation is used in the X-axis and
the Y-axis (G17) and for 3D machining, cutter compensation is used in the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis (G141).
G41 will select cutter compensation left; that is, the tool is moved to the left of the programmed path.
G42 will select cutter compensation right.
G40 will cancel cutter compensation.
A Dnnn must also be programmed with G41or G42 to select the correct offset number from the radius/diameter
offset column. Offset values entered for the radius/diameter should be in positive numbers. If the offset contains a
negative value, cutter compensation will operate as though the opposite G code was specified. For example, a
negative value entered for a G41 will behave as if a positive value was entered for G42.
Selecting Yasnac for Setting 58, the control must be able to position the side of the tool along all of the edges of
the programmed contour without over cutting the next two motions. A circular motion joins all of the outside angles.
Selecting Fanuc for Setting 58, the control does not require that the tool cutting edge be placed along all edges of
the programmed contour, preventing over-cutting. Outside angles less than or equal to 270 degrees are joined by a
sharp corner and outside angles of more than 270 degrees are joined by an extra linear motion (See the following
diagrams).
The following diagrams show how cutter compensation works for the two values of Setting 58.
Note: When canceled, the programmed path returns to being the same as the center of the cutter path. Cancel
cutter comp (G40) before ending a program.
G41 with Positive Tool Diameter G41 with Positive Tool Diameter Actual center
or G42 with Negative Actual center of tool path
of tool path or G42 with Negative
Tool Diameter Tool Diameter Programmed path
Programmed path
Radius

G41 or G42
in this Extra
Block Move
G41 or G42 S
G40 or G42
in this Block S G40 in this Block in this Block

G42 with Positive Tool Diameter Actual center G42 with Positive Tool Diameter
Actual center
or G41 with of tool path or G41 with Negative of tool path
Negative Tool Diameter Tool Diameter
Programmed path Programmed path
Radius

G40 Extra
in this Move
G40 Block G41 or 42
S
in this Block G41 or 42 in this Block in this Block
S

74 Cutter Compensation 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 ENTRY AND EXIT FROM CUTTER C OMPENSATION
Cutting should not be performed when entering and exiting cutter compensation or when changing from left side to
right side compensation. When cutter compensation is turned on, the starting position of the move is the same as
the programmed position, but the ending position will be offset, to either the left or right of the programmed path, by
the amount entered in the, radius/diameter offset column. In the block that turns off cutter compensation, the
starting point is offset and the ending point is not offset. Similarly, when changing from left to right or right to left
side compensation, the starting point of the move needed to change cutter compensation direction will be offset to
one side of the programmed path and end at a point that is offset to the opposite side of the programmed path. The
result of all this is that the tool moves through a path that may not be the same as the intended path or direction. If
cutter compensation is turned on or off in a block without any X-Y move, there is no change made to cutter com-
pensation until the next X or Y move is encountered.
An offset selection of D0 will use zero as the offset value and have the same effect as not using cutter compensa-
tion. If a new D value is selected with cutter compensation active, the new value will take effect at the end of the
proceeding move. You cannot change the D value or change sides during a circular motion block (G02 or G03).
When turning on cutter compensation in a move that is followed by a second move at an angle of less than 90
degrees, there are two ways of computing the first motion these are: cutter compensation type A and type B
(Setting 43). The first, type A, moves the tool directly to the offset start point for the second cut. The second, type
B, is used to clear fixtures or clamps or in cases when part geometry demands it. The diagrams on the following
pages illustrate the differences between type A and type B for both Fanuc and Yasnac settings (Setting 58).

Move is less than cutter comp radius

Workpiece

Tool

Improper Cutter Compensation Application

Note that a small cut of less than tool radius and at a right angle to the previous motion will
only work with the Fanuc setting. A cutter compensation alarm will be generated if the machine is set to the
Yasnac setting.

FEED ADJUSTMENTS IN CUTTER COMPENSATION

When using cutter compensation in circular moves, there is the possibility of speed adjustments to what has been
programmed. If the intended finish cut is on the inside of a circular motion, the tool should be slowed down to
ensure that the surface feed does not exceed what was intended. There are problems when the speed is slowed by
too much, therefore, setting 44 is used to limit the amount of feed adjustment. It can be set between 1% and
100%. If set to 100%, there will be no speed changes. If set to 1% the speed can be slowed to 1% of the pro-
grammed feed.

When the cut is on the outside of a circular motion, there is no speed-up adjustment made to the rate feed.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Cutter Compensation 75

 Cutter Compensation Entry (YASNAC) Cutter Compensation Entry (Fanuc style)
Type A Type B Type A Type B

Program Path Program Path Program Path Program Path

Tool Center Path

Tool Center Path Tool Center Path Tool Center Path

Program Path Program Path Program Path Program Path

Tool Center Path Tool Center Path Tool Center Path Tool Center Path

The following illustration shows how the tool path is calculated for the cutter compensation. The detail section
shows the tool in the staring position and then in the offset position as the cutter reaches the workpiece.

G02 & G03 Circular Interpolation %

O6100
Note: Tool is a .250” diameter
R .3437 end mill. T1 M06
R .500 G00 G90 G54 X-1. Y-1. S5000 M03
R .375 G43 H01 Z.1 M08
R .375
G01 Z-1.0 F50.
G41 G01 X0 Y0 D1. F50.
Y4.125
G02 X.250 Y4.375 R.375
G01 X1.6562
R .5625 G02 X2.0 Y4.0313 R.3437
G01 Y3.125
G03 X2.375 Y2.750 R.375
G01 X3.5
X0, Y0 G02 X4.0 Y2.25 R.5
X0, Y0 G01 Y.4375
Offset Tool Path
G02 X3.4375 Y-.125 R.5625
G01 X-.125
X1., Y1. Programmed Path G40 X-1. Y-1.
Start Position Center of Tool G00 Z1.0 M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%

Programming exercise showing tool path.

The following program uses cutter compensation. Tool path is programmed to centerline of the cutter. This is also
the way the control calculates for cutter compensation.

76 Cutter Compensation 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 MACROS

INTRODUCTION

This control feature is optional; call your dealer for information.

Macros add capabilities and flexibly to the control that are not possible with standard G-code. Some possible uses
are, families of parts, custom canned cycles, complex motions, and driving optional devices. The possibilities are
almost endless.
A Macro is any routine/subprogram that may be run multiple times. A macro statement can assign a value to a
variable or read a value from a variable, evaluate an expression, conditionally or unconditionally branch to another
point within a program, or conditionally repeat some section of program.
Here are a few examples of the applications for Macros. Rather than give macro code here, we will outline the
general applications that Macros can be used for.
• Tools For Immediate, On-Table Fixturing Many setup procedures can be semi-automated to assist
the machinist. Tools can be reserved for immediate situations that were not anticipated during tool design.
For instance, suppose a company uses a standard clamp with a standard bolthole pattern. If it is
discovered, after setup, that a fixture will need an additional clamp and if macro subroutine 2000 has been
programmed for drilling the bolt pattern of the clamp, then the following two-step procedure is all that is
needed for adding the clamp to the fixture.
1. Determine X, Y, and Z coordinates and angle where the clamp is to be placed by jogging the
machine to the proposed clamp position and reading the position coordinates from the machine
display.
2. Execute the following command in MDI mode:
G65 P2000 X??? Y??? Z??? A??? ;
Where “???” Are the values determined in Step 1.
Here, macro 2000 takes care of all the work since it was designed to drill the clamp bolthole
pattern at the specified angle of A. Essentially; the machinist has created a custom canned
cycle.
• Simple Patterns That Are Repeated Over And Over Again In The Shop Patterns that recur over
and over again can be defined using macros and stored. For example:
1) Bolt hole patterns
2) Slotting
3) Angular patterns, any number of holes, at any angle, with any spacing
4) Specialty milling such as soft jaws
5) Matrix Patterns, (e.g. 12 across and 15 down)
6) Fly cutting a surface, (e.g. 12 inches by 5 inches using a 3 inch fly cutter)
• Automatic Offset Setting Based On The Program With macros, coordinate offsets can be set in each
program so that setup procedures become easier and less error-prone (macro variables #2001-2800).
• Probing Probing enhances the capabilities of the machine in many ways, some examples are:
1) Profiling of a part to determine unknown dimensions for later machining.
2) Tool calibration for offset and wear values.
3) Inspection prior to machining to determine material allowance on castings.
4) Inspection after machining to determine parallelism and flatness values as well as location.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 77

Useful G and M Codes
M00, M01, M30 - Stop Program
G04 - Dwell
G65 Pxx - Macro subprogram call. Allows passing of variables.
M96 Pxx Qxx - Conditional Local Branch when Discrete Input Signal is 0
M97 Pxx - Local Sub Routine Call
M98 Pxx - Sub Program Call
M99 - Sub Program Return or Loop
G103 - Block Lookahead Limit. No cutter comp allowed
M109 - Interactive User Input (see “M Codes” section)

Settings
There are 3 settings that can affect macro programs (9000 series programs), these are 9xxxx progs Lock (#23),
9xxx Progs Trace (#74) and 9xxx Progs Single BLK (#75).

Lookahead
Lookahead is an issue of great importance to the macro programmer. The control will attempt to process as many
lines as possible ahead of time in order to speed up processing. This includes the interpretation of macro variables.
For example,
#1101=1
G04 P1.
#1101=0
This is intended to turn an output ON, wait 1 second, and then turn it off. However, lookahead will cause the output
to turn on then immediately back off while the dwell is being processed. G103 P1 can be used to limit lookahead to
1 blocks. To make this example work properly, it must be modified as follows:
G103 P1 (See the G-code section of the manual for a further explanation of G103)
;
#1101=1
G04 P1.
;
;
;
#1101=0
Round Off
The control stores decimal numbers as binary values. As a result, numbers stored in variables can be off by 1 least
significant digit. For example, the number 7 stored in macro variable #100 may later be read as 7.000001, 7.000000,
or 6.999999. If your statement was, “IF [#100 EQ 7]…”, it may give a false reading. A safer way of programming this
would be, “IF [ROUND [#100] EQ 7]…”. This issue is usually only a problem when storing integers in macro vari-
ables where you do not expect to see a fractional part later.

OPERATION NOTES

Macro variables can be saved or loaded through the RS-232 or the optional floppy drive, much like settings, and
offsets. Refer to the “Loading Programs to the Control” section.
Variable Display Page
The macro variables are displayed and can be modified through the current commands display. To get to the pages,
press CURNT COMDS and use the page up/down key.
As the control interprets a program, the variable changes are displayed on the variable display page and results can
be viewed.
The macro variable is set by entering a value and then pressing the Write/Enter button. Macro Variables can be
cleared by pressing the Origin key, this will clear all variables.

78 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Entering the macro variable number and pressing the up/down arrow will search for that variable.
The variables displayed represent the values of the variables during the running of the program. At times, this may be
up to 15 blocks ahead of the actual machine actions. Debugging the programs are easier when inserting a G103 at
the beginning of a program to limit block buffering and then removing the G103 after debugging is completed.
Macro Arguments
The arguments in a G65 statement are a means of sending values to and setting the local variables of a macro
subroutine.
In the previous example 2 , the arguments (values of) X and Y are passed to the macro subroutine local variables.
Local variable #24 is associated with X and is set to 0.5. Similarly, Local variable #25 is associated with Y and is set
to 0.25.
The following two tables indicate the mapping of the alphabetic address variables to the numeric variables used in a
macro subroutine.
Alphabetic Addressing

Address: A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Variable: 1 2 3 7 8 9 - 11 4 5 6 - 13
Address: N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Variable: - - - 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Alternate Alphabetic Addressing

Address: A B C I J K I J K I J
Variable: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Address: K I J K I J K I J K I
Variable: 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Address: J K I J K I J K I J K
Variable: 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

Arguments accept any floating-point value to four decimal places. If the control is in metric, it will assume thou-
sandths (.000). In Example 3, local variable #7 will receive .0004.
If a decimal is not included in an argument value, such as:
G65 P9910 A1 B2 C3
The values are passed to macro subroutines according to the following table:
Integer Argument Passing (no decimal point)

Address: A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Variable: .001 .001 .001 1. 1. 1. - 1. .0001 .0001 .0001 1. 1.

Address: N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Variable: - - - .0001 .0001 1. 1. .0001 .0001 .0001 .0001 .0001 .0001

All 33 local macro variables can be assigned values with arguments by using the alternate addressing method. The
following example shows how one could send two sets of coordinate locations to a macro subroutine. Local variables
#4 through #9 would be set to .0001 through .0006 respectively.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 79

Example 3: G65 P2000 I1 J2 K3 I4 J5 K6;
The following letters cannot be used to pass parameters to a macro subroutine: G, L, N, O or P.
Macro Variables
There are three categories of macro variables: system variables, global variables, and local variables.
Macro Constants are floating point values placed in a macro expression. They can be combined with addresses A-Z
or they can stand alone when used within an expression. Examples of constants are .0001, 5.3 or -10.
Local Variables
Local variables range between #1 and #33. A set of local variables is available at all times. When a call to a subrou-
tine with a G65 command is executed, the local variables are saved and a new set is available for use. This is called
“nesting” of the local variables. During a G65 call, all of the new local variables are cleared to undefined values and
any local variables that have corresponding address variables in the G65 line are set to the G65 line values. Below is
a table of the local variables along with the address variable arguments that change them.

Variable: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Address: A B C I J K D E F H
Alternate: I J K I J
Variable: 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Address: M Q R S T U V
Alternate: K I J K I J K I J K I
Variable: 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Address: W X Y Z
Alternate: J K I J K I J K I J K

Note that variables 10, 12, 14-16 and 27-33 do not have corresponding address arguments. They can be set if a
sufficient number of I, J and K arguments are used as indicated above in the section about arguments.
Once in the macro subroutine, the local variables can be read and modified by referencing the variable numbers 1-33.
When the L argument is used to do multiple repetitions of a macro subroutine, the arguments are set only on the
first repetition. This means that if local variables 1-33 are modified in the first repetition, then the next repetition will
have access only to the modified values. Local values are retained from repetition to repetition when the L address is
greater than 1.
Calling a subroutine via an M97 or M98 does not nest the local variables. Any local variables referenced in a subrou-
tine called by an M98 are the same variables and values that existed prior to the M97 or M98 call.

Global Variables
Global variables are variables that are accessible at all times. There is only one copy of each global variable. Global
variables occur in three ranges: 100-199, 500-699 and 800-999. The global variables remain in memory when power
is turned off.
Occasionally, there have been some macros written for factory installed options that use the global variables. For
example, probing, pallet changers, etc. When using global variables, be sure they are not in use by another program
on the machine.
System Variables
System variables give the programmer the ability to interact with a variety of control conditions. By setting a system
variable, the function of the control can be modified. By reading a system variable, a program can modify its behavior
based on the value in the variable. Some system variables have a Read Only status; this means that the program-
mer cannot modify them. A brief table of currently implemented system variables follows with an explanation of their
use.

80 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 VARIABLES USAGE
#0 Not a number (read only)
#1-#33 Macro call arguments
#100-#199 General-purpose variables saved on power off
#500-#699 General-purpose variables saved on power off
#700-#749 Hidden variables for internal use only.
#800-#999 General-purpose variables saved on power off
#1000-#1063 64 discrete inputs (read only)
#1064-#1068 Maximum axis loads.
#1080-#1087 Raw analog to digital inputs (read only)
#1090-#1098 Filtered analog to digital inputs (read only)
#1094 Spindle load with OEM spindle drive (read only)
#1098 Spindle load with Haas vector drive (read only)
#1100-#1139 40 discrete outputs
#1140-#1155 16 extra relay outputs via multiplexed output
#1264-#1268 Maximum axis loads.
#1601-#1800 Number of Flutes of tools #1 through 200
#1801-#2000 Maximum recorded vibrations of tools 1 through 200
#2001-#2200 Tool length offsets
#2201-#2400 Tool length wear
#2401-#2600 Tool diameter/radius offsets
#2601-#2800 Tool diameter/radius wear
#3000 Programmable alarm
#3001 Millisecond timer
#3002 Hour timer
#3003 Single block suppression
#3004 Override control
#3006 Programmable stop with message
#3011 Year, month, day
#3012 Hour, minute, second
#3020 Power on timer (read only)
#3021 Cycle start timer (read only)
#3022 Feed timer (read only)
#3023 Present part timer (read only)
#3024 Last complete part timer (read only)
#3025 Previous part timer (read only)
#3026 Tool in spindle (read only)
#3027 Spindle RPM (read only)
#3030 Single Block (read only)
#3031 Dry Run (read only)
#3032 Block Delete (read only)
#3033 Opt Stop (read only)
#3201-#3400 Actual Diameter for tools 1 through 200
#3401-#3600 Programmable coolant positions for tools 1 through 200
#3901 M30 count 1
#3902 M30 count 2
#4000-#4021 Previous block G-Code group codes
#4101-#4126 Previous block address codes
NOTE: Mapping of 4101 to 4126 is the same as the alphabetic addressing of “Macro Arguments” section; e.g. the
statement x1.3 sets variable #4124 to 1.3. The mapping of the axes are x=1, y=2, … b=5, for example, the Z
machine coordinate system variable would be #5023.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 81

 #5001-#5005 Previous block end position
#5021-#5025 Present machine coordinate position
#5041-#5045 Present work coordinate position
#5061-#5065 Present skip signal position - X,Y,Z,A,B
#5081-#5085 Present tool offset
#5201-#5205 Common offset
#5221-#5225 G54 work offsets
#5241-#5245 G55 work offsets
#5261-#5265 G56 work offsets
#5281-#5285 G57 work offsets
#5301-#5305 G58 work offsets
#5321-#5325 G59 work offsets
#5401-#5500 Tool feed timers (seconds)
#5501-#5600 Total tool timers (seconds)
#5601-#5699 Tool life monitor limit
#5701-#5800 Tool life monitor counter
#5801-#5900 Tool load monitor maximum load sensed so far
#5901-#6000 Tool load monitor limit
#6001-#6277 Settings (read only)
#6501-#6999 Parameters (read only)
NOTE: The low order bits of large values will not appear in the macro variables for settings and parameters
#7001-#7006 (#14001-#14006) G110 (G154 P1) additional work offsets
#7021-#7026 (#14021-#14026) G111 (G154 P2) additional work offsets
#7041-#7046 (#14041-#14046) G112 (G154 P3) additional work offsets
#7061-#7066 (#14061-#14066) G113 (G154 P4) additional work offsets
#7081-#7086 (#14081-#14086) G114 (G154 P5) additional work offsets
#7101-#7106 (#14101-#14106) G115 (G154 P6) additional work offsets
#7121-#7126 (#14121-#14126) G116 (G154 P7) additional work offsets
#7141-#7146 (#14141-#14146) G117 (G154 P8) additional work offsets
#7161-#7166 (#14161-#14166) G118 (G154 P9) additional work offsets
#7181-#7186 (#14181-#14186) G119 (G154 P10) additional work offsets
#7201-#7206 (#14201-#14206) G120 (G154 P11) additional work offsets
#7221-#7226 (#14221-#14221) G121 (G154 P12) additional work offsets
#7241-#7246 (#14241-#14246) G122 (G154 P13) additional work offsets
#7261-#7266 (#14261-#14266) G123 (G154 P14) additional work offsets
#7281-#7286 (#14281-#14286) G124 (G154 P15) additional work offsets
#7301-#7306 (#14301-#14306) G125 (G154 P16) additional work offsets
#7321-#7326 (#14321-#14326) G126 (G154 P17) additional work offsets
#7341-#7346 (#14341-#14346) G127 (G154 P18) additional work offsets
#7361-#7366 (#14361-#14366) G128 (G154 P19) additional work offsets
#7381-#7386 (#14381-#14386) G129 (G154 P20) additional work offsets
#14401-#14406 G154 P21 additional work offsets
#14421-#14426 G154 P22 additional work offsets
#14441-#14446 G154 P23 additional work offsets
#14461-#14466 G154 P24 additional work offsets
#14481-#14486 G154 P25 additional work offsets
#14501-#14506 G154 P26 additional work offsets
#14521-#14526 G154 P27 additional work offsets
#14541-#14546 G154 P28 additional work offsets
#14661-#14666 G154 P29 additional work offsets
#14581-#14686 G154 P30 additional work offsets

82 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 #14781-#14786 G154 P40 additional work offsets

#14981-#14986 G154 P50 additional work offsets

#15181-#15186 G154 P60 additional work offsets

#15381-#15386 G154 P70 additional work offsets

#15581-#15586 G154 P80 additional work offsets

#15781-#15786 G154 P90 additional work offsets

15881-15886 G154 P95 additional work offsets

15901-15906 G154 P96 additional work offsets
15921-15926 G154 P97 additional work offsets
15941-15946 G154 P98 additional work offsets
15961-15966 G154 P99 additional work offsets

SYSTEM VARIABLES IN-DEPTH

Variables #750 and #751

These macro variables collect the input from serial port 2. The programmer can test for data queued in the serial port
2 buffer, and collect the data for processing. Macro variable #750 will inform the programmer if there is data waiting in
the RS232 port 2. A value of 1 means that the receive buffer has data queued, otherwise a value of 0 is returned.
Macro variable 751 collects the first character from the input buffer, when data is queued. This means that the buffer
content is first checked to see if it is empty; if not the value of the next character queued is returned.
1-Bit Discrete Inputs
Inputs designated as “spare” can be connected to external devices and used by the programmer.
1-Bit Discrete Outputs
The Haas control is capable of controlling up to 56 discrete outputs. However, a number of these outputs are already
reserved for use by the Haas controller.
CAUTION! Do not use outputs that are reserved by the system. Using these outputs may result in injury or damage
to your equipment.
The user can change the state of these outputs by writing to variables designated as “spare”. If the outputs are
connected to relays, then an assignment of “1” sets the relay. An assignment of “0” clears the relay.
Referencing these outputs will return the current state of the output and this may be the last assigned value or it
may be the last state of the output as set by some user M code. For example, after verifying that output #1108 is
“spare”:

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 83

#1108=1; (Turns #1108 relay on)
#101=#3001+1000; (101 is 1 second from now)
WHILE [[#101 GT #3001] AND [#1109 EQ 0]] D01
END1 (Wait here 1 second or until relay #1109 goes high)
#1108=0; (Turns #1108 relay off)
If the control is not equipped with the M-code relay board, then M21 through M28 will be mapped from #1132-#1139.
If the M-code relay board is installed, see the 8M-option section for information and instructions.
Note: Always test or dry run programs that have been developed for macros that is using new hardware.
Maximum Axis Loads
The following variables are used to contain the maximum load values for each axis. They can be cleared by cycling
power to the machine or by setting the macro to zero in a program (for example, #1064=0;).
1064 = X axis 1264 = C axis
1065 = Y axis 1265 = U axis
1066 = Z axis 1266 = V axis
1067 = A axis 1267 = W axis
1068 = B axis 1268 = T axis
Tool Offsets
Each tool offset has a length (H) and radius (D) along with associated wear values.
#2001-#2200 H geometry offsets (1-200) for length.
#2200-#2400 H geometry wear (1-200) for length.
#2401-#2600 D geometry offsets (1-200) for diameter.
#2601-#2800 D geometry wear (1-200) for diameter.
Programmable Messages
#3000 Alarms can be programmed. A programmable alarm will act just like Haas internal alarms. An alarm is
generated by setting the macro variable #3000 to a number between 1 and 999.
#3000= 15 (MESSAGE PLACED INTO ALARM LIST);
When this is done, “Alarm” flashes at the bottom of the display and the text in the next comment is placed into the
alarm list. The alarm number (in this example, 15) is added to 1000 and used as an alarm number. If an alarm is
generated in this manner all motion stops and the program must be reset to continue. Programmable alarms are
always numbered between 1000 and 1999.
The first 34 characters of the comment will be used for the alarm message.
Timers
Haas macros can access two timers. These timers can be set to a value by assigning a number to the respective
variable. A program can then later read the variable and determine the time passed since the timer was set. Timers
can be used to imitate dwell cycles, determine part-to-part time or wherever time-dependent behavior is desired.
#3001 Millisecond Timer - The millisecond timer is updated every 20 milliseconds and thus activities can be timed
with an accuracy of only 20 milliseconds. At Power On, the millisecond timer is reset. The timer has a limit of 497
days. The whole number returned after accessing #3001 represents the number of milliseconds.
#3002 Hour Timer - The hour timer is similar to the millisecond timer except that the number returned after access-
ing #3002 is in hours. The hour and millisecond timers are independent of each other and can be set separately.
System Overrides
#3003 Variable 3003 is the Single Block Suppression parameter. It overrides the Single Block function in G-code. In
the following example Single Block is ignored when #3003 is set equal to 1. After M3003 is set =1, each G-code
command (lines 2-4) are executed continuously even though the Single Block function is ON. When #3003 is set
equal to zero, Single Block will operate as normal. That is, the user must press Cycle Start start each line of code
(lines 6-8).

84 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

#3003=1;
G54 G00 G90 X0 Y0;
G81 R0.2 Z-0.1 F20 L0;
S2000 M03;
#3003=0;
T02 M06;
G83 R0.2 Z-1 F10. L0;
X0. Y0.;
Variable #3004
Variable #3004 is a variable that overrides specific control features while running.
The first bit disables the Feed Hold button. If feed hold is not to be used during a section of code, then put variable
#3004, assigned to 1, before the specific lines of code. After that section of code set #3004 to 0 to restore the
function of the Feed Hold button. For example:
Approach code (Feed Hold allowed)
#3004=1; (Disables Feed Hold button)
Non-stoppable code (Feed Hold not allowed)
#3004=0; (Enables Feed Hold button)
Depart code (Feed Hold allowed)
The following is a map of variable #3004 bits and the associated overrides. E – Enabled D – Disabled
#3004 Feed Hold Feed Hold Override Exact Top Check
0 E E E
1 D E E
2 E D E
3 D D E
4 E E D
5 D E D
6 E D D
7 D D D
#3006 Programmable Stop
Stops can be programmed which acts like an M00 - The control stops and waits until Cycle Start is pressed. Once
Cycle Start is pressed, the program continues with the block after the #3006. In the following example, the first 15
characters of the comment are displayed on the lower left part of the screen.
IF [#1 EQ #0] THEN #3006=101 (comment here);
#4001-#4021 Last Block (Modal) Group Codes
The grouping of G codes permits more efficient processing. G codes with similar functions are usually under the
same group. For example, G90 and G91 are under group 3. These variables store the last or default G code for any
of 21 groups. By reading the group code, a macro program can change the behavior of the G-code. If 4003 contains
91, then a macro program could determine that all moves should be incremental rather than absolute. There is no
associated variable for group zero; group zero G codes are Non-modal.
#4101-#4126 Last Block (Modal) Address Data
Address codes A-Z (excluding G) are maintained as modal values. The information represented by the last line of
code interpreted by the lookahead process is contained in variables 4101 through 4126. The numeric mapping of
variable numbers to alphabetic addresses corresponds to the mapping under alphabetic addresses. For example,
the value of the previously interpreted D address is found in #4107 and the last interpreted I value is #4104. When
aliasing a macro to an M-code, you may not pass variables to the macro using variables 1-33; instead, use the
values from 4101-4126 in the macro.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 85

#5001-#5005 Last Target Position
The final programmed point for the last motion block can be accessed through variables #5001-#5005, X, Y, Z, A, and
B, respectively. Values are given in the current work coordinate system and can be used while the machine is in
motion.
Axis Position Variables
#5020 X-axis #5021 Y-axis #5022 Z-axis
#5023 A-axis #5024 B-axis #5025 C-axis
#5021-#5025 Current Machine Coordinate Position
The current position in machine coordinates can be obtained through #5021-#5025, X, Y, Z, A, and B, respectively.
The values CANNOT be read while the machine is in motion. The value of #5023 (Z) has tool length compensation
applied to it.
#5041-#5045 Current Work Coordinate Position
The current position in the current work coordinates can be obtained through #5041-5045, X, Y, Z, A, and B, respec-
tively. The values CANNOT be read while the machine is in motion. The value of #5043 (Z) has tool length compensa-
tion applied to it.
#5061-#5065 Current Skip Signal Position
The position where the last skip signal was triggered can be obtained through #5061-#5065, X, Y, Z, A, and B,
respectively. Values are given in the current work coordinate system and can be used while the machine is in
motion. The value of #5063 (Z) has tool length compensation applied to it.
#5081-#5085 Tool Length Compensation
The current total tool length compensation that is being applied to the tool. This includes tool length offset referenced
by the current value set in H (#4008) plus the wear value.
Note: The mapping of the axes are x=1, y=2, … b=5. So as an example, the Z machine coordinate system variable
would be #5023.
Offsets
All tool work offsets can be read and set within a macro expression. This allows the programmer to preset coordi-
nates to approximate locations, or to set coordinates to values based upon the results of skip signal locations and
calculations. When any of the offsets are read, the interpretation lookahead queue is stopped until that block is
executed.
#5201-#5205 G52 X, Y, Z, A, B OFFSET VALUES
#5221-#5225 G54 “ “ “ “ “ “ “
#5241-#5245 G55 “ “ “ “ “ “ “
#5261-#5265 G56 “ “ “ “ “ “ “
#5281-#5285 G57 “ “ “ “ “ “ “
#5301-#5305 G58 “ “ “ “ “ “ “
#5321-#5325 G59 “ “ “ “ “ “ “
#7001-#7005 G110 X, Y, Z, A, B OFFSET VALUES
“ “ “ “““ “ “ “
#7381-#7385 G129 X, Y, Z, A, B OFFSET VALUES

VARIABLE USAGE
All variables are referenced with a pound sign (#) followed by a positive number. Examples are: #1, #101, and #501.
Variables are decimal values that are represented as floating point numbers. If a variable has never been used, it can
take on a special “undefined” value. This indicates that it has not been used. A variable can be set to undefined with
the special variable #0. #0 has the value of undefined or 0.0 depending on the context it is used in. Indirect refer-
ences to variables can be accomplished by enclosing the variable number in brackets.

86 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

#[<Expression>]
The expression is evaluated and the result becomes the variable accessed. For example:
#1=3;
#[#1]=3.5 + #1;
This sets the variable #3 to the value 6.5.
Variables can be used in place of G-code address where “address” refers to the letters A-Z.
In the block: N1 G0 G90 X1.0 Y0;
the variables can be set to the following values:
#7=0;
#11=90;
#1=1.0;
#2=0.0;
and replaced by: N1 G#7 G#11 X#1 Y#2;
The values in the variables at runtime are used as the address values.

ADDRESS SUBSTITUTION
The usual method of setting control addresses A-Z is the address followed by a number. For example:
G01 X1.5 Y3.7 F20. ;
Sets addresses G, X, Y and F to 1, 1.5, 3.7 and 20.0 respectively and thus instructs the control to move linearly,
G01, to position X=1.5 Y=3.7 at a feed rate of 20 inches per minute. Macro syntax allows the address values to be
replaced with any variable or expression.
The previous statement can be replaced by the following code:
#1=1;
#2=.5;
#3=3.7;
#4=20;
G#1 X[#1+#2] Y#3 F#4 ;
The permissible syntax on addresses A-Z (exclude N or O) is as follows:
<address><-><variable> A-#101
<address>[<expression>] Y[#5041+3.5]
<address><->[<expression>] Z-[SIN[#1]]
If the value of the variable does not agree with the range of the address, the control will generate an alarm. For
example, the following code would result in a range error alarm because tool diameter numbers range from 0-50.
#1=75;
D#1;
When a variable or expression is used in place of an address value, the value is rounded to the least significant digit.
If #1=.123456, then G1X#1 would move the machine tool to .1235 on the X axis. If the control is in the metric mode,
the machine would be moved to .123 on the X axis.
When an undefined variable is used to replace an address value, then that address reference is ignored. For ex-
ample, if #1 is undefined then the block
G00 X1.0 Y#1 ;

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 87

Becomes
G00 X1.0.
No Y movement takes place.
Macro Statements
Macro statements are lines of code that allow the programmer to manipulate the control with features similar to any
standard programming language. Included are functions, operators, conditional and arithmetic expressions, assign-
ment statements, and control statements.
Functions and operators are used in expressions to modify variables or values. The operators are essential to
expressions while functions make the programmer’s job easier.
Functions
Functions are built-in routines that the programmer has available to use. All functions have the form
<function_name>[argument] and return floating-point decimal values. The functions provided in the Haas control
are as follows:
Function Argument Returns Notes
SIN[ ] Degrees Decimal Sine
COS[ ] Degrees Decimal Cosine
TAN[ ] Degrees Decimal Tangent
ATAN[ ] Decimal Degrees Arctangent Same as FANUC ATAN[ ]/[1]
SQRT[ ] Decimal Decimal Square root
ABS[ ] Decimal Decimal Absolute value
ROUND[ ] Decimal Decimal Round off a decimal
FIX[ ] Decimal Integer Truncate fraction
ACOS[ ] Degrees Decimal Arccosine
ASIN[ ] Degrees Decimal Arcsine
#[ ] Integer Integer Variable Indirection
DPRNT[ ] ASCII text External Output
Notes on Functions
The function “Round” works differently depending on the context that it is used. When used in arithmetic expres-
sions, any number with a fractional part greater than or equal to .5 is rounded up to the next whole integer; other-
wise, the fractional part is truncated from the number.
#1= 1.714 ;
#2= ROUND[#1] ; (#2 is set to 2.0)
#1= 3.1416 ;
#2= ROUND[#1] ; (#2 is set to 3.0)
When round is used in an address expression, then the argument “Round” is rounded to the significant precision. For
metric and angle dimensions, three-place precision is the default. For inch, four-place precision is the default.

88 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 #1= 1.00333 ;
G0 X[ #1 + #1 ] ;
(Table moves to 2.0067) ;
G0 X[ ROUND[ #1 ] + ROUND[ #1 ] ] ;
(Table moves to 2.0066) ;
G0 A[ #1 + #1 ] ;
(Axis moves to 2.007) ;
G0 A[ ROUND[ #1 ] + ROUND[ #1 ] ] ;
(Axis moves to 2.006) ;
D[1.67] (Diameter 2 is made current) ;
Fix vs. Round
#1=3.54; #2=ROUND[#1]; #3=FIX[#1]. #2 will be set to 4. #3 will be set to 3.
Operators
Operators can be classified into three categories: Arithmetic operators, Logical operators and Boolean operators.
Arithmetic Operators
Arithmetic operators consist of unary and binary operators. They are:
+ - Unary plus +1.23
- - Unary minus -[COS[30]]
+ - Binary addition #1=#1+5
- - Binary subtraction #1=#1-1
* - Multiplication #1=#2*#3
/ - Division #1=#2/4
MOD - Remainder #1=27 MOD 20 (#1 contains 7)
Logical Operators
Logical operators are operators that work on binary bit values. Macro variables are floating point numbers. When
logical operators are used on macro variables, only the integer portion of the floating point number is used. The
logical operators are:
OR - logically OR two values together
XOR - Exclusively OR two values together
AND - Logically AND two values together
Examples:
#1=1.0; 0000 0001
#2=2.0; 0000 0010
#3=#1 OR #2 0000 0011 Here the variable #3 will contain 3.0 after the OR operation.
#1=5.0;
#2=3.0;
IF [[#1 GT 3.0] AND [#2 LT 10]] GOTO1 Here control will transfer to block 1 because #1 GT 3.0
evaluates to 1.0 and #2 LT 10 evaluates to 1.0, thus 1.0 AND
1.0 is 1.0 (TRUE) and the GOTO occurs.
Note that care must be taken when using logical operators so that the desired result is achieved.
Boolean Operators
Boolean operators always evaluate to 1.0 (TRUE) or 0.0 (FALSE). There are six Boolean operators. These operators
are not restricted to conditional expressions, but they most often are used in conditional expressions. They are:

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 89

EQ - Equal to
NE - Not Equal to
GT - Greater Than
LT - Less Than
GE - Greater than or Equal to
LE - Less Than or Equal to
The following are four examples of how Boolean and Logical operators can be used:
Example Explanation
IF [#1 EQ 0.0] GOTO100; Jump to block 100 if value in variable #1 equals 0.0.
WHILE [#101 LT 10] DO1; While variable #101 is less than 10 repeat loop DO1..END1.
#1=[1.0 LT 5.0]; Variable #1 is set to 1.0 (TRUE).
IF [#1 AND #2 EQ #3] GOTO1 If variable #1 logically ANDed with variable #2 is equal to the
value in #3 then control jumps to block 1.
Expressions
Expressions are defined as any sequence of variables and operators surrounded by the square brackets “[“ and “]”.
There are two uses for expressions: conditional expressions or arithmetic expressions. Conditional expressions
return FALSE (0.0) or TRUE (any non zero) values. Arithmetic expressions use arithmetic operators along with
functions to determine a value.
Conditional Expressions
In the HAAS control, ALL expressions set a conditional value. The value is either 0.0 (FALSE) or the value is nonzero
(TRUE). The context in which the expression is used determines if the expression is a conditional expression.
Conditional expressions are used in the IF and WHILE statements and in the M99 command. Conditional expres-
sions can make use of Boolean operators to help evaluate a TRUE or FALSE condition.
The M99 conditional construct is unique to the HAAS control. Without macros, M99 in the HAAS control has the
ability to branch unconditionally to any line in the current subroutine by placing a P code on the same line. For
example:
N50 M99 P10;
branches to line N10. It does not return control to the calling subroutine. With macros enabled, M99 can be used
with a conditional expression to branch conditionally. To branch when variable #100 is less than 10 we could code
the above line as follows.
N50 [#100 LT 10] M99 P10;
In this case, the branch occurs only when #100 is less than 10, otherwise processing continues with the next
program line in sequence. In the above, the conditional M99 can be replaced with
N50 IF [#100 LT 10] GOTO10;
Arithmetic Expressions
An arithmetic expression is any expression using variables, operators, or functions. An arithmetic expression returns
a value. Arithmetic expressions are usually used in assignment statements, but are not restricted to them.
Examples of Arithmetic expressions: #101=#145*#30;
#1=#1+1;
X[#105+COS[#101]];
#[#2000+#13]=0;
Assignment Statements
Assignment statements allow the programmer to modify variables. The format of the assignment statement is:

90 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

<expression>=<expression>
The expression on the left of the equal sign must always refer to a macro variable, whether directly or indirectly. The
following macro initializes a sequence of variables to any value. Here both direct and indirect assignments are used.
O0300 (Initialize an array of variables) ;
N1 IF [#2 NE #0] GOTO2 (B=base variable) ;
#3000=1 (Base variable not given) ;
N2 IF [#19 NE #0] GOTO3 (S=size of array);
#3000=2 (Size of array not given) ;
N3 WHILE [#19 GT 0] DO1 ;
#19=#19-1 (Decrement count) ;
#[#2+#19]=#22 (V=value to set array to) ;
END1 ;
M99 ;
The above macro could be used to initialize three sets of variables as follows:
G65 P300 B101. S20 (INIT 101..120 TO #0) ;
G65 P300 B501. S5 V1 (INIT 501..505 TO 1.0) ;
G65 P300 B550. S5 V0 (INIT 550..554 TO 0.0) ;
The decimal point in B101., etc. would be required.
Control Statements
Control statements allow the programmer to branch, both conditionally and unconditionally. They also provide the
ability to iterate a section of code based on a condition.
Unconditional Branch (GOTOnnn and M99 Pnnnn)
In the Haas control, there are two methods of branching unconditionally. An unconditional branch will always branch
to a specified block. M99 P15 will branch unconditionally to block number 15. The M99 can be used whether or not
macros is installed and is the traditional method for branching unconditionally in the Haas control. GOTO15 does the
same as M99 P15. In the Haas control, a GOTO command can be used on the same line as other G-codes. The
GOTO is executed after any other commands like M codes.
Computed Branch (GOTO#n and GOTO [expression])
Computed branching allows the program to transfer control to another line of code in the same subprogram. The
block can be computed as the program is running, using the GOTO [expression] form. Or the block can be passed
in through a local variable, as in the GOTO#n form.
The GOTO will round the variable or expression result that is associated with the Computed branch. For instance, if
#1 contains 4.49 and GOTO#1 is executed, the control will attempt to transfer to a block containing N4. If #1
contains 4.5, then execution will transfer to a block containing N5.
The following code skeleton could be developed to make a program that ads serial numbers to parts:

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 91

 O9200 (Engrave digit at current location.)
;
(D=Decimal digit to engrave);
IF [[#7 NE #0] AND [#7 GE O] AND [#7 LE 9]] GOTO99;
#3000=1 (Invalid digit)
;
N99
#7=FIX[#7] (Truncate any fractional part) ;
;
GOTO#7 (Now engrave the digit) ;
;
N0 (Do digit zero)
...
M99
;
N1 (Do digit one)
;
M99
;
N2 (Do digit two)
;
...
;
(etc.,...)
With the above subroutine, you would engrave digit five with the following call:
G65 P9200 D5;
Computed GOTOs using expression could be used to branch processing based on the results of reading hardware
inputs. An example might look like the following:
GOTO [[#1030*2]+#1031];
NO (1030=0, 1031=0);
...
M99;
N1 (1030=0, 1031=1);
...
M99;
N2 (1030=1, 1031=0);
...
M99;
N3 (1030=1, 1031=1);
...
M99;
The discrete inputs always return either 0 or 1 when read. The GOTO [expression] will branch to the appropriate line
of code based on the state of the two discrete inputs #1030 and #1031.
Conditional Branch (IF and M99 Pnnnn)
Conditional branching allows the program to transfer control to another section of code within the same subroutine.
Conditional branching can only be used when macros are enabled. The Haas control allows two similar methods for
accomplishing conditional branching.
IF [<conditional expression>] GOTOn

92 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

As discussed, <conditional expression> is any expression that uses any of the six Boolean operators EQ, NE, GT,
LT, GE, or LE. The brackets surrounding the expression are mandatory. In the Haas control, it is not necessary to
include these operators. For example:
IF [#1 NE 0.0] GOTO5;
could also be:
IF [#1] GOTO5;
In this statement, if the variable #1 contains anything but 0.0, or the undefined value #0, then branching to block 5
will occur; otherwise, the next block will be executed.
In the Haas control, a conditional expression can also be used with the M99 Pnnnn format. For example:
G0 X0 Y0 [#1EQ#2] M99 P5;
Here, the conditional is for the M99 portion of the statement only. The machine tool is instructed to X0, Y0 whether
or not the expression evaluates to True or False. Only the branch, M99, is executed based on the value of the
expression. It is recommended that the IF GOTO version is used if portability is desired.
Conditional Execution (IF THEN)
Execution of control statements can also be achieved by using the IF THEN construct. The format is:
IF [<conditional expression>] THEN <statement>;
NOTE: To preserve compatibility with FANUC syntax “THEN” may not be used with GOTOn.
This format is traditionally used for conditional assignment statements such as:
IF [#590 GT 100] THEN #590=0.0 ;
Variable #590 is set to zero when the value of #590 exceeds 100.0. In the Haas control, if a conditional evaluates to
FALSE (0.0), then the remainder of the IF block is ignored. This means that control statements can also be condi-
tioned so that we could write something like:
IF [#1 NE #0] THEN G1 X#24 Y#26 F#9 ;
This executes a linear motion only if variable #1 has been assigned a value. Another example is:
IF [#1 GE 180] THEN #101=0.0 M99 ;
This says that if variable #1 (address A) is greater than or equal to 180, then set variable #101 to zero and return
from the subroutine.
Here is an example of an IF statement that branches if a variable has been initialized to contain any value. Other-
wise, processing will continue and an alarm will be generated. Remember, when an alarm is generated, program
execution is halted.
N1 IF [#9NE#0] GOTO3 (TEST FOR VALUE IN F) ;
N2 #3000=11(NO FEED RATE) ;
N3 (CONTINUE) ;
Iteration/Looping (WHILE DO END)
Essential to all programming languages is the ability to execute a sequence of statements a given number of times
or to loop through a sequence of statements until a condition is met. Traditional G coding allows this with the use of
the L address. A subroutine can be executed any number of times by using the L address.
M98 P2000 L5;
This is limited since you cannot terminate execution of the subroutine on condition. Macros allow flexibility with the
WHILE-DO-END construct. For example:

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 93

WHILE [<conditional expression>] DOn;
<statements>;
ENDn;
This executes the statements between DOn and ENDn as long as the conditional expression evaluates to True. The
brackets in the expression are necessary. If the expression evaluates to False, then the block after ENDn is ex-
ecuted next. WHILE can be abbreviated to WH. The DOn-ENDn portion of the statement is a matched pair. The
value of n is 1-3. This means that there can be no more than three nested loops per subroutine. A good example of
how nesting of WHILE loops can be used is in defining a matrix.
#101= 3;
#102= 4;
G0 X#101 Y4. ;
F2.5;
WH [#101 GT 0] DO1;
#102= 4;
WH [#102 GT 0] DO2;
G81 X#101 Y#102 Z-0.5;
#102= #102 - 1;
END2;
#101= #101 - 1;
END1;
;
M30;
This program drills a 3 x 4 matrix hole pattern.
Although nesting of WHILE statements can only be up to three levels, there really is no limit since each subroutine
can have up to three levels of nesting. If there is a need to nest to a level greater than 3, then the segment containing
the three lowest levels of nesting can be made into a subroutine thus overcoming the limitation.
If two separate WHILE loops are in a subroutine, they can use the same nesting index. For example:
#3001=0 (WAIT 500 MILLISECONDS);
WH [#3001 LT 500] DO1;
END1;
<Other statements>
#3001=0 (WAIT 300 MILLISECONDS) ;
WH [#3001 LT 300] DO1 ;
END1 ;
You can use GOTO to jump out of a region encompassed by a DO-END, but you cannot use a GOTO to jump into it.
Jumping around inside a DO-END region using a GOTO is allowed.
An infinite loop can be executed by eliminating the WHILE and expression. Thus,
DO1;
<statements>
END1;
Executes until the RESET key is pressed.

94 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

CAUTION! The following code can be confusing: WH [#1] D01;
END1;
In the this example, an alarm results indicating no “Then” was found; “Then” refers to the D01. Change D01 (zero) to
DO1 (letter O).

G65 M ACRO S UBROUTINE C ALL

G65 is the command that calls a subroutine with the ability to pass arguments to it. The format follows.
G65 Pnnnn [Lnnnn] [arguments];
Anything italicized in square brackets is optional. The G65 command requires a P address corresponding to a
program number currently in the control’s memory. When the L address is used the macro call is repeated the
specified number of times.
In Example 1, subroutine 1000 is called once without conditions passed to the subroutine. G65 calls are similar to,
but not the same as, M98 calls. G65 calls can be nested up to 4 times, which means, program 1can call program 2,
program 2a nd call program 3 and program 3 can call program 4.
Example 1: G65 P1000; (Call subroutine 1000 as a macro)
M30; (Program stop)
O1000; (Macro Subroutine)
...
M99; (Return from Macro Subroutine)
In Example 2, subroutine 9010 is designed to drill a sequence of holes along a line whose slope is determined by
the X and Y arguments that are passed to it in the G65 command line. The Z drill depth is passed as Z, the feed rate
is passed as F, and the number of holes to be drilled is passed as T. The line of holes is drilled starting from the
current tool position when the macro subroutine is called.
Example 2: G00 G90 X1.0 Y1.0 Z.05 S1000 M03; (Position tool)
G65 P9010 X.5 Y.25 Z.05 F10. T10; (Call 9010)
G28;
M30;
O9010; (Diagonal hole pattern)
F#9; (F=Feed rate)
WHILE [#20 GT 0] DO1; (Repeat T times)
G91 G81 Z#26; (Drill To Z depth)
#20=#20-1; (Decrement counter)
IF [#20 EQ 0] GOTO5; (All holes drilled)
G00 X#24 Y#25; (Move along slope)
N5 END1;
M99; (Return to caller)
Aliasing
Aliasing is a means of assigning a G-code or M-code to a G65 P##### sequence. For instance, in Example 2 it
would be easier to write:
G06 X.5 Y.25 Z.05 F10. T10;

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 95

When aliasing, if you alias to a G-code you may pass variables with it. If you alias to an M-code, you may NOT pass
variables with it.
Here, an unused G code has been substituted, G06 for G65 P9010. In order for the previous block to work the
parameter associated with subroutine 9010 must be set to 06 (Parameter 91). Note that G00, G65, G66, and G67
cannot be aliased. All other codes between 1 and 255 can be used for aliasing.
Program numbers 9010 through 9019 are reserved for G code aliasing. The following table lists which HAAS param-
eters are reserved for macro subroutine aliasing.

Haas Parameter O Code Haas Parameter M Macro Call

91 9010 81 9000
92 9011 82 9001
93 9012 83 9002
94 9013 84 9003
95 9014 85 9004
96 9015 86 9005
97 9016 87 9006
98 9017 88 9007
99 9018 89 9008
100 9019 90 9009

G-Code Aliasing M-Code Aliasing

Setting an aliasing parameter to 0 disables aliasing for the associated subroutine. If an aliasing parameter is set to a
G-code and the associated subroutine is not in memory, then an alarm will be given.

COMMUNICATION WITH EXTERNAL DEVICES - DPRNT[ ]

Macros allow additional capabilities to communicate with peripheral devices. One can do digitizing of parts, provide
runtime inspection reports, or synchronize controls with user provided devices. The commands provided for this are
POPEN, DPRNT[ ] and PCLOS.
Communication preparatory commands
POPEN and PCLOS are not required on the Haas mill. It has been included so that programs from different controls
can be sent to the Haas control.
Formatted output
The DPRNT statement allows the programmer to send formatted text to the serial port. Any text and any variable can
be printed to the serial port. The form of the DPRNT statement is as follows:
DPRNT [<text> <#nnnn[wf]>... ] ;
DPRNT must be the only command in the block. In the previous example, <text> is any character from A to Z or the
letters (+,-,/,*, and the space). When an asterisk is output, it is converted to a space. The <#nnnn[wf]> is a variable
followed by a format. The variable number can be any macro variable. The format [wf] is required and consists of two
digits within square brackets. Remember that macro variables are real numbers with a whole part and a fractional
part. The first digit in the format designates the total places reserved in the output for the whole part. The second
digit designates the total places reserved for the fractional part. The total places reserved for output cannot be equal
to zero or greater that eight. Thus the following formats are illegal:
[00] [54] [45] [36] /* not legal formats */

96 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

A decimal point is printed out between the whole part and the fractional part. The fractional part is rounded to the
least significant place. When zero places are reserved for the fractional part, then no decimal point is printed out.
Trailing zeros are printed if there is a fractional part. At least one place is reserved for the whole part, even when a
zero is used. If the value of the whole part has fewer digits than have been reserved, then leading spaces are output.
If the value of the whole part has more digits than has been reserved, then the field is expanded so that these
numbers are printed.
A carriage return is sent out after every DPRNT block.
DPRNT[ ] Examples
Code Output
N1 #1= 1.5436 ;
N2 DPRNT[X#1[44]*Z#1[03]*T#1[40]] ; X1.5436 Z 1.544 T 1
N3 DPRNT[***MEASURED*INSIDE*DIAMETER***] ; MEASURED INSIDE DIAMETER
N4 DPRNT[] ; (no text, only a carriage return)
N5 #1=123.456789 ;
N6 DPRNT[X-#1[25]] ; X-123.45679 ;
Execution
DPRNT statements are executed at block interpretation time. This means that the programmer must be careful
about where the DPRNT statements appear in the program, particularly if the intent is to print out.
G103 is useful for limiting lookahead. If you wanted to limit lookahead interpretation to one block, you would include
the following command at the beginning of your program: (This actually results in a two block lookahead.)
G103 P1;
To cancel the lookahead limit, change the command to G103 P0. G103 cannot be used when cutter compensation
is active.
Editing
Improperly structured or improperly placed macro statements will generate an alarm. Be careful when editing
expressions; brackets must be balanced.
The DPRNT[ ] function can be edited much like a comment. It can be deleted, moved as a whole item, or individual
items within the bracket can be edited. Variable references and format expressions must be altered as a whole
entity. If you wanted to change [24] to [44], place the cursor so that [24] is highlighted, enter [44] and press the write
key. Remember, you can use the jog handle to maneuver through long DPRNT[ ] expressions.
Addresses with expressions can be somewhat confusing. In this case, the alphabetic address stands alone. For
instance, the following block contains an address expression in X:
G1 G90 X [COS [90]] Y3.0; CORRECT
Here, the X and brackets stand-alone and are individually editable items. It is possible, through editing, to delete the
entire expression and replace it with a floating-point constant.
G1 G90 X 0 Y3.0 ; WRONG
The above block will result in an alarm at runtime. The correct form looks as follows:
G1 G90 X0 Y3.0; CORRECT
Note that there is no space between the X and the Zero (0). REMEMBER when you see an alpha character standing
alone it is an address expression.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Macros 97

 FANUC-STYLE MCRO FEATURES NOT I NCLUDED I N HAAS CNC CONTROL

This section lists the FANUC macro features that are not available on the Haas control.
M Aliasing Replace G65 Pnnnn with Mnn PROGS 9020-9029.
G66 Modal call in every motion block
G66.1 Modal call in every motion block
G67 Modal cancel
M98 Alaising, T code PROG 9000, VAR #149, enable bit
M98 Aliasing, S Code PROG 9029, VAR #147, enable bit
M98 Aliasing, B Code PROG 9028, VAR #146, enable bit
SKIP/N N=1..9
#3007 Mirror image on flag each axis
#4201-#4320 Current block modal data
#5101-#5106 Current servo deviation
Names for Variables for Display Purposes
ATAN [ ]/[ ] Arctangent, FANUC version
BIN [ ] Conversion from BCD TO BIN
BCD [ ] Conversion from BIN TO BCD
FUP [ ] Truncate fraction ceiling
LN [ ] Natural logarithm
EXP [ ] Bade E Exponentiation
ADP [ ] Re-Scale variable to whole number
BPRNT [ ]
The following can be used as alternative methods for achieving the same results for a few of the unavailable FANUC
macro features.
GOTO-nnnn
Searching for a block to jump in the negative direction, i.e. backwards through a program, is not necessary if you
use unique N address codes.
A block search is made starting from the current block being interpreted. When the end of the program is reached,
searching continues from the top of the program until the current block is encountered.

98 Macros 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 4TH AND 5TH AXIS PROGRAMMING

B-AXIS A-AXIS

B-Axis 360º

A-Axis ±120º
+32° -32° -32° +32°
FRONT SIDE

Axis motion on the VR-11 Mill and the Haas TRT 210

C REATING F IVE -AXIS PROGRAMS

Most five-axis programs are rather complex and should be written using a CAD/CAM package. It is necessary to
determine the pivot length and gauge length of the machine, and input them into these programs.
Each machine has a specific pivot length. This is the distance from the spindle head’s center of rotation to the
bottom surface of the master tool holder. The pivot length can be found in Setting 116, and is also engraved into the
master tool holder that is shipped with a 5-axes machine.

Axis of
Rotation

Pivot Length
Total
Gauge Length

When setting up a program, it will be necessary to determine the gauge length for each tool. The gauge length is
the distance from the bottom flange of the master tool holder to the tip of the tool. This distance can be calculated
by setting a magnetic base indicator on the table, indicating the bottom surface of the master tool holder, and
setting this point as Z0 in the control. Then, insert each tool, and calculate the distance from the tool tip to the Z0;
this is the gauge length.
The total length is the distance from the spindle head center of rotation to the tip of the tool. It can be calculated by
adding the gauge length and pivot length. This number is entered into the CAD/CAM program, which will use the
value for its calculations.

Offsets
The work-offset display is found on the offset display by pushing the Page Up button. You can display and manually
enter work offsets from here. The G54 through G59 or G110 through G129 offsets can be set by using the Part Zero
Set button. Position the axes to the work zero point of your part. Using the cursor, select the proper axis and work
number. Press the Part Zero Set button and the current machine position will be automatically stored in that
address. This will work with only the work zero offsets display selected. Note that entering a nonzero Z work offset
will interfere with the operation of an automatically entered tool length offset.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 4&5 Axis Programming 99

Work coordinate numbers are usually entered as positive numbers.
Work coordinates are entered into the table as a number only. To enter an X value of X2.00 into G54, cursor to the X
column and enter 2.0.
Five-axis Programming Notes
Use a tight synchronization cut across resolution of geometry in the CAD/CAM system will allow smooth flowing
contours and a more accurate part.
Positioning the machine to an approach vector should only be done at a safe distance above or to the side of the
workpiece. When in the rapid mode, the axes will arrive at the programmed position at different times; the axis with
shortest distance from target will arrive first, and longest distance last. A high feed rate will force the axes to arrive
at the commanded position at the same time avoiding the possibility of a crash.
G Codes
Fifth-axis programming is not affected by the selection of inch (G20) or metric (G21); the A and B axes are always
programmed in degrees.
G93 inverse time must be in effect for simultaneous 5-axis motion. In G93 mode, the maximum feed rate will
include the combination of all axis motion in one block of code. The limit is set by the control and looks at encoder
steps programmed for all axes in a block of code.
Limit your post processor (CAD/CAM software) if possible; the maximum speed in G93 mode is 32 degrees per
minute. This will result in smoother motion, which may be necessary when fanning around tilted walls.
M Codes
Important! It is highly recommended that the A/B brakes be engaged when doing any non 5-axis
motion. Cutting with the brakes off can cause excessive wear in the gear sets.
M10/M11 engages/disengages the A-axis brake
M12/M13 engages/disengages the B-axis brake
When in a 4 or 5 axis cut, the machine will pause between blocks. This pause is due to the A and/or B axis brakes
releasing. To avoid this dwell and allow for smoother program execution, program an M11 and/or M13 just before the
G93. The M-codes will disengage the brakes, resulting in a smother motion and an uninterrupted flow of motion.
Remember that if the brakes are never re-engaged, they will remain off indefinitely.
Settings
Setting 85 should be set to .0500 for 5-axis cutting. Settings lower than .0500 will move the machine closer to an
exact stop and cause uneven motion.
G187 can also be used in the program to slow the axes down.
CAUTION! When cutting in 5-axis mode poor positioning and over-travel can occur if the tool length offset (H-code)
is not canceled. To avoid this problem use G90 G40, H00 and G49 in your first blocks after a tool change. This
problem can occur when mixing 3-axis and 5-axis programming; restarting a program or when starting a new job
and the tool length offset is still in effect.
Feed Rates
A feed-rate must be commanded for each line of 4 and/or 5 axis code. Limit the feed-rate to less than 75IPM when
drilling. The recommended feeds for finish machining in 3-axis work should not exceed 50 to 60 IPM with at least
.0500" to .0750" stock remaining for the finish operation.
Rapid moves are not allowed; rapid motions, entering and exiting holes (full retract peck-drill cycle) are not sup-
ported.
When programming simultaneous 5-axis motion, less material allowance is required and higher feedrates may be
permitted. Depending on finish allowance, length of cutter and type of profile being cut, higher feed rates may be
possible. For example, when cutting mold lines or long flowing contours, feedrates may exceed 100 IPM.

100 4&5 Axis Programming 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Jogging the 4th and 5th Axis
All aspects of handle jogging for the fifth axis work as they do for the other axes. The exception is the method of
selecting jog between axis A and axis B.
By default the ‘+A’ and ‘-A’ keys, when pressed, will select the A axis for jogging. The B axis can be selected for
jogging by pressing the Shift button, and then pressing either the ‘+A’ or ‘-A’ key.
Settings
A number of settings are used to program the 4th and 5th axis. See settings 30, 34 and 48 for the 4th axis and 78,
79 and 80 for the 5th axis.
Crash Recovery Procedure
If the machine crashes while cutting a five-axis part, it can often be difficult to clear the tool away from the part due
to the angles involved. Do Not immediately press the Tool Changer Restore key or turn the power off. To recover
from a crash in which the spindle is stopped while the tool is still in a cut, retract the spindle using the Vector Jog
feature. To do this press the letter “V” on the keypad, press “Handle Jog”, and use the jog handle to move along
that axis. This feature will allow motion along any axes determined by A and/or B axis.
The Vector Jog feature is intended to allow the operator to clear the cutting tool from the part in an extreme situa-
tion as a result of a crash or an alarm condition.
G28 is not available in the vector jog mode; it is only available for the X, Y, Z A and B when selecting single axis.
If there was a loss of power during a cut vector jog will not work as the control requires a reference position. Other
means of clearing the tool from the part will be necessary.
If the tool is not in a cut when it is crashed, press the Tool Changer Restore button and answer the questions that
appear on the screen. When Tool Changer Restore is pressed, the spindle head will move the A, B and Z-axes
simultaneously, in order to retract the tool. If the tool is in a cut at an angle, it will crash when this key is pressed.

I NSTALLING AN O PTIONAL F OURTH A XIS

When adding a rotary table to the Haas mill change settings 30 and 34 to the specific rotary table and part diam-
eter currently used. Warning: Failure to match the correct brush or brushless rotary setting to the actual product
being installed on the mill may cause motor damage. “B” in the settings denotes a brushless rotary product.
Brushless indexers have two cables from table and two connectors at the mill control.
Parameters
In rare cases you may be required to modify some parameters to get a specific performance out of your indexer. Do
not do this without a list of parameters to change. (If you did not get a list of special parameters with your indexer,
then you do not need to change the default parameters—DO NOT CHANGE THEM. This will void your warranty.)
To change parameters for a forth or fifth axis indexer, proceed as follows: Press the E-stop switch and leave it in.
You must then turn off the parameter lock (Setting 7). Go to the settings page by pressing the Setting button. Enter
“7” and press the down arrow; this will jump to setting 7. With the cursor on Setting 7, use the right or left arrow
button to select “Off” and press the Write button. The parameter lock is now off. Go to the parameter page and
enter the parameter number of the parameter to change and press the down arrow button. Enter the new value for
the new parameter and press the Write button. If necessary change the other parameters. Return to the Setting 7
and turn this setting back on. Reset the E-stop button. Home the indexer and verify that it operates properly by
pressing Handle Jog and the “A” button. Jog the A axis using the jog handle, the indexer should move. Check for
proper ratio by marking the table, rotate 360 degrees as viewed in the position page and check mark to be in the
same location. If it is close (within 10 degrees) then the ratio is correct.
Initial Start-up
Turn on the mill (and servo control, if applicable) and home the indexer. All Haas indexers home in the clockwise
direction as viewed from the front. If the indexer homes counter-clockwise, press E-stop and call the Haas service
department.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 4&5 Axis Programming 101

 I NSTALLING AN O PTIONAL F IFTH A XIS
The fifth axis is installed in the same manner as the forth axis. Settings 78 and 79 govern the 5th axis, and the axis
is jogged and commanded using the B address.

A UXILIARY A XIS
Besides the five directly controlled axes in this control, up to four additional external positioning axes may be
added. These axes may be commanded directly from the program using the C, U, V, and W axis codes. Com-
mands to these axes are only allowed in a G00 or G01 block. Connection of these axes is done through the
second RS-232 port to one or more HAAS single axis controls. In the Setting page, Setting 38 is used to select the
number of auxiliary axes. The machine position display will show the present position of these axes.
Only one auxiliary axis is moved at a time. If a feed (G01) is programmed, the feed rate programmed in the CNC is
sent to the auxiliary control. A G00 motion of an auxiliary axis will move at its maximum feed rate. When the CNC
control is waiting for an auxiliary axis motion to complete, the bottom of the screen will display “C FIN”. A failure in
RS-232 communication with the auxiliary axes may cause this display to pause indefinitely. The Reset button will
terminate any “hung-up” auxiliary axis communication.
Emergency Stop or turning on Single Block are the only way to stop an auxiliary axis; Feed Hold or Reset will not
stop the axis.
If you add one auxiliary axis, Setting 38, then the auxiliary axis will be designated C. If you add two auxiliary axes
they will be designated C and U; etc.
Parameters
When interfacing to an auxiliary axis the Haas single axis servo control must have Parameter 21 set according to
the following table.
Name in CNC: Parameter 21: Axis select:
C 6 Z
U 1 U
V 2 V
W 3 W
Multiple auxiliary axes must be daisy chained through the second RS-232 port as described in the auxiliary axis
operator’s manual.
Auxiliary axes can be jogged from the CNC front panel using the jog handle.
There are no work offsets for these axes so all commands are in the machine coordinate system. But if a displaced
zero position has been entered into the HAAS servo control, that position will be used as zero. On power-up of the
CNC, the auxiliary axes control will also be initialized and zero will be shifted by the value set in the single axis
control. To set a displaced zero, you must jog the single axis control to a new zero position and then press and
hold the Clear button on the single axis control.
Auxiliary axes communication is always seven data bits, even parity, two stop bits. The data rate is CNC Setting
54 and should be set to 4800. CNC Setting 50 must be set to XON/XOFF. Parameter 26 in the single axis control
must be set to 5 for 4800 bit per second and Parameter 33 must be set to 1 for XON/XOFF. Parameter 12 in the
single axis control should always be set to 3 or 4 to prevent circular wraparound. The cable connecting the CNC to
the single-axis control must be a DB-25 cable (male lead on both ends) and must wire at least pins 1, 2, 3, and 7
directly from the second (lower) serial port of the Haas CNC to the upper connector of the Haas servo control.

D ISABLEING THE AXES

If you have a fourth-axis rotary table or 5C indexer, or a fifth axis, it should be disabled from the Settings display
when it is removed from the machine. Do not connect or disconnect any cables with the control on. If you do not
disable the rotary axis setting when it is disconnected, you will get an alarm.

102 4&5 Axis Programming 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 G CODES (PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS)
G codes are used to command specific actions for the machine, for example simple machine moves or drilling
functions They will also command more complex features from bolt hole circles to non-vertical machining.
G-codes are divided into groups. Each group of codes is commands for a specific subject. For example, Group 1
G-codes command point-to point moves of the machine axes, Group 7 are specific to the Cutter Compensation
feature.
Each group has a dominant G-code; referred to as the default G-code. A default G-code means they are the one in
each group the machine uses unless another G-code from the group is specified. For example programming an X,
Y, Z move like this, X-2. Y-3. Z-4. will position the machine using G00. (Note that proper programming technique is
to preface all moves with a G-code).
The default G-codes for each group are shown on the Current Commands screen in the upper right corner. If another
G code from the group is commanded (active) then that G-code will be displayed on the Current Commands
screen.
G-codes commands can be modal or non-modal. A modal G-code means that once commanded the G-code will
stay in affect until the end of the program or until another G-code from the same group is commanded. A non-
modal G-code is only affects the line it is in; the program line after will not be affected by the previous lines non-
modal G-code.
Programming notes
The Group 00 codes are non-modal; the other groups are modal.
Group 01 G codes will cancel the Group 09 (canned cycles) codes, for example, if a canned cycle (G73 through
G89) is active, the use of G00 or G01 will cancel the canned cycle.
Canned Cycles
A canned cycle is used to simplify programming of a part, for example common Z-axis repetitive operations, such
as drilling, tapping, and boring. See the specific canned cycles G-code for more information and programming
example.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 103

G-CODE TABLE OF CONTENTS

G00 Rapid Motion Positioning (Group 01) .......................................................................................106

G01 Linear Interpolation Motion (Group 01) .................................................................................... 106
G02 CW / G03 CCW Circular Interpolation Motion (Group 01) ...................................................... 107
G04 Dwell (Group 00) ......................................................................................................................... 111
G09 Exact Stop (Group 00) ................................................................................................................ 111
G10 Set Offsets (Group 00) ............................................................................................................... 111
G12 Circular Pocket Milling CW / G13 Circular Pocket Milling CCW (Group 00) ......................... 112
G17 XY / G18 XZ / G19 YZ plane selection (Group 02) .................................................................... 114
G20 Select Inches / G21 Select Metric (Group 06) ......................................................................... 114
G28 Return to Machine Zero Thru Optional G29 Reference Point (Group 00) ........................... 114
G29 Return From Reference Point (Group 00) ............................................................................... 115
G31 Feed Until Skip (Group 00) ........................................................................................................ 115
G35 Automatic Tool Diameter Measurement (Group 00) ............................................................... 116
G36 Automatic Work Offset Measurement (Group 00) .................................................................... 117
G37 Automatic Tool Offset Measurement (Group 00) .................................................................... 118
G40 Cutter Comp Cancel (Group 07) ................................................................................................ 118
G41 2D Cutter Compensation Left / G42 2D Cutter Comp. Right (Group 07) .............................. 118
G43 Tool Length Compensation + (Add) / G44 Tool Length Comp - (Subtract) (Group 08) ....... 118
G47 Text Engraving (Group 00) ........................................................................................................ 119
G49 G43/G44/G143 Cancel (Group 08) .............................................................................................121
G50 Cancel Scaling (Group 11) ......................................................................................................... 121
G51 Scaling (Group 11) ......................................................................................................................121
G52 Set Work Coordinate System YASNAC (Group 00 or 12) ........................................................122
G53 Non-Modal Machine Coordinate Selection (Group 00) ..........................................................123
G54-59 Select Work Coordinate System #1 - #6 (Group 12) ...........................................................123
G60 Uni-Directional Positioning (Group 00) .................................................................................... 123
G61 Exact Stop Mode (Group 15) .....................................................................................................123
G64 G61 Cancel (Group 15) ...............................................................................................................123
G68 Rotation (Group 16) ....................................................................................................................123
G69 Cancel G68 Rotation (Group 16) ............................................................................................... 125
G70 Bolt Hole Circle (Group 00) .......................................................................................................125
G71 Bolt Hole Arc (Group 00) ............................................................................................................ 125
G72 Bolt Holes Along an Angle (Group 00) ......................................................................................126
G73 High-Speed Peck Drilling Canned Cycle (Group 09) ..............................................................130
G74 Reverse Tap Canned Cycle (Group 09) ...................................................................................131
G76 Fine Boring Canned Cycle (Group 09) ..................................................................................... 131
G77 Back Bore Canned Cycle (Group 09) ........................................................................................ 132
G80 Canned Cycle Cancel (Group 09) ..............................................................................................132
G81 Drill Canned Cycle (Group 09) ...................................................................................................133
G82 Spot Drill Canned Cycle (Group 09) ..........................................................................................133
G83 Normal Peck Drilling Canned Cycle (Group 09) ......................................................................134
G84 Tapping Canned Cycle (Group 09) ............................................................................................ 136
G85 Boring Canned Cycle (Group 09) ..............................................................................................137
G86 Bore and Stop Canned Cycle (Group 09) ................................................................................. 137
G87 Bore In and Manual Retract Canned Cycle (Group 09) ..........................................................137
G88 Bore In, Dwell, Manual Retract Canned Cycle (Group 09) .....................................................138

104 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 G89 Bore In, Dwell, Bore Out Canned Cycle (Group 09) ...............................................................138
G90 Absolute Position Commands (Group 03) ................................................................................139
G91 Incremental Position Commands (Group 03) ........................................................................... 139
G92 Set Work Coordinate Systems Shift Value (Group 00) ............................................................ 139
G93 Inverse Time Feed Mode (Group 05) .......................................................................................140
G94 Feed Per Minute Mode (Group 05) ........................................................................................... 140
G95 Feed per Revolution (Group 05) ............................................................................................... 140
G98 Canned Cycle Initial Point Return (Group 10) .........................................................................140
G99 Canned Cycle R Plane Return (Group 10) ...............................................................................140
G100 Cancel Mirror Image (Group 00) ..............................................................................................140
G101 Enable Mirror Image (Group 00) ..............................................................................................140
G102 Programmable Output to RS-232 (Group 00) .........................................................................142
G103 Limit Block Buffering (Group 00) ............................................................................................ 143
G107 Cylindrical Mapping (Group 00) ............................................................................................... 143
G110-G129 Coordinate System #7-26 (Group 12) ............................................................................144
G136 Automatic Work Offset Center Measurement (Group 00) .....................................................145
G141 3D+ Cutter Compensation (Group 07) .................................................................................... 146
G143 5-Axis Tool Length Compensation + (Group 08) ................................................................... 147
G150 General Purpose Pocket Milling (Group 00) .......................................................................... 148
G153 5-Axis High Speed Peck Drilling Canned Cycle (Group 09) .................................................151
G154 Select Work Coordinates P1-P99 (Group 12) .........................................................................152
G155 5-Axis Reverse Tap Canned Cycle (Group 09) ......................................................................153
G161 5-Axis Drill Canned Cycle (Group 09) ..................................................................................... 154
G162 5-Axis Spot Drill Canned Cycle (Group 09) ............................................................................154
G163 5-Axis Normal Peck Drilling Canned Cycle (Group 09) ......................................................... 155
G164 5-Axis Tapping Canned Cycle (Group 09) .............................................................................. 156
G165 5-Axis Boring Canned Cycle (Group 09) ................................................................................. 157
G166 5-Axis Bore and Stop Canned Cycle (Group 09) ................................................................... 157
G169 5-Axis Bore and Dwell Canned Cycle (Group 09) ..................................................................158
G174 CCW Non-Vertical Rigid Tap (Group 00) ................................................................................. 158
G184 CW Non-Vertical Rigid Tap (Group 00) ...................................................................................158
G187 Accuracy Control (Group 00) ....................................................................................................158
G188 Get Program From PST (Group 00) .........................................................................................158

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 105

G00 Rapid Motion Positioning (Group 01)
X Optional X-axis motion command
Y Optional Y-axis motion command
Z Optional Z-axis motion command
A Optional A-axis motion command
This G code is used to move the machines axis at the maximum speed. It is primarily used to quickly position the
machine to a given point before each feed (cutting) command (All moves are done at full rapid speed). This G code
is modal, so a block with G00 causes all following blocks to be rapid motion until another Group 01 code is speci-
fied.
Programming note: Generally, rapid motion will not be in a straight line. Each axis specified is moved at the same
speed, but all axes will not necessarily complete their motions at the same time. The machine will wait until all
motions are complete before starting the next command.
Incremental or absolute position commands (G90 or G91) will change how those axis motion values are interpreted.
Setting 57 (Exact Stop Canned X-Y) can change how closely the machine waits for a precise stop before and after
a rapid move.
G01 Linear Interpolation Motion (Group 01)
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
X Optional X-axis motion command
Y Optional Y-axis motion command
Z Optional Z-axis motion command
A Optional A-axis motion command
,R Radius of the circle
,C Distance from center of intersection where the chamfer begins
This G code moves the axes at a commanded feed rate. It is primarily used to cut the workpiece. A G01 feed can
be a single axis move or a combination of the axes. The rate of axes movement is controlled by feedrate (F) value.
This F value can be in units (inch or metric) per minute (G94) or per spindle revolution (95), or time to complete the
motion (G93). The feedrate value (F) can be on the current program line, or a previous line (the control will always
use to most recent F value until another F value is commanded.
G01 is a modal command, which means that it will stay in affect until canceled by a rapid command such as G00
or a circular motion command like G02 or G03.
Once a G01 is started all programmed axes will move and reach the destination at the same time. If an axis is not
capable of the programmed feedrate the control will not proceed with the G01 command and an alarm (max
feedrate exceeded) will be generated.
Corner Rounding and Chamfering Example

O1234 (Corner Rounding and Chamfering Example); X0. Y0.

T1 M6;
G00 G90 G54 X0. Y0. S3000 M3;
G43 H01 Z0.1 M08;
G01 Z-0.5 F32.; 4.0 4.0
X0. Y-5. ,C1.; 5.0
X-5. Y-5. ,R1.;
X-5. Y0.; R1.0
G0 Z0.1 M09;
G53 Z0.;
G53 Y0.; 1.0
M30; 4.0
5.0

106 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 A chamfer block or a corner-rounding block can be automatically inserted between two linear interpolation blocks
by specifying ,C (chamfering) or ,R (corner rounding). There must be a terminating linear interpolation block follow-
ing the beginning block (a G04 pause may intervene). These two linear interpolation blocks specify a corner of
intersection. If the beginning block specifies a C, the value following the C is the distance from the intersection to
where the chamfer begins, and also the distance from the intersection to where the chamfer ends. If the beginning
block specifies an R, the value following the R is the radius of a circle tangent to the corner at two points: the
beginning of the corner-rounding arc and the endpoint of that arc. There can be consecutive blocks with chamfering
or corner rounding specified. There must be movement on the two axes specified by the selected plane, whether
the active plane is XY (G17), XZ (G18) or YZ (G19).
G02 CW / G03 CCW Circular Interpolation Motion (Group 01)
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
I Optional distance along X axis to center of circle
J Optional distance along Y axis to center of circle
K Optional distance along Z axis to center of circle
R Optional radius of circle
X Optional X-axis motion command
Y Optional Y-axis motion command
Z Optional Z-axis motion command
A Optional A-axis motion command
These G codes are used to specify circular motion. Two axes are necessary to complete circular motion and the
correct plane, G17-19, must be used. There are two methods of commanding a G02 or G03, the first is using the I,
J, K addresses and the second is using the R address.
Using I, J, K addresses
I, J and K address are used to locate the arc center in relation to the start point. In other words, the I, J, K ad-
dresses are the distances from the starting point to the center of the circle. Only the I, J or K specific to the
selected plane are allowed (G17 uses IJ, G18 uses IK and G19 uses JK). The X, Y, and Z commands specify the
end point of the arc. If the X, Y, or Z location for the selected plane is not specified, the endpoint of the arc is the
same as the starting point for that axis.
To cut a full circle the I, J, K addresses must be used; using an R address will not work. To cut a full circle, do not
specify an ending point (X, Y and Z); program I, J or K to define the center of the circle. For example: G02 I3.0 J4.0
(Assumes G17; XY plane)
Using the R address
The R-value defines the distance from the starting point to the center of the circle. Use a positive R-value for radii of
180° or less, and a negative R-value for radii more than 180°.
Programming Examples

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 107

 O
135 O
225

R 1.00

R 1.00

1.5 1.5

.5Ø .5Ø
G90 G54 G00 X-0.25 Y-.25 G90 G54 G00 X-0.25 Y-0.25
G01 Y1.5 F12. G01 Y1.5 F12.
G02 X1.884 Y2.384 R1.25 G02 X1.884 Y0.616 R-1.25
G02 Less than 180° G02 More than 180°
Thread Milling
Thread milling uses a standard G02 or G03 move to create the circular move in X-Y and then adds a Z move on the
same block to create the thread pitch. This will generate one turn of the thread; the multiple teeth of the cutter will
generate the rest. A typical line of code follows:
N100 G02 I-1.0 Z-.05 F5. (generates a 1-inch radius for 20-pitch thread)
Thread Milling notes: Internal holes smaller than 3/8 inch may not be possible or practical. Always climb cut the
cutter.
Use a G03 to cut I.D. threads or a G02 to cut O.D. threads. An I.D. right hand thread will move up in the Z-axis by
the amount of one thread pitch. An O.D. right hand thread will move down in the Z-axis by the amount of one
thread pitch. PITCH = 1/Threads per inch (Example - 1.0 divided by 8 TPI = .125)
Thread Milling Example:
This program will I.D. thread mill a 1.5 x 8 TPI hole using a .750 diameter x 1.0 thread hob.
To start, take the hole diameter (1.500). Subtract the cutter diameter .750 and then divide by 2.
(1.500 - .75) / 2 = .375
The result (.375) is the distance the cutter starts from the I.D. of the part.
After the initial positioning, the next step of the program is to turn on cutter compensation and move to the I.D. of
the circle.
The next step is to program a complete circle (G02 or G03) with a Z-axis command of the amount of one full pitch
of the thread (this is called "helical interpolation")
The last step is to move away from the I.D. of the circle and turn off cutter compensation
Cutter compensation cannot be turned off or on during an arc movement. A linear move must be made, either in the
X or Y axis to move the tool to and from the diameter to cut. This move will be the maximum compensation amount
that can be adjusted.

108 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 I.D. Thread Milling Exercise

Move to
I.D.

N1 N2
N5 N4 N3
Move away Thread Milling 1.5 dia. x 8 TPI
from I.D.
Tool Path
Turn On and Off
Cutter Compensation

Thread Milling Example

Program Example Description
%
O2300 (Thread milling 1.5 diameter x 8 TPI)
(X0, Y0 is at the center of the hole)
(Z0 is at the top of the part - Using .5 thick material
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 S400 M03
G43 H01 Z.1 M08
Z-.6
N1 G01 G41 D01 X.175 F25. (Turn on Cutter Comp)
N2 G03 X.375 R.100 F7. (Move to I.D. of bored hole)
N3 G03 I-.375 Z-.475 (One full revolution with Z moving up .125)
N4 G03 X.175 R.100 (Move away from the new threads)
N5 G01 G40 X0 Y0 (Cancel Cutter Comp)
G00 Z1.0 M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%

NOTE: Maximum cutter compensation adjustability is .175.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 109

O.D. Thread Milling
O.D. Thread Milling Exercise
Start Position

.250 Cutter

XO, YO
Thread Milling
2.0 dia. Material 2.0 dia. post x 16 TPI
Tool Path:
Rapid Positioning,
Turn ON and OFF
Cutter Compensation

O.D. Thread Milling Example

Program Example Description

%
O2400 (Thread milling a 2.0 diameter post x 16 TPI)
(X0,Y0 is at the center of the post)
(Z0 is at the top of the part - Post height is 1.125 inch
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y2.0 S2000 M03
G43 H01 Z.1 M08
Z-1.0
G41 D01 X-1.5 Y1.125 (Turn on cutter compensation.)
G01 X0. F15. (Linear move to the post.)
G02 J-1.125 Z-1.0625 (Circular move; negative Z move.)
G01 X1.5 (Linear move away from the post.)
G00 G40 X0 Y2.0 (Turn off cutter compensation.)
Z1.0 M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%

NOTE: A cutter compensation move can consist of any X or Y move from any position
just as long as the move is greater than the amount being compensated for.
Single-Point Thread Milling Example
The program is for a 2.500 diameter hole, with a cutter diameter of .750" a radial value of .875 and a thread pitch of
.0833 (12 TPI) and a part thickness of 1.0.

110 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 Program Example Description
%
O1000 (X0,Y0 is at the center of the hole, Z0 is at the top of the part
T1 M06 (Tool #1 is a .750 diameter single-point thread tool)
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 S2500 M03
G43 H01 Z.1 M08
G01 Z-1.083 F35.
G41 X.275 DI (Radial value)
G3 X.875 I.3 F15.
G91 G3 I-.875 Z.0833 L14 (Multiply .0833 pitch x 14 passes = 1.1662 Z-axis move)
G90 G3 X.275 I-.300
G00 G90 Z1.0 M09
G1 G40 X0 Y0
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%
Helical Motion
Helical (spiral) motion is possible with G02 or G03 by programming the linear axis that is not in the selected plane.
This third axis will be moved along the specified axis in a linear manner, while the other two axes will be moved in
the circular motion. The speed of each axis will be controlled so that the helical rate matches the programmed
feedrate.
G04 Dwell (Group 00)
P The dwell time in seconds or milliseconds
G04 is used to cause a delay or dwell in the program. The block containing G04 will delay for the time specified by
the P code. For example G04 P10.0. This will delay the program for 10 seconds. Note the use of the decimal point
G04 P10. is a dwell of 10 seconds; G04 P10 is a dwell of 10 microseconds.
G09 Exact Stop (Group 00)
The G09 code is used to specify a controlled axes stop. It only affects the block in which it is commanded; it is
non-modal, it does not affect the following blocks. Machine moves will decelerate to the programmed point before
another command is processed.
G10 Set Offsets (Group 00)
G10 allows the programmer to set offsets within the program. Using G10 replaces the manual entry of offsets (i.e.
Tool length and diameter, and work coordinate offsets).

L – Selects offset category.

L2 Work coordinate origin for G52 and G54-G59
L10 Length offset amount (for H code)
L1 or L11 Tool wear offset amount (for H code)
L12 Diameter offset amount (for D code)
L13 Diameter wear offset amount (for D code)
L20 Auxiliary work coordinate origin for G110-G129
P – Selects a specific offset.
P1-P100 Used to reference D or H code offsets (L10-L13)
P0 G52 references work coordinate (L2)
P1-P6 G54-G59 references work coordinates (L2)
P1-P20 G110-G129 references auxiliary coordinates (L20)
P1-P99 G154 P1-P99 reference auxiliary coordinate (L20)

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 111

 R Offset value or increment for length and diameter.
X Optional X-axis zero location.
Y Optional Y-axis zero location.
Z Optional Z-axis zero location.
A Optional A-axis zero location.
Programming Examples
G10 L2 P1 G91 X6.0 {Move coordinate G54 6.0 to the right};
G10 L20 P2 G90 X10. Y8. {Set work coordinate G111 to X10.0 ,Y8.0};
G10 L10 G90 P5 R2.5 {Set offset for Tool #5 to 2.5};
G10 L12 G90 P5 R.375 {Set diameter for Tool #5 to .375–};
G10 L20 P50 G90 X10. Y20. {Set work coordinate G154 P50 to X10. Y20.}

G12 Circular Pocket Milling CW / G13 Circular Pocket Milling CCW (Group 00)
These two G codes are used to mill circular shapes. They are different only in which direction of rotation is used.
Both G codes use the default XY circular plane (G17) and imply the use of G42 (cutter compensation) for G12 and
G41 for G13. These two G-codes are non-modal.

*D Tool radius or diameter selection

I Radius of first circle (or finish if no K) The I value must be greater than the Tool Radius, but less than the K
value.
K Radius of finished circle (if specified)
L Loop count for repeating deeper cuts
Q Radius increment, or stepover (must be used with K)
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
Z Depth of cut or increment
*In order to get the programmed circle diameter, the control uses the selected D code tool size. If you want to
program tool centerline select D0.
NOTE: If no cutter compensation is desired, a D00 must be specified. If no D is specified in the G12/G13 block, the
last commanded D value will be used, even if it was previously canceled with a G40.

The tool must be positioned at the center of the circle using X and Y. To remove all the material within the circle,
use I and Q values less than the tool diameter and a K value equal to the circle radius. To cut a circle radius only,
use an I value set to the radius and no K or Q value.
%
O00098 (SAMPLE G12 AND G13)
(OFFSET D01 SET TO APPROX. TOOL SIZE)
(TOOL MUST BE MORE THAN Q IN DIAM.)
T1M06
G54G00G90X0Y0 (Move to center of G54)
G43Z0.1H01
S2000M03
G12I1.5F10.Z-1.2D01 (Finish pocket clockwise)
G00Z0.1
G55X0Y0 (Move to center of G55)
G12I0.3K1.5Q0.3F10.Z-1.2D01 (Rough and finish clockwise)
G00Z0.1
G56X0Y0 (Move to center of G56)
G13I1.5F10.Z-1.2D01 (Finish pocket counterclockwise)
G00Z0.1
G57X0Y0 (Move to center of G57)
G13I0.3K1.5Q0.3F10.Z-1.2D01 (Rough and finish counterclockwise)
G00Z0.1
G28
M30
%

112 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 Circular Pocket Milling (G12-Clockwise Shown)

I I
Q
K

I Only I, K, and Q Only

These G codes assume the use of cutter compensation, so a G41 or G42 is not required in the program line.
However, a D offset number, for cutter radius or diameter, is required to adjust the circle diameter.
The following programming examples show the G12 and G13 format, as well as the different ways these programs
can be written.
Single Pass: Use I only.
Applications: One-pass counter boring; rough and finish pocketing of smaller holes, ID cutting of O-ring grooves.
Multiple Pass: Use I, K, and Q.
Applications: Multiple-pass counter boring; rough and finish pocketing of large holes with cutter overlap.
Multiple Z-Depth Pass: Using I only, or I, K, and Q (G91 and L may also be used).
Applications: Deep rough and finish pocketing.
The previous figures show the tool path during the pocket milling G-codes.
Example G13 multiple-pass using I, K, Q, L, and G91:
This program uses G91 and an L count of 4, so this cycle will execute a total of four times. The Z depth increment
is 0.500. This is multiplied by the L count, making the total depth of this hole 2.000.
The G91 and L count can also be used in a G13 “I only” line.

NOTE: If the geometry column of the control Offsets display has a value inserted, the
G12/G13 will read the data, whether a D0 is present or not. To cancel cutter
compensation insert a D00 in the program line, this will bypass the value in
the Offsets geometry column.
Program Example Description
%
O4000 (0.500 entered in the Radius/Diameter offset column)
T1 M06 (Tool #1 is a 0.500" diameter endmill)
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 S4000 M03
G43 H01 Z.1 M08
G01 Z0 F10.
G13 G91 Z-.5 I.400 K2.0 Q.400 L4 D01 F20.
G00 G90 Z1.0 M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 113

G17 XY / G18 XZ / G19 YZ plane selection (Group 02)
The face of the workpiece that will have a circular milling operation (G02, G03, G12, G13) done to it must have two
of the three main axes (X, Y and Z) selected. One of three G codes is used to select the plane, G17 for XY, G18 for
XZ, and G19 for YZ. Each is modal and will apply to all subsequent circular motions. The default plane selection is
G17, which means that a circular motion in the XY plane can be programmed without selecting G17. Plane selec-
tion also applies to G12 and G13, circular pocket milling, which must always be in the XY plane.
If cutter radius compensation is selected (G41 or G42), you may only use the XY plane (G17) for circular motion.
G17 Defined - Circular motion with the operator looking down on the XY table from above. This defines the motion of
the tool relative to the table.
G18 Defined - Circular motion is defined as the motion for the operator looking from the rear of the machine toward
the front control panel.
G19 Defined - Circular motion is defined as the motion for the operator looking across the table from the side of the
machine where the control panel is mounted.

G17 G18 G19

Z Z

X X
Y Y

G20 Select Inches / G21 Select Metric (Group 06)

The G codes G20 (inch) and G21 (mm) codes are used to ensure that the inch/metric selection is set correctly for
the program. Selection between inch and metric programming should be done using Setting 9.
G28 Return to Machine Zero Thru Optional G29 Reference Point (Group 00)
The G28 code is used to return all axes to machine zero, unless an axis (or axes) is specified, in which case only
that axis (or axes) is returned to machine zero. G28 cancels tool length offsets for the following lines of code.

Spindle

G00 G28 G91 Z0

Rapid Return
To “Z” Zero

Machine Table

114 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 Example 1
Work Offset G54: Z = 2.0
Tool 2 Length: 12.0
Program segment:
G90 G54;
G43 H02;
G28 Z0.;
G00 Z1.
The G28 block will move to machine coordinate Z = 14.0 before moving to Z = 0. The following block (G00 Z1.) will
move to machine coordinate Z = 1.
Example 2
(same work and tool offsets as Example 1)
Program segment:
G54;
G43 H02;
G00 G91G28 Z0
The G28 block will move directly to machine coordinate Z = 0 since incremental positioning is in effect.
G29 Return From Reference Point (Group 00)
The G29 code is used to move the axes to a specific position. The axes selected in this block are moved to the
G29 reference point saved in G28, and then moved to the location specified in the G29 command.
G31 Feed Until Skip (Group 00)
(This G-code is optional and requires a probe)
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
X Optional X-axis motion command
Y Optional Y-axis motion command
Z Optional Z-axis motion command
A Optional A-axis motion command
B Optional B-axis motion command
This G-code moves the axes to the programmed position. It applies only to the block in which G31 is specified. The
specified move is started and continues until the position is reached or the probe receives a signal (skip signal).
The control will beep when the end of travel is reached.
Do not use Cutter Compensation with a G31.
Use the assigned M-codes (for example M52 and M62), with a dwell, to turn the table probe on and off
For example:
M53
G04 P100
M63
Also see M75, M78 and M79.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 115

G35 Automatic Tool Diameter Measurement (Group 00)
(This G-code is optional and requires a probe)
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
D Tool diameter offset number
X Optional X-axis command
Y Optional Y-axis command
Automatic Tool Diameter Offset Measurement function (G35) is used to set the tool diameter (or radius) using two
passes of the probe; one on each side of the tool. The first point is set with a G31 block using an M75, and the
second point is set with the G35 block. The distance between these two points is set into the selected (non-zero)
Dnnn offset. Setting 63 (Tool Probe Width) is used to reduce the measurement of the tool by the width of the tool
probe.
This G-code moves the axes to the programmed position. The specified move is started and continues until the
position is reached or the probe sends a signal (skip signal).
Notes:
Also see G31.
Use the assigned M-code (M52) to turn the table probe on.
Use the assigned M-code (M62) to turn the table probe off.
Also see M75, M78, and M79.
Do not use Cutter Compensation with a G35.
Turn on the spindle in reverse (M04), for a right handed cutter.
O1234 (G35)
M52
T1 M06
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y1.
G43 H01 Z0
G01 Z-1. F10.
M04 S200
G31 Y0.49 F5. M75
G01 Y1. F20.
Z0
Y-1.
Z-1.
G35 Y-0.49 D1 F5.
G01 Y-1. F20.
M62
G00 G53 Z0 M05
M30

116 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 G36 Automatic Work Offset Measurement (Group 00)
(This G-code is optional and requires a probe)

F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute

I Optional offset distance along X-axis
J Optional offset distance along Y-axis
K Optional offset distance along Z-axis
X Optional X-axis motion command
Y Optional Y-axis motion command
Z Optional Z-axis motion command
Automatic Work Offset Measurement (G36) is used to command a probe to set work fixture offsets. A G36 will feed
the axes of the machine in an effort to probe the workpiece with a spindle mounted probe. The axis (axes) will
move until a signal from the probe is received, or the travel limit is reached.
Tool offsets (G41, G42, G43, or G44) must not be active this function is preformed. The currently active work
coordinate system is set for each axis programmed. The point where the skip signal is received becomes the zero
position.
If an I, J, or K is specified, the appropriate axis work offset is shifted by the amount in the I, J, or K command. This
allows the work offset to be shifted away from where the probe actually contacts the part.
Notes:
The points probed are offset by the values in Settings 59 through 62.
Use G91 incremental moves when using a G36.
Use the assigned M-codes (for example M53 and M63) with a dwell to turn the spindle probe on or off.
Example:
M53
G04 P100
M63

Program Example
O1234 (G36)
M53
G04 P100
M63
G00 G90 G54 X1. Y0
Z-18.
G91 G01 Z-1. F20.
G36 X-1. F10.
G90 G01 X1.
M53
G04 P100
M63
G00 G90 G53 Z0
M30

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 117

G37 Automatic Tool Offset Measurement (Group 00)
(This G-code is optional and requires a probe)
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
H Tool offset number
Z Required Z-axis offset
Automatic Tool Length Offset Measurement (G37) is used to command a probe to set tool length offsets. A G37 will
feed the Z-axis in an effort to probe a tool with a table mounted probe. The Z-axis will move until a signal from the
probe is received, or the travel limit is reached. A non-zero H code and either G43 or G44 must be active. When the
signal from the probe is received (skip signal) the Z position is used to set the specified tool offset (Hnnn). The
resulting tool offset is the offset between the work zero point and the point where the probe is touched.
The coordinate system (G54-G59, G110-G129) and the tool length offsets (H01-H200) may be selected in this block
or the previous block.
Notes:
Use the assigned M-code (M52) to turn the table probe on.
Use the assigned M-code (M62) to turn the table probe off.
Cutter Compensation may not be active during a skip function.
Also see M78 and M79.
Specify Z0 for no offset.
O1234 (G37)
T1 M06
M52
G00 G90 G110 X0 Y0
G00 G43 H1 Z5.
G37 H1 Z0. F30.
G00 G53 Z0
M62
M30
G40 Cutter Comp Cancel (Group 07)
G40 will cancel G41 or G42 cutter compensation.
G41 2D Cutter Compensation Left / G42 2D Cutter Comp. Right (Group 07)
G41 will select cutter compensation left; that is, the tool is moved to the left of the programmed path to compen-
sate for the size of the tool. A D address must be programmed to select the correct tool radius or diameter offset. If
the value in the selected offset is negative, cutter compensation will operate as though G42 (Cutter Comp Right.)
was specified.
The right or left side of the programmed path is determined by looking at the tool as it moves away from you. If the
tool needs to be on the left of the programmed path as it moves away from you, Use G41. If it needs to be on the
right of the programmed path as it moves away from you, use G42.
Refer to the “Cutter Compensation” section for more information.
G43 Tool Length Compensation + (Add) / G44 Tool Length Comp - (Subtract) (Group 08)
A G43 code selects tool length compensation in the positive direction; the tool length in the offsets page is added
to the commanded axis position. A G44 code selects tool length compensation in the negative direction; the tool
length in the offsets page is subtracted from the commanded axis position. A non-zero H address must be entered
to select the correct entry from the offsets page.

118 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 G47 Text Engraving (Group 00)
In order to use G47, the program must be using G90 (absolute) mode, and setting 29 (G91 non-modal) must be
OFF.
E Plunge feed rate (units/min)
F Engraving feedrate (units/min)
I Angle of rotation (-360. to +360.); default is 0
J Height of text in inches (minimum = 0.001 inch); default is 1.0 inch
P 0 for literal string engraving
1 for sequential serial number engraving
32-126 for ASCII characters
R Return plane
X X start of engraving
Y Y start of engraving
Z Depth of cut
Sequential Serial Number Engraving
This method is used to engrave numbers on a series of parts, with the number being increased by one each time.
The # symbol is used to select the number of digits in the serial number. For example:
G47 P1 (#### )
will limit the serial number to four digits.
The initial serial number can either be programmed or set manually. For example, if it is programmed:
G47 P1 (1234)
will set the initial serial number to “1234.”
The initial serial number can also be set manually into a macro variable. The Macros option does not have to be
enabled to do this. Macro variable #599 is used to hold the initial serial number to be engraved. For example, when
macro variable #599 is set to “1234,”
G47 P1 (####)
will produce:
1234
See the Macros section for more information.
Literal String Engraving
This method is used to engrave desired text on a part. The text should be in the form of a comment on the same
line as the P0 statement. For example:
G47 P0 (ENGRAVE THIS)
will produce
ENGRAVE THIS
Example
This example will create the figure shown.
G47 P0 X2.0 Y2.0 I45. J.5 R.05 Z-.005 F15.0 E10.0 (TEXT TO ENGRAVE)

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 119

 E
AV
6

R
G
5

EN
4

TO
90o

XT
3 45o

TE
2 180o 0o
1 -45o

5"
o
270

0.
1 2 3 4 5 6

In this example:
G47 P0 select literal string engraving
X2.0 Y2.0 select 2.0, 2.0 as the starting point for the text.
I45. places the text at a positive 45° angle
J.5 sets the text height to 0.5 inch
R.05 commands the cutter to retract to 0.05 inch (mm) above the cutting plane after engraving
Z-.005 selects a 0.005 inch (mm) deep cut
F15.0 selects an engraving feedrate of 15 units/min
E10.0 commands the cutter to plunge at a rate of 10 units/min
P values to engrave specific characters:

32 blank 41 ) 59 ; 93 ]
33 ! 42 * 60 < 94 ^
34 “ 43 + 61 = 95 _
35 # 44 , 62 > 96 ‘
36 $ 45 - 63 ? 97-122 a-z
37 % 46 . 64 @ 123 {
38 & 47 / 65-90 A-Z 124 |
39 ‘ 48-57 0-9 91 [ 125 }
40 ( 58 : 92 \ 126 ~
Example
To engrave “$2.00” two lines of code are necessary. The first will be using a P36 to engrave the dollar sign ($), and
the second will use P0 (2.00). Note that the axes will need to be shifted between the first and second line of code
in order to make a space between the dollar sign and the 2.

120 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 G49 G43/G44/G143 Cancel (Group 08)
This G code cancels tool length compensation.
Programming note: An H0, G28, M30, and Reset will also cancel tool length compensation.
G50 Cancel Scaling (Group 11)
G50 cancels the optional scaling feature. Any axis scaled by a previous G51 command is no longer in effect.
G51 Scaling (Group 11)
(This G-code is optional and requires Rotation and Scaling)
X optional center of scaling for the X axis
Y optional center of scaling for the Y axis
Z optional center of scaling for the Z axis
P optional scaling factor for all axes; three-place decimal from 0.001 to 8383.000.

G51 [X...] [Y...] [Z...] [P...]

A scaling center is always used by the control in determining the scaled position. If any scaling center is not
specified in the G51 command block, then the last commanded position is used as the scaling center.
When scaling (G51) is commanded, all X, Y, Z, I, J, K, or R values addressing machine motion are multiplied by a
scaling factor and are offset relative to a scaling center.
G51 will affect all appropriate positioning values in the blocks following the G51 command. The X, Y and Z axes can
be scaled using a P address, if a P address is not entered the Setting 71 scaling factor is used.
The following programs illustrate how scaling is performed when different scaling centers are used.

0001 (GOTHIC WINDOW) ;

F20. S500 ;
Z G00 X1. Y1. ;
X G01 X2. ;
Y Y2. ;
G03 X1. R0.5;
G01 Y1. ;
G00 X0 Y0 ;
M99 ;

= Work coordinate origin

No Scaling

G51

The first example illustrates how the control uses the current work coordinate location as a scaling center. Here, it
is X0 Y0 Z0.

00010 ;
Z G59 ;
X G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
Y G51 P2. (scaling center is X0 Y0 Z0) ;
M98 P1 ;
M30 ;

= Work coordinate origin

= Center of scaling

G51 Scaling

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 121

The next example specifies the center of the window as the scaling center.

00011 ;
Z G59 ;
X G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
Y M98 P1 ;
G51 X1.5 Y1.5 P2. ;
M98 P1 ;
M30 ;

= Work coordinate origin

= Center of scaling

G51 Scaling

The last example illustrates how scaling can be placed at the edge of tool paths as if the part was being set
against locating pins.

00011 ;
G59 ;
Z G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
X M98 P1 ;
Y G51 X1.0 Y1.0 P2 ;
M98 P1 ;
M30 ;

= Work coordinate origin

= Center of scaling

G51 Scaling

Programming notes:
Tool offsets and cutter compensation values are not affected by scaling.
Scaling does not affect canned cycle Z-axis movements such as clearance planes and incremental values.
The final results of scaling are rounded to the lowest fractional value of the variable being scaled.
G52 Set Work Coordinate System YASNAC (Group 00 or 12)
The G52 command works differently depending on the value of setting 33. Setting 33 selects the Fanuc, Haas, or
Yasnac style of coordinates.
If Yasnac is selected, G52 is a group 12 G-code. G52 works the same as G54, G55, etc. All of the G52 values will
not be set to zero (0) when powered on, reset is pressed, at the end of the program, or by an M30. When using a
G92 (Set Work Coordinate Systems Shift Value), in Yasnac format, the X, Y, Z, A, and B values are subtracted from
the current work position, and automatically entered into the G52 work offset.
If Fanuc is selected, G52 is a group 00 G-code. This is a global work coordinate shift. The values entered into the
G52 line of the work offset page are added to all work offsets. All of the G52 values in the work offset page will be
set to zero (0) when powered on, reset is pressed, changing modes, at the end of the program, by an M30, G92 or
a G52 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 B0. When using a G92 (Set Work Coordinate Systems Shift Value), in Fanuc format, the
current position in the current work coordinate system is shifted by the values of G92 (X, Y, Z, A, and B). The
values of the G92 work offset are the difference between the current work offset and the shifted amount commanded
by G92.

122 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 If Haas is selected, G52 is a group 00 G-code. This is a global work coordinate shift. The values entered into the
G52 line of the work offset page are added to all work offsets. All of the G52 values will be set to zero (0) by a G92.
When using a G92 (Set Work Coordinate Systems Shift Value), in Haas format, the current position in the current
work coordinate system is shifted by the values of G92 (X, Y, Z, A, and B). The values of the G92 work offset are
the difference between the current work offset and the shifted amount commanded by G92 (Set Work Coordinate
Systems Shift Value).
G53 Non-Modal Machine Coordinate Selection (Group 00)
This code temporarily cancels work coordinate offsets and uses the machine coordinate system. In the machine
coordinate system, the zero point for each axis is the position where the machine goes when a Zero Return is
performed. G53 will revert to this system for the block it is commanded in.
G54-59 Select Work Coordinate System #1 - #6 (Group 12)
These codes select one of the six user coordinate system. All future references to axes positions will be interpreted
using the new (G54 G59) coordinate system.
G60 Uni-Directional Positioning (Group 00)
This G code is used to provide positioning only from the positive direction. It is provided only for compatibility with
older systems. It is non-modal, so does not affect the blocks that follow it. Also see Setting 35.
G61 Exact Stop Mode (Group 15)
The G61 code is used to specify an exact stop. It is modal; therefore, it affects the blocks that follow it. The
machine axes will come to an exact stop at the end of each commanded move.
G64 G61 Cancel (Group 15)
The G64 code is used to cancel exact stop (G61).
G68 Rotation (Group 16)
(This G-code is optional and requires Rotation and Scaling.)
G17, G18, G19 optional plane of rotation, default is current
A optional center of rotation for the first axis of the selected plane
B optional center of rotation for the second axis of the selected plane
R optional angle of rotation specified in degrees
Three-place decimal -360.000 to 360.000.
A G17, 18 or 19 must be used before the G68 command to establish the axis plane being rotated. For example:
G17 G68 Annn Bnnn Rnnn;
A and B correspond to the axes of the current plane; for the G17 example A is the X-axis and B is the Y-axis.
A center of rotation is always used by the control to determine the positional values passed to the control after
rotation. If any axis center of rotation is not specified, then the current location is used as the center of rotation.
When rotation (G68) is commanded, all X, Y, Z, I, J, and K values are rotated through a specified angle R using a
center of rotation.
G68 will affect all appropriate positional values in the blocks following the G68 command. Values in the line contain-
ing G68 are not rotated. Only the values in the plane of rotation are rotated, therefore, if G17 is the current plane of
rotation, only X and Y values are affected.
Entering a positive number (angle) for the R address will rotate the feature counterclockwise.
If the angle of rotation (R) is not entered, then the angle of rotation is taken from Setting 72.
In G91 mode (incremental) with Setting 73 ON, the rotation angle is changed by the value in R. In other words,
each G68 command will change the rotation angle by the value specified in R.
The rotational angle is set to zero at the beginning of the program, or it can be set to a specific angle using a G68
in G90 mode.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 123

The following examples illustrate rotation using G68.

0001 (GOTHIC WINDOW) ;

F20, S500 ;
Z G00 X1. Y1. ;
X G01 X2. ;
Y Y2. ;
G03 X1. R0.5
G01 Y1. ;
M99 ;

= Work coordinate origin

No Rotation

G68

The first example illustrates how the control uses the current work coordinate location as a rotation center (X0 Y0
Z0).

00002 ;
G59 ;
Z G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
X M98 P1 ;
Y G90 G00 X0 Y0 ; (Last Commanded Position)
G68 R60. ;
M98 P1 ;
G69 G90 G00 X0 Y0 ;
M30 ;

= Work coordinate origin

= Center of rotation

G68 Rotation

The next example specifies the center of the window as the rotation center.

00003 ;
G59 ;
Z G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
X M98 P1 ;
Y G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
G68 X1.5 Y1.5 R60. ;
M98 P1 ;
G69 G90 G00 X0 Y0 ;
M30 ;

= Work coordinate origin

= Center of rotation
G68 Rotation

This example shows how the G91 mode can be used to rotate patterns about a center. This is often useful for
making parts that are symmetric about a given point.

124 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 00004 ;
G59 ;
Z G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
X M98 P10 L8 (SUBROUTINE 00010) ;
Y M30 ;

00010 ;
G91 G68 R45. ;
G90 M98 P1 ;
G90 G00 X0 Y0 ;
M99 ;
= Work coordinate origin
= Center of rotation
G68 Rotation

Do not change the plane of rotation while G68 is in effect.

Rotation with Scaling

If scaling and rotation are used simultaneously, it is recommended that scaling be turned on prior to rotation, and
that separate blocks be used. Use the following template when doing this.
G51 ..... (SCALING) ;
...
G68 ..... (ROTATION) ;
.
. program
.
G69 ..... (ROTATION OFF) ;
...
G50 ..... (SCALING OFF) ;
Rotation with Cutter Compensation
Cutter compensation should be turned on after the rotation command is issued. Compensation should also be
turned off prior to turning rotation off.

G69 Cancel G68 Rotation (Group 16)

(This G-code is optional and requires Rotation and Scaling.)
G69 cancels any rotation specified previously. Work Coordinate System Selection (G52, G53, G54-59).

G70 Bolt Hole Circle (Group 00)

I Radius (+CCW / -CW)
J Starting angle (0 to 360.0 degrees CCW from horizontal; or 3 o’clock position)
L Number of holes evenly spaced around the circle
This non-modal G code must be used with one of the canned cycles G73, G74, G76, G77, or G81-G89. A canned
cycle must be active so that at each position, a drill or tap function is performed.

G71 Bolt Hole Arc (Group 00)

I Radius (+CCW / -CW)
J Starting angle (degrees CCW from horizontal)
K Angular spacing of holes (+ or –)
L Number of holes
This non-modal G code is similar to G70 except that it is not limited to a complete circle. G71 belongs to Group 00
and thus is non-modal. A canned cycle must be active so that at each position, a drill or tap function is performed.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 125

G72 Bolt Holes Along an Angle (Group 00)
I Distance between holes (+CCW / -CW)
J Angle of line (degrees CCW from horizontal)
L Number of holes
This non-modal G code drills “L” number of holes in a straight line at the specified angle. It operates similarly to
G70. For a G72 to work correctly, a canned cycle must be active so that at each position, a drill or tap function is
performed.

G 70 I = Radius of the bolt circle

Bolt hole circle J = Starting angle from the 3 o'clock
J position
L = Number of holes (evenly spaced)
I

G 71 I = Radius of the bolt circle

Bolt hole circle K J = Starting angle from the 3 o'clock
J position
K = Angular spacing between holes
I L = Number of holes (evenly spaced)

G 72
Bolt holes I
I = Distance between holes
along an angle J J = Starting angle from the 3 o'clock
position
L = Number of holes

Rules For Bolt Pattern Canned Cycles:

1. The tool must be placed at the center of the bolt pattern before the canned cycle execution. The center is
usually X0, Y0.
2. The J code is the angular starting position and is always 0 to 360 degrees counterclockwise from the three
o’clock position.
Looping Canned Cycles
The following is an example of a program using a drilling canned cycle that is incrementally looped.

NOTE: The sequence of drilling used here is designed to save time and to follow the
shortest path from hole to hole.

1.00
Starittion
Pos
ne
1.00 R Plane
Z Pla
11.00

Rapid
11.00 Feed

G81 Drilling Canned Cycle (Incremental) and Grid Plate for Multiple-Fixture Subprogram

126 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 Program Example Description
%
O3400 (Drilling grid plate)
T1 M06
G00 G90 G54 X1.0 Y-1.0 S2500 M03
G43 H01 Z.1 M08
G81 Z-1.5 F15. R.1
G91 X1.0 L9
G90 Y-2.0 (Or stay in G91 and repeat Y-1.0)
G91 X-1.0 L9
G90 Y-3.0
G91 X1.0 L9
G90 Y-4.0
G91 X-1.0 L9
G90 Y-5.0
G91 X1.0 L9
G90 Y-6.0
G91 X-1.0 L9
G90 Y-7.0
G91 X1.0 L9
G90 Y-8.0
G91 X-1.0 L9
G90 Y-9.0
G91 X1.0 L9
G90 Y-10.0
G91 X-1.0 L9
G00 G90 G80 Z1.0 M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%
Modifying Canned Cycles
In this section we will cover canned cycles that have to be customized in order to make the programming of difficult
parts easier.
Using G98 and G99 to clear clamps – For example, A square part being held to the table with one-inch tall table
clamps. A program needs to be written to clear the table clamps.
Program Example Description
%
O4500
T1 M06
G00 G90 G54 X1.0 Y-1.0 S3500 M03
G43 H01 Z1.125 M08
G81 G99 Z-1.500 R.05 F20.
X2.0 G98 ( Will return to starting point after executing cycle )
X6.0 G99 ( Will return to reference plane after executing cycle )
X8.0
X10.0
X12.0 G98
X16.0 G99
X18.0 G98
G00 G80 Z2.0 M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 127

X, Y Plane Obstacle Avoidance In A Canned Cycle:
There is also a way to avoid an obstacle in the X, Y plane during a canned cycle by placing an L0 in a canned
cycle line, we can tell the control to make an X, Y move without executing the Z-axis canned operation.
For example, we have a six-inch square aluminum block, with a one-inch by one-inch deep flange on each side.
The print calls for two holes centered on each side of the flange. We need to write a program to avoid each of the
corners on the block.
Program Example Description
%
O4600 (X0,Y0 is at the top left corner, Z0 is at the top of the part)
T1 M06
G00 G90 G54 X2.0 Y-.5 S3500 M03
G43 H01 Z-.9 M08
G81 Z-2.0 R-.9 F15.
X4.0
X5.5 L0 (angular corner avoidance)
Y-2.0
Y-4.0
Y-5.5 L0
X4.0
X2.0
X.5 L0
Y-4.0
Y-2.0
G00 G80 Z1.0 M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%

128 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 CANNED C YCLES
Introduction
Canned cycles are used to simplify programming. They are used for repetitive operations, such as drilling, tapping,
and boring. The canned cycle is executed every time an X and/or Y-axis motion is programmed.
Using Canned Cycles
The positioning of a canned cycle in the X and/or Y-axes can be done in either absolute (G90) or incremental (G91).
Incremental (G91) motion in a canned cycle is often useful with a loop count (Lnn) which will repeat the canned
cycle operation that many times with each incremental X or Y move for the canned cycle.
Example:
G81 G99 Z-0.5 R0.1 F6.5 (This will drill one hole at the present location)
G91 X-0.5625 L9 (This will drill 9 more holes .5625 equally spaced in the minus direction)
If a canned cycle is defined without an X or Y and a loop count of 0 (L0), the cycle will not be performed initially.
The operation of the canned cycle will vary according to whether incremental (G91) or absolute (G90) positioning is
active. Incremental motion in a canned cycle is often useful as a loop (L) count as it can be used to repeat the
operation with an incremental X or Y move between each cycle.
Example:
X1.25 Y-0.75 (center location of bolt hole pattern)
G81 G99 Z-0.5 R0.1 F6.5 L0 (L0 on the G81 line will not drill a hole in the bolt hole circle)
G70 I0.75 J10. L6 (6-hole bolt hole circle)
Once a canned cycle is commanded, that operation is done at every X-Y position listed in a block. Some of the
canned cycle numerical values can be changed after the canned cycle is defined. The most important of these are
the R plane value and the Z depth value. If these are listed in a block with XY commands, the XY move is done and
all subsequent canned cycles are performed with the new R or Z value.
The positioning of the X and Y-axes prior to a canned cycle is done with rapid moves.
G98 and G99 change the way the canned cycles operate. When G98 is active, the Z-axis will return to the initial
start plane at the completion of each hole in the canned cycle. This allows for positioning up and around areas of
the part and/or clamps and fixtures.
When G99 is active, the Z-axis returns to the R (rapid) plane after each hole in the canned cycle for clearance to
the next XY location. Changes to the G98/G99 selection can also be made after the canned cycle is commanded,
which will affect all later canned cycles.
A P address is an optional command for the some of the canned cycles. This is a programmed pause at the
bottom hole to help break chips, provide a smoother finish and relieve any tool pressure to hold closer tolerance.
Note that if a value for P is entered for one canned cycle it will be used in others unless cancelled (G00, G01, G80
or the Reset button).
An S (spindle speed) command must be defined in, or before the G-code line of code.
Tapping in a canned cycle needs a feed rate calculated. The Feed Formula is:
Spindle speed divided by Threads per inch of the tap = Feedrate in inches per minute
Canned Cycles also benefit from the use of Setting 57. Turning this setting ON will perform an exact stop between
rapids. This is useful to avoid nicking the part at the bottom of the hole.
NOTE: The Z, R, and F addresses are required data for all canned cycles.
Canceling a Canned Cycle
The G80 code is used to cancel all canned cycles; note that a G00 or G01 code will also cancel a canned cycle.
Once selected, a canned cycle is active until canceled with G80, G00 or G01.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 129

G73 High-Speed Peck Drilling Canned Cycle (Group 09)
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
I First cut depth
J Amount to reduce cutting depth for pass
K Minimum depth of cut (The control will calculate the number of pecks)
L Number of repeats (Number of holes to drill) if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
P Pause at the bottom of the hole (in seconds)
Q Cut Depth (always incremental)
R Position of the R plane (Distance above part surface)
X X-axis location of hole
Y Y-axis location of hole
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole

G73 Peck Drilling with I, J & K options G73 Peck Drilling with K & Q options

22
ING #
SETT
#22
TING
SET ane
R Pl
ane
R Pl Q

I Q
I1 =
Q
I1 - J
I2 = pth
Z De
I3 = K
pth
Z De

I, J, K, and Q are always positive numbers.

There are two methods to program a G73; first using the I, J, K addresses and the second using the K and Q
addresses.
If I, J, and K are specified, The first pass will cut in by the value I, each succeeding cut will be reduced by the value
of J, and the minimum cutting depth is K. If P is specified, the tool will pause at the bottom of the hole for that
amount of time.
If K and Q are both specified, a different operating mode is selected for this canned cycle. In this mode, the tool is
returned to the R plane after the number of passes totals up to the K amount.

G73 Peck Drilling Canned Cycle Feed

Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke
ne ne
ting Pla ting Pla
Star Star 52
ING #
SETT

22 22
ane ING # ING #
R Pl SETT SETT
ane
22 R Pl ING #
22
ING # SETT
Q SETT Q

Q Q

Q Q

pth
Z De
pth Z De

130 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Setting 52 changes the way G73 works when it returns to the R plane. Usually the R plane is set well above the
cut, to ensure that the peck motion actually allows the chips to get out of the hole. This wastes time as the drill
starts by drilling through “empty” space. If Setting 52 is set to the distance required to clear chips, the R plane can
be put much closer to the part being drilled. When the chip-clearing move to R occurs, this setting will move the Z-
axis above R.
G74 Reverse Tap Canned Cycle (Group 09)
F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute (use the formula, described in the canned cycle
introduction, to calculate feed rate and spindle speed)
J Retract Multiple (How fast to retract - see Setting 130)
L Number of repeats (How many holes to tap) if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
R Position of the R plane (position above the part) where tapping starts
X X-axis location of hole
Y Y-axis location of hole
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole
G74 Tapping Canned Cycle G98 / G99 Z Axis position between holes
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke
e
Plan Plan
e
Sta rting rting
l a
Initia Initia
l St
G98
lane
R a pid P
Y G99
Z Y
ane Z
R Pl ane
R Pl
X X

pth pth
Z De Z De

G76 Fine Boring Canned Cycle (Group 09)

F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
I Shift value along the X-axis before retracting, if Q is not specified
J Shift value along the Y-axis before retracting, if Q is not specified
L Number of holes to bore if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
P The dwell time at the bottom of the hole
Q The shift value, always incremental
R Position of the R plane (position above the part)
X X-axis location of hole
Y Y-axis location of hole
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 131

 G76 Fine Boring Canned Cycle Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke
Shift

g Plane Plane
tar tin ar ting
itial S l S t
G98 In Initia
Plane
Rapid
Y G99
Z Y Z
ne ne
R Pla R Pla
X X

th Shif t th Shif t
Z Dep Z Dep

In addition to boring the hole, this cycle will shift the X and/or Y axis prior to retracting in order to clear the tool
while exiting the part. If Q is used Setting 27 determines the shift direction. If Q is not specified, the optional I and J
values are used to determine the shift direction and distance.

G77 Back Bore Canned Cycle (Group 09)

F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
I Shift value along the X-axis before retracting, if Q is not specified
J Shift value along the Y-axis before retracting, if Q is not specified
L Number of holes to bore if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
Q The shift value, always incremental
R Position of the R plane (position above the part)
X X-axis location of hole
Y Y-axis location of hole
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole
In addition to boring the hole, this cycle will shift the X and/or Y axis prior to and after cutting in order to clear the
tool while entering and exiting the part (see G76 for an example of a shift move). Setting 27 determines the shift
direction. If Q is not specified, the optional I and J values are used to determine the shift direction and distance.

G77 Back Boring Canned Cycle

lane
ing P
Star t

Y Z
ring
B ack Bo
X
Shif t
ne
R Pla

Feed Begin or end of stroke

Rapid Move Shift

G80 Canned Cycle Cancel (Group 09)

This G code deactivates all canned cycles until a new one is selected. Note that use of G00 or G01 will also cancel
a canned cycle.

132 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

G81 Drill Canned Cycle (Group 09)
F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
L Number of holes to drill if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
R Position of the R plane (position above the part)
X X-axis motion command
Y Y-axis motion command
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole

NOTE: The X and Y addresses, in most cases, are the location of the first hole to be
drilled.

G81 Drill Canned Cycle

Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke

Plane
tar tin
g
ing Plane
itial S Star t
G98 In Initial
Plane
Rapid
Y G99
Y
ne Z ne Z
R Pla R Pla

X X
th
Z Dep Z Pla
ne

Program Example
The following is a program to drill through an aluminum plate:
T1 M06
G00 G90 G54 X1.125 Y-1.875 S4500 M03
G43 H01 Z0.1
G81 G99 Z-0.35 R0.1 F27.
X2.0
X3.0 Y-3.0
X4.0 Y-5.625
X5.250 Y-1.375
G80 G00 Z1.0
G28
M30
G82 Spot Drill Canned Cycle (Group 09)
F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
L Number of holes if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
P The dwell time at the bottom of the hole
R Position of the R plane (position above the part)
X X-axis location of hole
Y Y-axis location of hole
Z Position of bottom of hole

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 133

Programming Note: G82 is similar to G81 except that you have the option to program a dwell (P)
Program Example Description
%
O1234 (Sample program)
T1 M06 (Tool #1 is a 0.5" x 90-degree spot drill)
G90 G54 G00 X.565 Y-1.875 S1275 M03
G43 H01 Z0.1 M08
G82 Z-0.175 P.3 R0.1 F10. (90-degree spot drill; the depth is)
X1.115 Y-2.750 (half of the chamfer diameter)
X3.365 Y-2.875
X4.188 Y-3.313
X5.0 Y-4.0
G80 G00 Z1.0 M09

G82 Spot Drill Canned Cycle Feed

Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke

ting Plane
l Star lane
Initia ing P
G98 Star t
Plane
99 Rapid
G
Y Y
ne Z ne Z
R Pla R Pla

X X
ne ne
Z Pla Z Pla

G82 Spot drilling example

G83 Normal Peck Drilling Canned Cycle (Group 09)

F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
I Size of first cutting depth
J Amount to reduce cutting depth each pass
K Minimum depth of cut
L Number of holes if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
P Pause at end of last peck, in seconds (Dwell)
Q Cut depth, always incremental
R Position of the R plane (position above the part)
X X-axis location of hole
Y Y-axis location of hole
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole
If I, J, and K are specified, the first pass will cut in by the amount of I, each succeeding cut will be reduced by
amount J, and the minimum cutting depth is K.
If P is specified, the tool will pause at the bottom of the hole for that amount of time. The following example will
peck several times and dwell for 1.5 seconds:
G83 Z-0.62 F15. R0.1 Q0.175 P1.5.
The same dwell time will apply to all subsequent blocks that do not specify a dwell time.

134 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 G83 Peck Drilling with I, J & K options G83 Normal Peck Drilling

22
ING #
SETT
22
ING #
SETT ne
R Pla
ne
R Pla Q

I Q
I1 =
Q
I1 - J
I2 = th
Z Dep
I2 - J
I3 =
th
Z Dep

Setting 52 changes the way G83 works when it returns to the R plane. Usually the R plane is set well above the cut
to ensure that the peck motion allows the chips to get out of the hole. This wastes time as the drill starts by drilling
“empty” space. If Setting 52 is set to the distance required to clear chips, the R plane can be put much closer to
the part being drilled. When the chip-clearing move to R occurs, the Z axis distance above R is determined by this
setting.

G83 Peck Drilling Canned Cycle Feed

Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke
lane lane
ing P ing P
Star t Star t ING #
52
G# 22 SETT
SETTIN
22
ne ING #
R Pla SETT
ne
R Pla ING #
22
Q Q SETT

Q Q

Q Q

th
Z Dep
th Z Dep

Program Example Description

T2 M06 (Tool #2 is a 0.3125" stub drill)
G90 G54 G00 X0.565 Y-1.875 S2500 M03
G43 H02 Z0.1 M08
G83 Z-0.720 Q0.175 R0.1 F15. (Drill point is 1/3 of the drill diameter)
X1.115 Y-2.750
X3.365 Y-2.875
X4.188 Y-3.313
X5.0 Y-4.0
G80 G00 Z1.0 M09

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 135

G84 Tapping Canned Cycle (Group 09)
F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
J Retract Multiple (see Setting 130)
L Number of holes if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
R Position of the R plane (Position above the part)
X X-axis location of hole
Y Y-axis location of hole
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole

G84 Tapping Canned Cycle G98 / G99 Z Axis position between holes
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke

lane
ing P g Pla
ne
it ia l Star t tar tin
G98 In Init ia l S

Plane
Rapid
Y G99
Z Y Z
ne ne
R Pla R Pla

X X

th th
Z Dep Z Dep

G 84 Tapping Canned Cycle Example

Program Example
Helpful notes are listed in parentheses ( ).
T3 M06 (Tool #3 is a 3/8-16 tap)
G90 G54 G00 X0.565 Y-1.875 S900 M03
G43 H03 Z0.2 M08
G84 Z-0.600 R0.2 F56.25 (900 rpm divided by 16 tpi = 56.25 ipm)
X1.115 Y-2.750
X3.365 Y-2.875
X4.188 Y-3.313
X5.0 Y-4.0
G80 G00 Z1.0 M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%

136 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

G85 Boring Canned Cycle (Group 09)
F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
L Number of holes if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
R Position of the R plane (position above the part)
X X-axis location of holes
Y Y-axis location of holes
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole

G85 Boring Canned Cycle Feed

Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke

ne
g Pla Plane
tar tin
it ia l S t ar ting
G98 In Initia
l S
Plane
9 9 Rapid
G
ne Y ne Y
R Pla Z R Pla Z

X X
th th
Z Dep Z Dep

G86 Bore and Stop Canned Cycle (Group 09)

F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
L Number of holes if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
R Position of the R plane (position above the part)
X X-axis location of hole
Y Y-axis location of hole
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole

G86 Bore and Stop Canned Cycle

Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke

ne
g Pla
ia lS tar tin g Pla
ne
it tar tin
G98 In ia l S
Init Plane
9 9 Rapid
G
Y Y
ne
nene
lala
Z R Pla Z
R PP
R

X X
th th
Z Dep Z Dep

G87 Bore In and Manual Retract Canned Cycle (Group 09)

F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
L Number of holes if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
R Position of the R plane (position above the part)
X X-axis location of hole
Y Y-axis location of hole
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole
This G code will stop once the hole is bored. At this point the tool is manually jogged out of the hole. The program
will continue when Cycle Start is pressed.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 137

 G87 Bore and Stop and Manual Retract Canned Cycle
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke
Manual Jog
lane
ing P
it ia l Star t ing P
lane
G 98 In it ia l Star t
In Plane
Rapid
G99
Y Y
ne ne
R Pla Z R Pla Z

X X
th th
Z Dep Z Dep

G88 Bore In, Dwell, Manual Retract Canned Cycle (Group 09)
F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
L Number of holes if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
P The dwell time at the bottom of the hole
R Position of the R plane (position above the part)
X X-axis location of hole
Y Y-axis location of hole
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole
This G code will stop once the hole is bored. At this point the tool is manually jogged out of the hole. The program
will continue when Cycle Start is pressed.

G88 Bore and Dwell and Manual Retract Canned Cycle

Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke
Manual Jog
lane
tar ting P Plane
itial S ar ting
G98 In Initia
l S t
Plane
9 9 Rapid
G
ne Y ne Y
R Pla Z R Pla Z

X X
th th
Z Dep Z Dep

G89 Bore In, Dwell, Bore Out Canned Cycle (Group 09)
F Feedrate in inches (or mm) per minute
L Number of holes if G91 (Incremental Mode) is used
P The dwell time at the bottom of the hole
R Position of the R plane (position above the part)
X X-axis location of holes
Y Y-axis location of holes
Z Position of the Z-axis at the bottom of hole

138 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 G89 Bore and Dwell Canned Cycle
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke

ne
g Pla lane
S tar tin ing P
98 In
it ia l
it ia l Star t
G In Plane
Rapid
G99
ne Y ne Y
R Pla Z R Pla Z

X X
th th
Z Dep Z Dep

G90 Absolute Position Commands (Group 03)

G91 Incremental Position Commands (Group 03)
These G codes change the way the axis commands are interpreted. Axes commands following a G90 will move the
axes to the machine coordinate. Axes commands following a G91 will move the axis that distance from the current
point.
G91 is not compatible with G143 (5-Axis Tool Length Compensation).

G90 Canned Cycle (Absolute) G91 Canned Cycle (Incremental)

Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end of stroke

Z=0
R R
Z Y Y
ane Z ane Z Z
R Pl R Pl

X X
pth pth
Z De Z De

G92 Set Work Coordinate Systems Shift Value (Group 00)

This G-code does not move any of the axes; it only changes the values stored as user work offsets. G92 works
differently depending on Setting 33, which selects a FANUC, HAAS, or YASNAC coordinate system.
FANUC or HAAS
If setting 33 is set to Fanuc or Haas, a G92 command shifts all work coordinate systems (G54-59, G110-129) so
that the commanded position becomes the current position in the active work system. G92 is a non-modal.
A G92 command cancels any G52 in effect for the commanded axes. Example: G92 X1.4 cancels the G52 for the
X-axis. The other axes are not affected.
The G92 shift value is displayed at the bottom of the Work Offsets page and may be cleared there if necessary. It is
also cleared automatically after power-up, and any time ZERO RET and AUTO ALL AXES or ZERO SINGLE AXIS
are used.
YASNAC
If setting 33 is set to Yasnac, a G92 command sets the G52 work coordinate system so that the commanded
position becomes the current position in the active work system. The G52 work system then automatically be-
comes active until another work system is selected.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 139

G93 Inverse Time Feed Mode (Group 05)
F Feed Rate (strokes per minute)
This G code specifies that all F (feedrate) values are interpreted as strokes per minute. In other words the F code
value, when divided into 60, is the number of seconds that the motion takes to complete.
G93 is generally used in 4 and 5-axis work. It is a way of translating the linear feedrate (inches/min) into a value
that takes rotary motion into account. In G93 mode, the F value will tell you how many times per minute the tool
move can be repeated.
When G93 is active, the feedrate specification is mandatory for all interpolated motion blocks; i.e., each non-rapid
motion block must have its own feedrate specification.
* Pressing RESET will reset the machine to G94 (Feed per Minute) mode.
* Settings 34 and 79 (4th & 5th axis diameter) not necessary when using 93.
G94 Feed Per Minute Mode (Group 05)
This code deactivates G93 (Inverse Time Feed Mode) and returns the control to Feed Per Minute mode.
G95 Feed per Revolution (Group 05)
When G95 is active; a spindle revolution will result in a travel distance specified by the Feed value. If the Setting 9
Dimensioning is set to Inch, then the feed value F will be taken as inches/rev (set to MM, then the feed will be
taken as mm/Rev). Feed Override and Spindle override will affect the behavior of the machine while G95 is active.
When a spindle override is selected, any change in the spindle speed will result in a corresponding change in feed
in order to keep the chip load uniform. However, if a feed override is selected, then any change in the feed override
will only affect the feed rate and not the spindle.
G98 Canned Cycle Initial Point Return (Group 10)
Using G98, the Z-axis returns to its initial starting point (the Z position in the block before the canned cycle was
commanded) between each X and/or Y location. This allows for positioning up and around areas of the part and/or
clamps and fixtures.
G99 Canned Cycle R Plane Return (Group 10)
Using G99, the Z-axis will stay at the R plane between each X and/or Y location. When obstructions are not in the
path of the tool G99 saves machining time.
G100 Cancel Mirror Image (Group 00)
G101 Enable Mirror Image (Group 00)
X X-axis command
Y Y-axis command
Z Z-axis command
A A-axis command
Programmable mirror imaging is used to turn on or off any the axes. When one is ON, axis motion may be mirrored
(or reversed) around the work zero point. These G codes should be used in a command block without any other G
codes. They do not cause any axis motion. The bottom of the screen will indicate when an axis is mirrored. Also
see Settings 45 through 48 for mirror imaging.
The format for turning Mirror Image on and off is:
G101 X0 = Will turn on mirror imaging for the X axis.
G100 X0 = Will turn off mirror imaging for the X axis.

140 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 XY MIRROR Y MIRROR

Y MIRROR OFF

Mirror Image and Cutter Compensation

When using cutter compensation with mirror imaging, follow this guideline: After turning mirror imaging on or off with
G100 or G101, the next motion block should be to a different work coordinate position than the first one. The
following code is an example:
Correct: Incorrect:
G41 X1.0 Y1.0 G41 X1.0 Y1.0
G01 X2.0 Y2.0 G01 X2.0 Y2.0
G101 X0 G101 X0
G00 Z1.0 G00 Z1.0
G00 X1.0 G00 X2.0 Y2.0
G00 X2.0 Y2.0
G40 G40.
Note: mirroring only one of the X or Y axes will cause the cutter to move along the opposite side of a cut. In
addition, if mirror imaging is selected for only one axis of a circular motion plane (G02, G03) then they are reversed,
and left and right cutter compensation commands (G41, G42) are reversed.
NOTE: When milling a shape with XY motions, turning on MIRROR IMAGE for just one of the X or Y axes will
change climb milling to conventional milling and/or conventional milling to climb milling. As a result, you may not
get the type of cut or finish that was desired. Mirror imaging of both X and Y will eliminate this problem.

G101 Enable Mirror Image

Y Z
X

Mirror X
Original

X0, Y0

Mirror Image and Pocket Milling

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 141

Program Code for Mirror Imaging in the X-Axis:
Program Example Description
%
O3600 (Mirror image X axis)
T1 M06 (Tool #1 is a 0.250" diameter endmill)
G00 G90 G54 X-.4653 Y.052 S5000 M03
G43 H01 Z.1 M08
G01 Z-.25 F5.
F20.
M98 P3601
G00 Z.1
G101 X0.
X-.4653 Y.052
G01 Z-.25 F5.
F20.
M98 P3601
G00 Z.1
G100 X0.
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%
%
O3601 (Contour subprogram)
G01 X-1.2153 Y.552
G03 X-1.3059 Y.528 R.0625
G01 X-1.5559 Y.028
G03 X-1.5559 Y-.028 R.0625
G01 X-1.3059 Y-.528
G03 X-1.2153 Y-.552 R.0625
G01 X-.4653 Y-.052
G03 X-.4653 Y.052 R.0625
M99
%
G102 Programmable Output to RS-232 (Group 00)
X X-axis command
Y Y-axis command
Z Z-axis command
A A-axis command
Commanding a G102 will send the current work coordinates of the axes to the first RS-232 port, from there a
computer is used to record the values sent. Each axis listed in the G102 command block is output to the RS-232
port in the same format as values displayed in a program. A G102 should be used in a command block without any
other G-codes. It will not cause any axis motion, the value for the axes have no effect.
Also see Setting 41 and Setting 25. The values sent out are always the current axis positions referenced to the
current work coordinate system.
This G-code is useful in order to probe a part (also see G31). When the probe touches the part, the next line of
code could be a G102 to send the axes position to a computer in order to store the coordinates. This is referred to
as digitizing a part. Digitizing is taking a tangible part and making an electronic copy of it. Additional software for
the personal computer is required to complete this function.

142 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

G103 Limit Block Buffering (Group 00)
Maximum number of blocks the control will look ahead (Range 0-15), for example:
G103 [P..]
This is commonly referred to, as “Block Look-ahead” which is a term used to describe what the control is doing in
the background during machine motions. The control prepares future blocks (lines of code) ahead of time. While the
current block is executing, the next block has already been interpreted and prepared for continuous motion.
When G103 P0 is programmed, block limiting is disabled. Block limiting is also disabled if G103 appears in a block
without a P address code.
When G103 Pn is programmed, look-ahead is limited to n blocks.
G103 is also useful for debugging macro programs. Macro expressions are done during look-ahead time. For
example, by inserting a G103 P1 into the program, macro expressions will be performed one block ahead of the
currently executing block.
G107 Cylindrical Mapping (Group 00)
X X-axis command
Y Y-axis command
Z Z-axis command
A A-axis command
Q Diameter of cylindrical surface
R Radius of rotary axis
This G code translates all programmed motion occurring in a specified linear axis into the equivalent motion along
the surface of a cylinder (as attached to a rotary axis) See the following figure). It is a Group 0 G code, but its
default operation is subject to Setting 56 (M30 Restores Default G). The G107 command is used to either activate
or deactivate cylindrical mapping.
• Any linear-axis program can be cylindrically mapped to any rotary axis (one at a time).
• An existing linear-axis G-code program can be cylindrically mapped by inserting a G107 command at the
beginning of the program.
• The radius (or diameter) of the cylindrical surface can be redefined, allowing cylindrical mapping to occur
along surfaces of different diameters without having to change the program.
• The radius (or diameter) of the cylindrical surface can either be synchronized with or be independent of
the rotary axis diameter(s) specified in the Settings 34 and 79.
• G107 can also be used to set the default diameter of a cylindrical surface, independently of any
cylindrical mapping that may be in effect.
G107 Description
1) Three address codes can follow a G107: X, Y or Z; A or B; and Q or R.
X, Y, or Z: An X, Y, or Z address specifies the linear axis that will be mapped to the specified rotary axis
(A or B). When one of these linear axes is specified, a rotary axis must also be specified.
A or B: An A or B address identifies which rotary axis holds the cylindrical surface.
Q or R: Q defines the diameter of the cylindrical surface, while R defines the radius. When Q or R is used, a rotary
axis must also be specified. If neither Q nor R is used, then the last G107 diameter is used. If no G107 command
has been issued since power-up, or if the last value specified was zero, then the diameter will be the value in
Setting 34 and/or 79 for this rotary axis. When Q or R is specified, that value will become the new G107 value for
the specified rotary axis.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 143

Cylindrical mapping will also be turned off automatically whenever the G-code program ends, but only if Setting 56
is ON. Pressing the RESET key will turn off any cylindrical mapping that is currently in effect, regardless of the
status of Setting 56.

R .50" 4X

2.00

4.00

Z
X
Y

Example
%
O0079 (G107 TEST)
G00 G40 G49 G80 G90
G28 G91 A0
G90
G00 G54 X1.75 Y0 S5000 M03
G107 A0 Y0 R2. (IF NO R OR Q VALUE, MACHINE WILL USE VALUE IN SETTING 34)
G43 H01 Z0.25
G01 Z-0.25 F25.
G41 D01 X2. Y0.5
G03 X1.5 Y1. R0.5
G01 X-1.5
G03 X-2. Y0.5 R0.5
G01 Y-0.5
G03 X-1.5 Y-1. R0.5
G01 X1.5
G03 X2. Y-0.5 R0.5
G01 Y0.
G40 X1.75
G00 Z0.25
M09
M05
G91 G28 Z0.
G28 Y0.
G90
G107
M30
%
G110-G129 Coordinate System #7-26 (Group 12)
These codes select one of the additional work coordinate systems. All subsequent references to axis positions will
be interpreted in the new coordinate system. Operation of G110 to G129 is the same as G54 to G59.

144 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

G136 Automatic Work Offset Center Measurement (Group 00)
(This G-code is optional and requires a probe)

F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute

I Optional offset distance along X-axis
J Optional offset distance along Y-axis
K Optional offset distance along Z-axis
X Optional X-axis motion command
Y Optional Y-axis motion command
Z Optional Z-axis motion command
Automatic Work Offset Center Measurement (G136) is used to command a probe to set work offsets. A G136 will
feed the axes of the machine in an effort to probe the workpiece with a spindle mounted probe. The axis (axes) will
move until a signal from the probe is received, or the travel limit is reached.
Tool offsets (G41, G42, G43, or G44) must not be active when this function is preformed. The currently active work
coordinate system is set for each axis programmed. Use a G31 cycle with an M75 to set the first point. A G136 will
set the work coordinates to a point at the center of a line between the probed point and the point set with an M75.
This allows the center of the part to be found using two separate probed points.
If an I, J, or K is specified, the appropriate axis work offset is shifted by the amount in the I, J, or K command. This
allows the work offset to be shifted away from where the probe actually contacts the part.
Notes:
Also see G31.
The points probed are offset by the values in Settings 59 through 62.
Use G91 incremental moves when using a G36.
Use the assigned M-codes (M53 & M63) with a dwell to turn the spindle probe on or off.
Example:
M53
G04 P100
M63
Programming example to probe the center of a bore:
O1234 (G136)
M53
G04 P100
M63
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0
Z-17.
G91 G01 Z-1. F20.
G31 X1. F10. M75
G01 X-1.
G136 X-1. F10.
G01 X1.
M53
G04 P100
M63
G00 G90 G53 Z0
M30

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 145

Programming example to probe the center of a part:
O1234 (G136)
M53
G04 P100
M63
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y5.
Z-17.
G91 G01 Z-1. F20.
G31 Y-1. F10. M75
G01 Y1. F20.
G00 Z2.
Y-10.
G01 Z-2. F20.
G136 Y1. F10.
G01 Y-1.
M53
G04 P100
M63
G00 G90 G53 Z0
M30
G141 3D+ Cutter Compensation (Group 07)
X X-axis command
Y Y-axis command
Z Z-axis command
D Cutter Size Selection
I Size of first cutting depth
J Amount to reduce cutting depth each pass
K Minimum depth of cut
This feature performs 3D+ cutter diameter compensation. The form is:
G141 Xnnn Ynnn Znnn Dnnn Innn Jnnn Knnn
Subsequent lines can be of the form:
G01 Fnnn Xnnn Ynnn Znnn Innn Jnnn Knnn Or
G00 Xnnn Ynnn Znnn Innn Jnnn Knnn
The 3D+ G141 cutter compensation command is not just for 5-axis work. Any CAD system can output the I, J, K
values to shift the tool by the amount in the Offset, even if the motions are only in 2 or 3 axes. Only G00 and G01
can use G141 cutter compensation. G93 Inverse time is usually used with G141. The Dnn code selects which
radius or diameter offset to use. The I, J, and K values give the direction in which cutter compensation is applied.

146 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

G141 Example:
T1 M06
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 B0
G141 D01 X0.Y0. Z0. (RAPID POSIT WITH 3 AX C COMP)
G01 G93 X.01 Y.01 Z.01 I.1 J.2 K.9747 F300. (FEED INV TIME)
X.02 Y.03 Z.04 I.15 J.25 K.9566 F300.
X.02 Y.055 Z.064 I.2 J.3 K.9327 F300
.
.
.
X2.345 Y.1234 Z-1.234 I.25 J.35 K.9028 F200. (LAST MOTION)
G94 F50. (CANCEL G93)
G0 G90 G40 Z0 (Rapid to Zero, Cancel Cutter Comp)
X0 Y0
M30
G143 5-Axis Tool Length Compensation + (Group 08)
(This G-code is optional; it only applies to machines on which all rotary motion is movement of the cutting tool.)
This G code allows the user to correct for variations in the length of cutting tools without the need for a CAD/CAM
processor. An H code is required to select the tool length from the existing length compensation tables. A G49 or
H00 command will cancel 5-axis compensation. For G143 to work correctly there must be two rotary axes, A and
B. G90, absolute positioning mode must be active (G91 cannot be used). Work position 0,0 for the A and B axes
must be so the tool is parallel with Z-axis motion.
The intention behind G143 is to compensate for the difference in tool length between the originally posted tool and
a substitute tool. Using G143 allows you to run the program without having to repost a new tool length.
G143 tool length compensation works only with rapid (G00) and linear feed (G01) motions; no other feed functions
(G02 or G03) or canned cycles (drilling, tapping, etc.) can be used. For a positive tool length, the Z-axis would
move upward (in the + direction). If one of X, Y or Z is not programmed, there will be no motion of that axis, even if
the motion of A or B produces a new tool length vector. Thus a typical program would use all 5 axes on one block of
data. G143 may affect commanded motion of all axes in order to compensate for the A and B axes.
Inverse feed mode (G93) is recommended, when using G143. An example follows:
T1 M06
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 B0
G143 H01 X0. Y0. Z0. A-20. B-20. (RAPID POSIT W. 5AX COMP)
G01 G93 X.01 Y.01 Z.01 A-19.9 B-19.9 F300. (FEED INV TIME)
X0.02 Y0.03 Z0.04 A-19.7 B-19.7 F300.
X0.02 Y0.055 Z0.064 A-19.5 B-19.6 F300
X2.345 Y.1234 Z-1.234 A-4.127 B-12.32 F200. (LAST MOTION)
G94 F50. (CANCEL G93)
G0 G90 G49 Z0 (RAPID TO ZERO, CANCEL 5 AXS COMP)
X0 Y0
M30

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 147

G150 General Purpose Pocket Milling (Group 00)
D Cutter size selection
F Feedrate
I X-axis cut increment (must be a positive value)
J Y-axis cut increment (must be a positive value)
K Finishing cut allowance (must be a positive value)
L Optional repetition count
P Subroutine number defining outside of shape
Q Incremental Z-axis cut depth per pass (must be a positive value)
R R plane position
S Optional spindle speed
X X position of starting hole
Y Y position of starting hole
Z Final depth of the pocket
This G-code provides for general-purpose pocket milling. A series of motions in either the X or Y-axis will be used to
cut out the specified shape (usually a subroutine), followed by a finishing pass to clean up the outer edge. Either I
or J must be specified which is the shift amount or cutter overlap. If I is used, the pocket is cut from a series of
strokes in the X-axis. If J is used, the pocket is cut from a series of strokes in the Y-axis. The finishing pass is
width K. There is no finishing pass in the Z depth. The R value should be specified even if it is zero (R0); or the last
value specified for R will be used.

G150 Advanced Pocket Milling

Y
Z
X

I>0 J>0
= Starting hole

Multiple passes over the area can be selected to control the depth of the cut. At least one pass is made over the
pocket and multiple passes are made after feeding down by amount Q until the Z depth is reached. If an L count is
specified, the entire block is repeated and an incremental X or Y (G91) will reposition the pocket.
The subroutine must define a closed area by a series of G01, G02, or G03 motions in X and Y. This subroutine
must consist of less than 40 strokes.
In order to clear the tool on entry, pocket milling should begin from a hole, which has been previously drilled to the
Z depth. The G150 block must specify this hole location with X and Y.
If a K value is specified, the finishing pass is taken along the outside edge but is done at the full pocket depth, and
will cut inside the pocket by the value of K.

148 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Example
O0100 (G150 Pocket example)
G58 G00 G90 X3.25 Y4.5 S1200 M03 (Starting hole position)
T1 M06 (T1 cuts entry for endmill)
G83 R.1 Q0.5 Z-2. F20.
T2 M06 (Endmill T2 cuts pocket 0.4 dia cutter, two passes to Z
depth leave 0.01" for finish pass)
G150 G41 F15. D02 J0.35 K.01 Q0.5 R.1 X3.25 Y4.5 Z-2. P200
G40 X3.25 Y4.5 (Start Point of Pocket)
G28
M30
O0200 (G150 Pocket subroutine)
G01 Y7. (First move of Subroutine)
X1.5
G03 Y5.25 R0.875
G01 Y2.25
G03 Y0.5 R0.875
G01 X5.
G03 Y2.25 R0.875
G01 Y5.25
G03 Y7. R0.875 (Return to first Move of Subroutine)
G01 X3.25 (Return X-Axis to main pocket Start Point)
M99 (Return from subroutine)
Example
Absolute Subprogram Incremental Subprogram
% %
O0500 O0500
G01 Y2.0 G01 G91 Y2.0
X-2.0 X-2.0
Y-2.0 Y-4.0
X2.0 X4.0
Y2.0 Y4.0
X0 G90
M99 M99
% %

Square Pocket
G150 General Purpose Pocket Milling

2 1, 6 5

XO, YO

3 4
Tool #1 is a .500
4 diameter end mill

Pocket milling exercise for G150 operation.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 149

 Main Program Subroutine
4.0 x 4.0 x 0.500 DP. Square Pocket %
% O00511 (O1000 Subroutine)
O1000 G01 Y2.
T1 M06 (Tool #1 is a 0.500" diameter endmill) X-2.
G90 G54 G00 X0 Y0 Y-2.
S2000 M03 X2.
G43 H01 Z 0.1 M08 Y2.
G01 Z0.01 F30. X0
G150 P511 Z-0.5 Q0.25 R0.01 J0.3 K.01 G41 D01 F10. M99
G40 G01 X0 Y0 %
G00 Z1. M09
G28 G91 Y0 Z0
M30
%

Square Island
G150 Pocket Milling (Square Island)

4 3

7 8
12 11
6
5 6
10 9

13 1, 14 2
Tool #1 is a .500
diameter end mill
XO, YO 6

Square island programming exercise using G150.

Main Program Subroutine

% %
O1000 O0500 (O1000 Subroutine)
T1 M06 (Tool is a 0.500" diameter endmill) G01 Y1.
G90 G54 G00 X2. Y2. X7.
S2500 M03 Y7.
G43 H01 Z0.1 M08 X1.
G01 Z0.01 F30. Y3.75
G150 P500 X2. Y2. Z-0.5 Q0.5 R0.01 I0.3 K0.01 G41 D01 F10. X3.5
G40 G01 X2. Y2. Y4.5
G00 Z1.0 M09 X4.5
G28 G91 Y0 Z0 Y3.5
M30 X3.5
% Y4.25
X1.
Y1.
X2.
M99
%

150 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Round Island
G150 Pocket Milling (Round Island)

4, 10 9 3

8
6 5 6, 7

11 1, 12 2
Tool #1 is a .500
diameter end mill
6
XO, YO

Round Island Programming Exercise Using G150.

Main Program Subroutine

% %
O00188 O00531 (O00188 Subroutine)
T1 M06 G01 Y1.
G90 G54 G00 X2. Y2. X7.
S2500 M03 Y7.
G43 H01 Z0.1 M08 X1.
G01 Z0 F30. Y4.
G150 P531 X2. Y2. Z-0.5 Q0.5 R0.01 I0.3 K0.01 G41 D01 F10. X3.
G40 G01 X2. Y2. G02 I1.
G00 Z1. M09 X4. Y5. R1.
G28 G91 Y0 Z0 G01 Y7
M30 X1.
% Y1.
X2.
M99
%

G153 5-Axis High Speed Peck Drilling Canned Cycle (Group 09)
E Specifies the distance from the start position to the bottom of the hole
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
I Size of first cutting depth (must be a positive value)
J Amount to reduce cutting depth each pass (must be a positive value)
K Minimum depth of cut (must be a positive value)
L Number of repeats
P Pause at end of last peck, in seconds
Q The cut-in value (must be a positive value)
A A-axis tool starting position
B B-axis tool starting position
X X-axis tool starting position
Y Y-axis tool starting position
Z Z-axis tool starting position

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 151

 G153 5-Axis High Speed Peck Drilling With I, J & K Options G153 5-Axis High Speed Peck Drilling With K & Q Options

Setting #22 Setting #22

E E

I1=I Q
I2= I1- J Q
I3=I2 -J Q

This is a high-speed peck cycle where the retract distance is set by Setting 22.
If I, J, and K are specified, a different operating mode is selected. The first pass will cut in by amount I, each
succeeding cut will be reduced by amount J, and the minimum cutting depth is K. If P is used, the tool will pause
at the bottom of the hole for that amount of time.
Note that the same dwell time applies to all subsequent blocks that do not specify a dwell time.
Setting 52 also changes the way G153 works when it returns to the start position. Most programmers set the R
plane well above the cut to ensure that the chip-clearing motion actually allows the chips to get out of the hole, but
this causes wasted motion when first drilling through this “empty” space. If Setting 52 is set to the distance
required to clear chips, the start position can be put much closer to the part being drilled. When the chip-clearing
move to the start position occurs, the Z-axis will be moved above the start position by the amount given in this
setting.

G154 Select Work Coordinates P1-P99 (Group 12)

This feature provides 99 additional work offsets. G154 with a P value from 1 to 99 will activate the additional work
offsets. For example G154 P10 will select work offset 10 from the list of additional work offset. Note that G110 to
G129 refer to the same work offsets as the G154 P1 through P20; they can be selected by using either method.
When a G154 work offset is active, the heading in the upper right work offset will show the G154 P value.

152 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

G154 work offsets format
#14001-#14006 G154 P1 (also #7001-#7006 and G110)
#14021-#14026 G154 P2 (also #7021-#7026 and G111)
#14041-#14046 G154 P3 (also #7041-#7046 and G112)
#14061-#14066 G154 P4 (also #7061-#7066 and G113)
#14081-#14086 G154 P5 (also #7081-#7086 and G114)
#14101-#14106 G154 P6 (also #7101-#7106 and G115)
#14121-#14126 G154 P7 (also #7121-#7126 and G116)
#14141-#14146 G154 P8 (also #7141-#7146 and G117)
#14161-#14166 G154 P9 (also #7161-#7166 and G118)
#14181-#14186 G154 P10 (also #7181-#7186 and G119)
#14201-#14206 G154 P11 (also #7201-#7206 and G120)
#14221-#14221 G154 P12 (also #7221-#7226 and G121)
#14241-#14246 G154 P13 (also #7241-#7246 and G122)
#14261-#14266 G154 P14 (also #7261-#7266 and G123)
#14281-#14286 G154 P15 (also #7281-#7286 and G124)
#14301-#14306 G154 P16 (also #7301-#7306 and G125)
#14321-#14326 G154 P17 (also #7321-#7326 and G126)
#14341-#14346 G154 P18 (also #7341-#7346 and G127)
#14361-#14366 G154 P19 (also #7361-#7366 and G128)
#14381-#14386 G154 P20 (also #7381-#7386 and G129)
#14401-#14406 G154 P21
#14421-#14426 G154 P22
#14441-#14446 G154 P23
#14461-#14466 G154 P24
#14481-#14486 G154 P25
#14501-#14506 G154 P26
#14521-#14526 G154 P27
#14541-#14546 G154 P28
#14561-#14566 G154 P29
#14581-#14586 G154 P30
#14781-#14786 G154 P40
#14981-#14986 G154 P50
#15181-#15186 G154 P60
#15381-#15386 G154 P70
#15581-#15586 G154 P80
#15781-#15786 G154 P90
#15881-#15886 G154 P95
#15901-#15906 G154 P96
#15921-#15926 G154 P97
#15941-#15946 G154 P98
#15961-#15966 G154 P99
G155 5-Axis Reverse Tap Canned Cycle (Group 09)
G155 only performs floating taps. G174 is available for 5-axis reverse rigid tapping.
E Specifies the distance from the start position to the bottom of the hole
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
L Number of repeats
A A-axis tool starting position
B B-axis tool starting position
X X-axis tool starting position
Y Y-axis tool starting position
Z Z-axis tool starting position
S Spindle Speed

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 153

A specific X, Y, Z, A, B position must be programmed before the canned cycle is commanded. This position is used
as the “Initial Start position”.
You do not need to start the spindle CCW before this canned cycle. The control does this automatically.
G155 5-Axis Reverse Tapping Canned Cycle

E E

G98 Start
Position Start Position
G99 Rapid Plane
G98 / G99 Z Axis position
between holes
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end
of Stroke

G161 5-Axis Drill Canned Cycle (Group 09)

E Specifies the distance from the start position to the bottom of the hole
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
L Number of repeats
A A-axis tool starting position
B B-axis tool starting position
X X-axis tool starting position
Y Y-axis tool starting position
Z Z-axis tool starting position

G161 5-Axis Drill Canned Cycle

E E

G98 Start
Position Start Position
G99 Rapid Position

G98 / G99 Z Axis position

between holes
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end
of Stroke

A specific X, Y, Z, A, B position must be programmed before the canned cycle is commanded. This position is used
as the “Initial Start position”.

G162 5-Axis Spot Drill Canned Cycle (Group 09)

E Specifies the distance from the start position to the bottom of the hole
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
L Number of repeats
P The dwell time at the bottom of the hole
A A-axis tool starting position
B B-axis tool starting position
X X-axis tool starting position
Y Y-axis tool starting position
Z Z-axis tool starting position

154 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

A specific X, Y, Z, A, B position must be programmed before the canned cycle is commanded. This position is used
as the “Initial Start position”.

G162 5-Axis Spot Drill Canned Cycle

E E

G98 Start
Position Start Position
G99 Rapid Position
G98 / G99 Z Axis position
between holes
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end
of Stroke

G163 5-Axis Normal Peck Drilling Canned Cycle (Group 09)

E Specifies the distance from the start position to the bottom of the hole
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
I Optional size of first cutting depth
J Optional amount to reduce cutting depth each pass
K Optional minimum depth of cut
L Number of repeats
P Optional pause at end of last peck, in seconds
Q The cut-in value, always incremental
A A-axis tool starting position
B B-axis tool starting position
X X-axis tool starting position
Y Y-axis tool starting position
Z Z-axis tool starting position
A specific X, Y, Z, A, B position must be programmed before the canned cycle is commanded. This position is used
as the “Initial Start position”.
If I, J, and K are specified the first pass will cut in by amount I, each succeeding cut will be reduced by amount J,
and the minimum cutting depth is K.
A P value is used the tool will pause at the bottom of the hole after the last peck for that amount of time. The
following example will peck several times and dwell for one and a half seconds at the end:
G163 Z-0.62 F15. R0.1 Q0.175 P1.5.
Note that the same dwell time applies to all subsequent blocks that do not specify a dwell time.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 155

 Setting #22 Setting #22

E E

Setting #52
Feed
Rapid Move
I1=I Q Begin or end
I2= I1- J of stroke
Q
I3=I2 -J Q

Setting 52 also changes the way G163 works when it returns to the start position. Usually the R plane is set well
above the cut to ensure that the peck motion allows the chips to get out of the hole. This wastes time as the drill
starts by drilling “empty” space. If Setting 52 is set to the distance required to clear chips, the start position can
be put much closer to the part being drilled. When the chip-clearing move to the start position occurs, the Z axis
will be moved above the start position by the amount given in this setting.

G164 5-Axis Tapping Canned Cycle (Group 09)

G164 only performs floating taps. G174/184 is available for 5-axis rigid tapping.
E Specifies the distance from the start position to the bottom of the hole
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
L Number of repeats
A A-axis tool starting position
B B-axis tool starting position
X X-axis tool starting position
Y Y-axis tool starting position
Z Z-axis tool starting position
S Spindle Speed
G164 5-Axis Tapping Canned Cycle

E E

G98 Start
Start Position
Position
G99 Rapid Plane
G98 / G99 Z Axis position
between holes
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end
of Stroke

A specific X, Y, Z, A, B position must be programmed before the canned cycle is commanded. This position is used
as the “Initial Start position”.
You do not need to start the spindle CW before this canned cycle. The control does this automatically.

156 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

G165 5-Axis Boring Canned Cycle (Group 09)
E Specifies the distance from the start position to the bottom of the hole
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
L Number of repeats
A A-axis tool starting position
B B-axis tool starting position
X X-axis tool starting position
Y Y-axis tool starting position
Z Z-axis tool starting position
G165 5-Axis Boring Canned Cycle

E E

G98 Start
Start Position
Position
G99 Rapid Plane
G98 / G99 Z Axis position
between holes
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end
of Stroke

A specific X, Y, Z, A, B position must be programmed before the canned cycle is commanded. This position is used
as the “Initial Start position”.

G166 5-Axis Bore and Stop Canned Cycle (Group 09)

E Specifies the distance from the start position to the bottom of the hole
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
L Number of repeats
A A-axis tool starting position
B B-axis tool starting position
X X-axis tool starting position
Y Y-axis tool starting position
Z Z-axis tool starting position
G166 5-Axis Bore Stop Canned Cycle

E E

G98 Start
Start Position
Position
G99 Rapid Plane
G98 / G99 Z Axis position
between holes
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end
of Stroke

A specific X, Y, Z, A, B position must be programmed before the canned cycle is commanded. This position is used
as the “Initial Start position”.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 G Codes 157

G169 5-Axis Bore and Dwell Canned Cycle (Group 09)
E Specifies the distance from the start position to the bottom of the hole
F Feedrate in inches (mm) per minute
L Number of repeats
P The dwell time at the bottom of the hole
A A-axis tool starting position
B B-axis tool starting position
X X-axis tool starting position
Y Y-axis tool starting position
Z Z-axis tool starting position
G169 5-Axis Bore and Dwell Canned Cycle

E E

G98 Start
Start Position
Position
G99 Rapid Plane
G98 / G99 Z Axis position
between holes
Feed
Rapid Move
Begin or end
of Stroke

A specific X, Y, Z, A, B position must be programmed before the canned cycle is commanded. This position is used
as the “Initial Start position”.

G174 CCW Non-Vertical Rigid Tap (Group 00)

G184 CW Non-Vertical Rigid Tap (Group 00)
F Feedrate in inches per minute
X X position at bottom of hole
Y Y position at bottom of hole
Z Z position at bottom of hole
S Spindle Speed
A specific X, Y, Z, A, B position must be programmed before the canned cycle is commanded. This position is used
as the “Start position”.
This G code is used to perform rigid tapping for non-vertical holes. It may be used with a right-angle head to perform
rigid tapping in the X or Y axis on a three-axis mill, or to perform rigid tapping along an arbitrary angle with a five-
axis mill. The ratio between the feedrate and spindle speed must be precisely the thread pitch being cut.
You do not need to start the spindle before this canned cycle; the control does this automatically.

G187 Accuracy Control (Group 00)

The G187 code is used to select the accuracy of machined corners. The format for using G187 is G187 Ennnn,
where nnnn is the desired accuracy. Refer to Setting 85 “Max Corner Rounding” for more information. The initial
value of G187 is Setting 85.
Program G187 as follows:
G187 E0.01 (to set value)
G187 (to revert to Setting 85 value)

G188 Get Program From PST (Group 00)

Calls the parts program for the loaded pallet based on the Pallet Schedule Table entry for the pallet.

158 G Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 M CODES (MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS)
M Code Introduction
M-Codes are non axes moving commands for the machine. The format for an M code is the letter “M” followed by
two numbers, for example M03.
Only one M code may be programmed per line of code. All M codes take effect at the end of the block.
M00 Stop Program
The M00 code is used to stop a program. It stops the axes, spindle, turns off the coolant (including Through Spindle
Coolant). The next block (block after the M00) will be highlighted when viewed in the program editor. Pressing Cycle
Start will continue program operation from the highlighted block.
M01 Optional Program Stop
M01 works the same as M00, except the Optional Stop feature must be on.
M02 Program End
The M02 code is used to end a program. Note that the most common way of ending a program is with an M30.
M03 / M04 / M05 Spindle Commands
M03 turns spindle on in the forward direction
M04 turns spindle on in the reverse direction
M05 Stops the spindle
Spindle speed is controlled with an S address code, for example, S5000 will command a spindle speed of
5000RPM.
Note: It is not recommended to run an M04 command with Through-Spindle Coolant (TSC).
M06 Tool Change
The M06 code is used to change tools, for example M06 T12 this will put tool 12 into the spindle. If the spindle is
running, the spindle and coolant (including TSC) will be stopped by the M06 command.
M08 Coolant On / M09 Coolant Off
The M08 code will turn on the optional coolant supply and an M09 code will turn it off.
Also see M34/M35 for optional P-Cool and M88/89 for optional Through-the-spindle coolant.
Note: Coolant status is checked only at the start of a program, so a low coolant condition will not stop a program
that is already running.
M10 Engage 4th Axis Brake/ M11 Release 4th Axis Brake
These codes will apply and release the brake to the optional 4th axis. The brake is normally engaged, so the M10
command is only required when an M11 has been used to release the brake.
M12 Engage 5th Axis Brake / M13 Release 5th Axis Brake
These codes will apply and release the brake to the optional 5th axis. The brake is normally engaged, so the M12
command is only required when an M13 has been used to release the brake.
M16 Tool Change
This M code behaves the same as M06. However M06 is the preferred method for commanding tool changes.
M17 Unclamp APC Pallet and Open APC Door/ M18 Clamp Pallet and Close Door
This M-code is used on vertical machining centers with pallet changers. It is used as a maintenance/test function
only. Pallet changes should be commanded with an M50 command only.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 M Codes 159

M19 Orient Spindle (P and R values are an optional feature)
The M19 code is used to adjust the spindle to a fixed position.
The spindle will only orient to the zero position without the optional M19 spindle orient feature
The optional Orient Spindle function allows P and R address codes. For example, M19 P270 will orient the spindle
to 270 degrees. The R-value allows the programmer to specify up to four decimal places, for example, M19
R123.4567.
M21-M28 Optional User M Function with M-Fin
The M codes M21 through M28 are optional for user relays; each M code will activate one of the optional relays.
The Reset button will terminate any operation that is waiting for a relay-activated accessory to finish.
M-Code Relays
These outputs can be used to activate probes, auxiliary pumps or clamping devices etc. The
auxiliary devices are electrically connected to the terminal strip for the individual relay. The
terminal strip has a position for, Normally Open (NO), Normally Closed (NC) and Common
(COM).

Main I/O PCB M-Code Relays Optional M-Code Relay Board

(Mounted above main I/O PCB)
Optional 8M-Code Relays
Additional M-Code relay functions can be purchased in banks of 8. A maximum of two 8M-
code relay boards can be installed in the machine, for a total of 16 additional outputs.
A total of 4 banks of 8 relays are possible in the Haas system these are numbered from 0-3.
Banks 0 and 1 are internal to the main I/O PCB. Bank 1 includes the M21-25 relays at the top
of the IOPCB. Bank 2 addresses the first 8M option PCB. Bank 3 addresses the second 8M
option PCB.
NOTE: Bank 3 may be used for some Haas installed options and may not be available.
Contact the Haas factory for more details.
Only one bank of outputs may be addressable with M-codes at a time. This is controlled by
parameter 352 “Relay Bank Select”. Relays in the non-activated banks are only accessible
with macro variables. Parameter 352 is shipped set to “1” as standard. The M-fin and probe
cables (if equipped) are moved to the first 8M option PCB and parameter 352 is set to “2” when
an 8M option is installed.
NOTE: Some or all of the M21-25 on the I/O PCB may be used for factory-installed options.
Inspect the relays for existing wires to determine which have been used. Contact the Haas
factory for more details.
M30 Program End and Rewind
The M30 code is used to stop a program. It stops the spindle and turns off the coolant (including TSC) and the
program cursor will return to the start of the program. M30 cancels tool length offsets.

160 M Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

M31 Chip Conveyor Forward / M33 Chip Conveyor Stop
M31 starts the optional chip conveyor motor in the forward direction; the direction that moves the chips out of the
machine. The conveyor will not turn if the door is open. It is recommended that the chip auger be used intermit-
tently. Continuous operation will cause the motor to overheat.
M33 Stops Conveyor motion.
M34 Coolant Increment / M35 Coolant Decrement

M34 moves the optional P-Cool spigot one position away from the current position (farther from home).
M35 moves the coolant spigot one position towards the home position.
Do not rotate the coolant spigot by hand. Serious motor damage will occur.
M36 Pallet Part Ready
Used on machines with pallet changers. This M code delays the pallet change until the Part Ready button is
depressed. A pallet change will occur after the pallet ready button is pressed (and the doors are closed). For
example:
Onnnnn (program number)
M36 (Flash “Part Ready” light, wait until the button is pressed)
M50 (Perform pallet change after Part Ready button is pressed)
(Part Program)
M30
M39 Rotate Tool Turret
Tool changes should be commanded using M06. M39 is not normally required but is useful for diagnostic
purposes or to recover from a tool changer crash.
The M39 code is used to rotate the side mount tool changer without performing a tool change. The desired tool
pocket number (Tn) must be programmed previous to the M39.
M41 / M42 Low / High Gear Override
On machines with a transmission the M41 command is used to hold the machine in low gear and an M42 will hold
the machine in high gear. Normally the spindle speed (Snnn) will determine which gear the transmission should be
in.
M50 Execute Pallet Change
Used with a P value or pallet schedule table to perform a pallet change. Also see the pallet changer section.
M51-M58 Set Optional User M Codes
The M51 through M58 codes are optional for user interfaces. They will activate one of the relays and leave it active.
Use M61-M68 to turn these off. The RESET key will turn off all of these relays.
See M21-M28 for details on the M-Code relays.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 M Codes 161

M59 Set Output Relay
This M code turns on a relay. An example of its usage is M59 Pnn, where “nn” is the number of the relay being
turned on. An M59 command can be used to turn on any of the discrete output relays in the range from 1100 to
1155. When using Macros, M59 P1103 does the same thing as using the optional macro command #1103=1,
except that it is processed at the end of the line of code.
M61-M68 Clear Optional User M Codes
The M61 through M68 codes are optional for user interfaces. They will turn off one of the relays. Use M51-M58 to
turn these on. The Reset key will turn off all of these relays.
See M21-M28 for details on the M-Code relays.
M69 Clear Output Relay
This M code turns off a relay. An example of its usage is M69 Pnn, where “nn” is the number of the relay being
turned off. An M69 command can be used to turn off any of the output relays in the range from 1100 to 1155. When
using Macros, M69 P1103 does the same thing as using the optional macro command #1103=0, except that it is
processed at the end of the line of code.
M75 Set G35 or G136 Reference Point
This code is used to set the reference point for G35 and G136 commands. It must be used after a probing function.
M76 / M77 Control Display Inactive / Control Display Active
These codes are used to disable and enable the screen display. This M-Code is useful during the running of a large
complicated program as refreshing the screen takes processing power that otherwise may be necessary to com-
mand the moves of the machine.
M78 Alarm if Skip Signal Found
This M-code is used with a probe. An M78 will generate an alarm if a programmed skip function (G31, G36 or G37)
receives a signal from the probe. This is used when a skip signal is not expected, and may indicate a probe crash.
This code can be placed on the same line as the skip G-code or in any block after.
M79 Alarm if Skip Signal Not Found
This M-code is used with a probe. An M79 will generate an alarm if a programmed skip function (G31, G36, or G37)
did not receive a signal from the probe. This is used when the lack of the skip signal means a probe positioning
error. This code can be placed on the same line as the skip G-code or in any block after.

M80 / M81 Auto Door Open / Close

The M80 opens the Auto Door and the M81 closes the close the Auto Door. The control pendant will beep when the
door is in motion.

M82 Tool Unclamp

This code is used to release the tool from the spindle. It is used as a maintenance/test function only. Tool changes
should be done using an M06.

M83 / M84 Auto Air Gun On / Off

An M83 will turn the Air Gun on, and an M84 will turn it off. Additionally, an M83 Pnnn (where nnn is in millisec-
onds) will turn it on for the specified time, then off automatically. The Auto Air Gun is also manual toggled on and off
by pressing “Shift” followed by the “Coolant” button.

162 M Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

M86 Tool Clamp
This code will clamp a tool into the spindle. It is used as a maintenance/test function only. Tool changes should be
done using an M06.
M88 Through-Spindle Coolant On / M89 Through-Spindle Coolant Off
The M88 code is used to turn on the through-spindle coolant (TSC) option, an M89 turns the coolant off.
Proper tooling, with a through-hole, must be in place before using the TSC system. Failure to use proper tooling will
flood the spindle head with coolant and void the warranty.
Running an M04 (Spindle Reverse) command with TSC on is not recommended.
Sample Program
Note: The M88 command should be before the spindle speed command.
T1 M6; (TSC Coolant Through Drill)
G90 G54 G00 X0 Y0;
G43 H06 Z.5;
M88; (Turn TSC on)
S4400 M3;
G81 Z-2.25 F44. R.03;
M89 G80; (Turn TSC off)
G91 G28 Z0;
M30;
M95 Sleep Mode Sleep
Sleep mode is essentially a long dwell (pause). Sleep mode can be used when the user wants the machine to
begin warming itself up so it can be ready for use upon the operators arrival. The format of the M95 command is:
M95 (hh:mm)
The comment immediately following the M95 must contain the hours and minutes that the machine is to sleep for.
For example, if the current time were 6 p.m. and the user wanted the machine to sleep until 6:30 a.m. the next day,
the following command would be used:
M95 (12:30)
The line(s) following the M95 should be axis moves and spindle warm-up commands.
M96 Jump If No Input
P Program block to go to when conditional test is met
Q Discrete input variable to test (0 to 63)
This code is used to test a discrete input for 0 (off) status. This is useful for checking the status of automatic work
holding or other accessories that will generate a signal for the control. The Q value must be in the range 0 to 63,
which corresponds to the inputs found on the diagnostic display (The upper left input is 0 and the lower right is
input 63. When this program block is executed and the input signal specified by Q has a value of 0, the program
block Pnnnn is performed (the Pnnnn line must be in the same program).
M96 Example:
N05 M96 P5 Q8 (Test input #5, Door Switch, until closed);
N10 (Start of program loop);
.
. (Program that machines part);
.
N85 M21 (Execute an external user function)
N90 M96 P10 Q27 (Loop to N10 if spare input [#27] is 0);
N95 M30 (If spare input is 1 then end program);

96-8000 rev L June 2005 M Codes 163

M97 Local Sub-Program Call
This code is used to call a subroutine referenced by a line number (N) within the same program. A code is required
and must match a line number within the same program. This is useful for simple subroutines within a program;
does not require a separate program. The subroutine must end with an M99. An Lnn code in the M97 block will
repeat the subroutine call that nn times.
M97 Example:
D0
M97 P1000 L2 (L2 command will cause the program to run the N1000 line twice)
D1
M97 P1000
M30
N1000 G00 G90 G55 X0 Y0 (N line that will run after M97 P1000 is run)
S500 M03
G43 H01 Z1.
Z-.5
G01 G41 X.5 F100.
G03 YI-.5
G01 X0 G40
Z1. F50.
G91 G28 Z0
G90
M99
M98 Sub Program Call
This code is used to call a subroutine, the format is M98 Pnnnn (Pnnnn is the number of the program being called).
The subprogram must be in the program list, and it must contain an M99 to return to the main program. An Lnn
count can be put on the line containing the M98 and will cause the subroutine to be called nn times before continu-
ing to the next block.
O0001 (Main Program number)
M98 P100 L4; (Call Sub-program, Sub-program Number, Loop 4 Times)
M30 (End of program)

O0100 (SUB-PROGAM NUMBER)

.
.

M99

164 M Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005

M99 Sub-Program Return or Loop
This code is used to return to the main program from a subroutine or macro, the format is M99 Pnnnn (Pnnnn is the
line in the main program to return to). It will cause the main program to loop back to the beginning without stopping
when used in the main program.
Programming Notes - You can simulate Fanuc behavior by using the following code:
calling program: Haas Fanuc
O0001 O0001
... ...
N50 M98 P2 N50 M98 P2
N51 M99 P100 ...
... N100 (continue here)
N100 (continue here) ...
... M30
M30
subroutine: O0002 O0002
M99 M99 P100
M99 With Macros - If the machine is equipped with the optional macros, you can use a global variable and specify
a block to jump to by adding #nnn=dddd in the subroutine and then using M99 P#nnn after the subroutine call.
M109 Interactive User Input
This M code allows a G-code program to place a short prompt (message) on the screen. A macro variable in the
range 500 through 599 must be specified by a P code. The program can check for any character that can be
entered from the keyboard by comparing with the decimal equivalent of the ASCII character (G47, Text Engraving,
has a list of ASCII characters).
The following sample program will ask the user a Yes or No question, then wait for either a “Y” or an “N” to be
entered. All other characters will be ignored.
N1 #501= 0. (Clear the variable)
M109 P501 (Sleep 1 min?)
N5 IF [ #501 EQ 0. ] GOTO5 (Wait for a key)
IF [ #501 EQ 89. ] GOTO10 (Y)
IF [ #501 EQ 78. ] GOTO20 (N)
GOTO1 (Keep checking)
N10 (A Y was entered)
M95 (00:01)
GOTO30
N20 (An N was entered)
G04 P1. (Do nothing for 1 second)
N30 (Stop)
M30
The following sample program will ask the user to select a number, then wait for a 1, 2 or a 3 to be entered. All
other characters will be ignored.
O00234 (Sample program)
N1 #501= 0. (Clear the variable)
M109 P501 (Pick 1, 2 or 3:)
N5 IF [ #501 EQ 0. ] GOTO5 (Wait for a key)
IF [ #501 EQ 49. ] GOTO10 (1)
IF [ #501 EQ 50. ] GOTO20 (2)
IF [ #501 EQ 51. ] GOTO30 (3)
GOTO1 (Keep checking)
N10 (A 1 was entered)
M95 (00:01)
GOTO30
N20 (A 2 was entered)
G04 P5. (Do nothing for 5 seconds)
N30 (A 3 was entered)
M30

96-8000 rev L June 2005 M Codes 165

166 M Codes 96-8000 rev L June 2005
 SETTINGS

Introduction
Settings are machine conditions that have an affect on machine operation. In general, settings allow the operator or
setup person to lock out, turn on or specify functions.
The settings are organized into pages of similar groups rather than numeric order. This puts associated settings on
the same displayed page.
Changing Settings
Press the “SETNG/GRAPH” button to enter the setting pages Use the page up/down buttons scroll through the
setting pages, use the vertical cursor keys to move to the desired setting. Or enter a setting number and press the
down arrow button to go directly to that setting.
There are two types of Settings, the first has built-in selections that can be scrolled through and then selected by
pressing Write (Use the left/right arrow keys to scroll through the selections). The second type expect to have a
value entered. There is help text at the top of the screen that advises of the type of setting.
In some cases the Emergency Stop button must be pressed in order to change a setting. The message “Servo is
On” will display as a reminder that the Emergency stop button is not pressed.
Setting List
1 Auto Power Off Timer
This setting is used to power-down the machine when it has not been used for some time. The value entered in this
setting is the number of minutes the machine will remain idle until it is powered down. The machine will not be
powered down while a program is running, and the time (number of minutes) will start back at zero anytime buttons
is pressed or the jog handle is used. The auto-off sequence gives the operator a 15-second warning before power
down, at which time pressing any button will stop the power down.
2 Power Off At M30
Powers down the machine at the end of a program (M30) if this setting is set to “On”. The machine will give the
operator a 30-second warning once an M30 is reached; pressing any button will interrupt the sequence.
4 Graphics Rapid Path
This setting changes the way a program is viewed in the Graphics mode. When it is OFF, rapid (non-cutting tool
motions do not leave a path. When it is ON, rapid tool motions leave a dashed line on the screen.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Settings 167

5 Graphics Drill Point
This setting changes the way a program is viewed in Graphics mode. When it is ON, motion in the Z-axis will leave
an X mark on the screen. When it is OFF, no additional marks are shown on the graphics display.

6 Front Panel Lock

This Setting disables the Spindle CW and CCW buttons when it is set to “ON”.
7 Parameter Lock
Turning this Setting “ON” will stop the parameters from being changed, except for parameters 81-100. Note: When
the control is powered up, this setting is on.
8 Prog Memory Lock
This setting locks out the memory editing functions (Alter, Insert, etc.) when it is set to “ON”.
9 Dimensioning
This setting selects between inch and metric mode. When it is set to “INCH”, the programmed units for X, Y, and Z
are inches to 0.0001". When it is set to “METRIC”, programmed units are millimeters to 0.001mm. All offset values
are converted when this setting is changed from inches to metric, or vice versa. However, changing this setting will
not automatically translate a program stored in memory; you must change the programmed axis values for the new
units.
When set to INCH, the default G code is G20, when set to METRIC, the default G code is G21.

IN C H ME T R IC

F eed inches/min. mm/min.

Max Travel +/- 15400.0000 +/-39300.000
Min . P ro g rammab le D imen sio n .0001 .001
F eed R an g e .0001 to 300.000 in/min. .001 to 1000.000

Axis Jo g K eys

.0001 K ey .0001 in/jog click .001 mm/jog click

.001 .001 in/jog click .01 mm/jog click
.01 .01 in/jog click .1 mm/jog click
.1 K ey .1 in/jog click 1 mm/jog click

10 Limit Rapid At 50%

Turning this setting “ON” will limit the machine to 50% of its fastest non-cutting axis motion (rapids). This means, if
the machine can position the axes at 700 inches per minute (ipm), it will be limited to 350ipm when this setting is
On. The control will display a 50% rapid override message, when this setting is on. When it is OFF, the highest rapid
speed of 100% is available.
11 Baud Rate Select
This setting allows the operator to change the rate at which data is transferred to/from the first serial port (RS-232).
This applies to the upload/download of programs etc. and to DNC functions. This setting must match the transfer
rate from the personal computer.

168 Settings 96-8000 rev L June 2005

12 Parity Select
This setting defines parity for the first serial port (RS-232). When set to None, no parity bit is added to the serial
data. When set to Zero, a 0 bit is added. Even and Odd work like normal parity functions. Make sure you know what
your system needs, for example, XMODEM must use 8 data bits and no parity (set to “None”). This setting must
match the transfer rate from the personal computer.
13 Stop Bit
This setting designates the number of stop bits for the first serial port (RS-232). It can be 1 or 2. This setting must
match the transfer rate from the personal computer.
14 Synchronization
This changes the synchronization protocol between sender and receiver for the first serial port (RS-232). This setting
must match the transfer rate from the personal computer.
When set to RTS/CTS, the signal wires in the serial data cable are used to tell the sender to temporarily stop
sending data while the receiver catches up.
When set to XON/XOFF, the most common setting, ASCII character codes are used by the receiver to tell the
sender to temporarily stop.
The selection DC CODES is like XON/XOFF, except that paper tape punch or reader start/stop codes are sent.
XMODEM is a receiver-driven communications protocol that sends data in blocks of 128 bytes. XMODEM has added
reliability as each block is checked for integrity. XMODEM must use 8 data bits and no parity.
15 H & T Code Agreement
Turning this setting ON has the machine check to ensure that the H offset code matches the tool in the spindle. This
check can help to prevent crashes.
Settings 16-21
These settings can be turned on in order to stop unfamiliar operators from altering the machine s functions and
causing damage to the machine or workpiece.
16 Dry Run Lock Out
The Dry Run feature will not be available when this setting is turned ON.
17 Opt Stop Lock Out
The Optional Stop feature will not be available when this setting is on.
18 Block Delete Lock Out
The Block Delete feature will not be available when this setting is ON.
19 Feedrate Override Lock
The feedrate override buttons will be disabled when this setting is turned ON.
20 Spindle Override Lock
The spindle speed override buttons will be disabled when this setting is turned ON.
21 Rapid Override Lock
The axis rapid override buttons are disabled when this setting is turned ON.
22 Can Cycle Delta Z
This setting specifies the distance the Z-axis is retracted to clear chips during a G73 canned cycle. The range is 0.0
to 29.9999 inches (0-760 mm).
23 9xxx Progs Edit Lock
Turning this setting on will stop the 9000 series of programs from being viewed, edited or deleted. 9000 series
programs cannot be uploaded or downloaded with this setting on. Note: 9000 series programs are usually macro
programs.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Settings 169

24 Leader To Punch
This setting is used to control the leader (the blank tape at the beginning of a program) sent to a paper tape punch
device connected to the first RS-232 port.
25 EOB Pattern
This setting controls the EOB (End of Block) pattern when data is sent and received to/from serial port 1 (RS-232).
This setting must match the transfer rate from the personal computer.
26 Serial Number
This is the serial number of your machine. It cannot be changed.
27 G76/G77 Shift Dir.
This setting controls the direction the tool is shifted (moved) to clear a boring tool during a G76 or G77 canned cycle.
Selections are: X+, X-, Y+, or Y-.

Y
Part

X X+

Y Bored Hole

28 Can Cycle Act w/o X/Y

Turning this setting “ON” will cause the commanded canned cycle to complete without an X or Y command. The
preferred method of operation is with this setting ON.
When this setting is OFF, the control will stop if a canned cycle is programmed without an X or Y axis move.
29 G91 Non-modal
Turning this setting ON will use the G91 command only in the program block it is in (non-modal). When it is OFF,
and a G91 is commanded, the machine will use incremental moves for all axis positions.
30 4th Axis Enable
This setting initializes the control for a specific 4th axis. When this setting is OFF, the fourth axis is disabled; no
commands can be sent to that axis. See setting 78 for 5th axis. Note that there are two selections “USER1” and
“USER2” that can be used to set-up a unique rotary table.
31 Reset Program Pointer
When this setting is OFF, the Reset button will not change the position of the program pointer. When it is ON, the
Reset button will move the program pointer to the beginning of the program.
32 Coolant Override
This setting controls how the coolant pump operates. The “Normal” selection allows the operator to turn the pump on
and off manually or with M-codes. The “Off” selection will generate an alarm if an attempt is made to turn the coolant
on manually or from a program. The “Ignore” selection will ignore all programmed coolant commands, but the pump
can be turned on manually.
33 Coordinate System
This setting changes the way the Haas control recognizes the work offset system when a G52 or G92 is pro-
grammed. It can be set to FANUC, HAAS, or YASNAC.
Set to YASNAC
G52 becomes another work offset, just like using a G55.
Set to FANUC with G52
Any values in the G52 register will be added to all work offsets (global coordinate shift). This G52 value can be
entered either manually or through a program. When FANUC is selected, pressing RESET, commanding an M30, or

170 Settings 96-8000 rev L June 2005

machine power down will clear out the value in G52.
Set to HAAS with G52
Any values in the G52 register will be added to all work offsets. This G52 value can be entered either manually or
through a program. The G52 coordinate shift value is set to zero (zeroed) by manually entering zero, or by program-
ming it with G52 X0, Y0, and/or Z0.
Set to YASNAC with G92:
Selecting YASNAC and programming a G92 X0 Y0, the control will enter the current machine location as a new zero
point (Work Zero Offset), and that location will be entered into and viewed in the G52 list.
Set to FANUC or HAAS with G92:
Selecting FANUC or HAAS with a G92, it will work like the YASNAC setting, except that the new Work Zero location
value will be loaded as new G92. This new value in the G92 list will be used, in addition to, the presently recognized
work offset to define the new work zero location.
34 4th Axis Diameter
This is used to set the diameter of the A-axis (0.0 to 50 inches), which the control will use to determine the angular
feedrate. The feedrate in a program is always inches per minute (or mm per minute), therefore, the control must
know the diameter of the part being machined in the A-axis in order to compute angular feedrate. See setting 79 for
5th axis diameter.
35 G60 Offset
This is a numeric entry in the range 0.0 to 0.9999 inches. It is used to specify the distance an axis will travel past
the target point prior to reversing. Also see G60.
36 Program Restart
When this setting is ONN, restarting a program from a point other than the beginning will direct the control to scan
the entire program to ensure that the tools, offsets, G and M codes, and axis positions are set correctly before the
program starts at the block where the cursor is positioned.
Note: The following M codes will be processed when Setting 36 is enabled:
M08 Coolant On M41 Low Gear Override
M09 Coolant Off M42 High Gear Override
M10 Engage 4th Axis Brake M51-M58 Set Optional M Code
M11 Release 4th Axis Brake M61-M68 Clear Optional M Code
M12 Engage 5th Axis Brake M83 Air Gun On
M13 Release 5th Axis Brake M84 Air Gun Off
M34 Increment Coolant Spigot Position M88 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON
M35 Decrement Coolant Spigot Position M89 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF
When it is Off the program will start without checking the conditions of the machine. Having this setting Off may save
time when running a proven program.
37 RS-232 Data Bits
This setting is used to change the number of data bits for serial port 1 (RS-232). This setting must match the
transfer rate from the personal computer. Normally 7 data bits should be used but some computers require 8.
XMODEM must use 8 data bits and no parity.
38 Aux Axis Number
This setting is used to select the number of external auxiliary axes added to the system. If it is set to 0, there are no
auxiliary axes. If it is set to 1, there is a C axis. If it is set to 2, there are C and U axes. (Range 0-4).
39 Beep at M00, M01, M02, M30
Turning this setting ON will cause the keyboard beeper to sound when an M00, M01 (with Optional Stop active), M02

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Settings 171

or an M30 is found. The beeper will continue until a button is pressed.
40 Tool Offset Measure
This setting selects how tool size is specified for cutter compensation. It can be set to either Radius or Diameter.
41 Add Spaces RS232 Out
When this setting is ON spaces are added between address codes when a program is sent out via RS-232 serial
port 1. This can make a program much easier to read/edit on a personal computer (PC). When it is set to OFF,
programs sent out the serial port have no spaces and are more difficult to read.
42 M00 After M06
Turning this setting ON will stop the program after a tool change and a message will be displayed stating this. The
Cycle Start button must be pressed to continue the program.
43 Cutter Comp Type
This setting controls how the first stroke of a compensated cut begins and the way the tool is cleared from the part
being cut. The selections can be A or B; see the cutter compensation section for examples.
44 Min F in Radius CC %
(Minimum feedrate in radius cutter compensation percent) This setting affects the feedrate when cutter compensa-
tion moves the tool toward the inside of a circular cut. This type of cut will slow down to maintain a constant surface
feedrate. This setting specifies the slowest feedrate as a percentage of the programmed feedrate (range 1-100). The
default is 50 (50%).
45 Mirror Image X-axis
46 Mirror Image Y-axis
47 Mirror Image Z-axis
48 Mirror Image A-axis
When one or more of these settings is ON, axis motion will be mirrored (reversed) around the work zero point. See
also G101 Enable Mirror Image in G-codes section.

XY MIRROR Y MIRROR

Y MIRROR OFF

49 Skip Same Tool Change

In some program, the same tool may be called in the next section of a program or a subroutine. The control will do

172 Settings 96-8000 rev L June 2005

two changes and finish with the same tool in the spindle. Turning this setting ON will skip same tool, tool changes; a
tool change will only occur if a different tool will be placed in the spindle.
50 Aux Axis Sync
This changes the synchronization between sender and receiver for the second serial port. The second serial port is
used for auxiliary axes. The settings between the CNC control and the auxiliary axes must be the same.
Selecting “RTS/CTS” will tell the sender to temporarily stop sending data while the receiver catches up.
Selecting “XON/XOFF” uses ASCII character codes from the receiver to tell the sender to temporarily stop. XON/
XOFF is the most common setting.
The “DC CODES” selection is like XON/XOFF, with the exception that start/stop codes are sent.
The “XMODEM” selection is receiver-driven, which sends data in blocks of 128 bytes. XMODEM gives the RS-232
communication added reliability because each block is checked for integrity.
51 Door Hold Switch Override (Safety Switch Override)
Selecting “OFF” will not allow a program to start when the doors are open, and opening a door will cause the running
program to stop (the same as pressing Feed Hold).
Machines equipped with a hand held safety switch will go into feed hold if the safety switch is released.
When the control is powered on, this setting automatically returns to OFF.
52 G83 Retract Above R
(Range 0.0 to 9.9999 inches or 0-254mm). This setting changes the way G83 and G73 (peck drilling cycles) behave.
Most programmers set the reference (R) plane well above the cut to ensure that the chip clearing motion actually
allows the chips to get out of the hole. However this wastes time as the machine will “drill” through this empty
distance. If Setting 52 is set to the distance required to clear chips, the R plane can be put much closer to the part
being drilled.

Setting 52 Start Position

R Plane
New R Plane
Top of Part

53 Jog w/o Zero Return

Turning this setting ON allows the axes to be jogged without zero returning the machine (finding machine home).
This is a dangerous condition as the axis can be run into the mechanical stops and the possibly damage the
machine.
When the control is powered up, this setting automatically returns to OFF.
54 Aux Axis Baud Rate
This setting allows the operator to change the data rate for the second serial port (Auxiliary axis). This setting needs
to match the value in the auxiliary axis control.
55 Enable DNC From MDI
Turning this setting “ON” will make the DNC feature available. DNC is selected, in the control by pressing the MDI/
DNC button twice.
The DNC Direct Numeric Control feature is not available when set to “OFF”.
56 M30 Restore Default G
When this setting is ON, ending a program with M30 or pressing Reset will return all modal G codes to their defaults
and will also reset the Feed Per Rev back to its default.
57 Exact Stop Canned X-Y

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Settings 173

The rapid XY motion associated with a canned cycle may not achieve an exact stop when this setting is OFF.
Turning this setting ON will ensure that the XY motion comes to an exact stop.
58 Cutter Compensation
This setting selects the type of cutter compensation used (FANUC or YASNAC). See the cutter compensation
section.
59 Probe Offset X+
60 Probe Offset X-
61 Probe Offset Y+
62 Probe Offset Y-
These settings are used to define the displacement and size of the spindle probe. These four settings specify the
travel distance and direction from where the probe is triggered to where the actual sensed surface is located. These
settings are used by G31, G36, G136, and M75 codes. The values entered for each setting can be either positive or
negative numbers.
Macros can be used to access these settings, see the Macro section for more information.
63 Tool Probe Width
This setting is used to specify the width of the probe used to test tool diameter. This setting only applies to the
probing option; it is used by G35.
64 T. OFS Meas Uses Work
This setting changes the way the Tool Ofset Mesur (Tool Offset Measure) button works. When this is ON, the
entered tool offset will be the measured tool offset plus the work coordinate offset (Z-axis). When it is OFF, the tool
offset equals the Z machine position.
65 Graph Scale (Height)
This setting specifies the height of the work area that is displayed on the Graphics mode screen. The default value
for this setting is the maximum height, which is the entire machine work area. Using the following formula can set a
specific scale:
Total Y travel = Parameter 20 / Parameter 19
Scale = Total Y travel / Setting 65
66 Graphics X Offset
This setting locates the right side of the scaling window relative to the machine X zero position (see the Graphics
section). Its default is zero.
67 Graphics Y Offset
This setting locates the top of the zoom window relative to the machine Y zero position (see the Graphics section).
Its default is zero.

174 Settings 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 Graphics Mode

Setting 66 & 67 Setting 66 & 67

set to Ø set to 2.0
Setting 66 and 67
69 DPRNT Leading Spaces
This is an On/Off setting. When set to OFF the control will not use leading spaces generated by a macro DPRNT
format statement. Conversely when set to ON the control will use leading spaces The following example illustrates
control behavior when this setting is OFF or ON.
#1= 3.0 ; OUTPUT
G0 G90 X#1 ; OFF ON
DPRNT[X#1[44]] ; X3.0000 X 3.0000
Notice the space between the “X” and the 3 when the setting is ON. Information can be easier to read when this
setting is ON.
70 DPRNT Open/Clos Dcode
This setting is available for compatibility with other systems. When the setting is ON, the macro statements will
send DC control codes. When it is OFF, the DC codes will not be sent. See the Macros section.
71 Default G51 Scaling
This specifies the scaling for a G51 (See G-Code Section, G51) command when the P address is not used. The
default is 1.000 (Range 0.001 to 8380.000).
72 Default G68 Rotation
This specifies the rotation, in degrees, for a G68 command when the R address is not used. It must be in the range
0.0000 to 360.0000º.
73 G68 Incremental Angle
This setting allows the G68 rotation angle to be changed for each commanded G68. When this switch is ON and a
G68 command is executed in the Incremental mode (G91), then the value specified in the R address is added to the
previous rotation angle. For example an R value of 10 will cause the rotation of the feature to be 10° the first time
commanded, 20° the next time etc.
74 9xxxx PROGS Trace
This setting, along with Setting 75, is useful for debugging CNC programs. When Setting 74 is ON, the control will
display the code in the macro programs (O9xxxx). When the setting is OFF, the control will not display the 9000
series code. The default setting is ON.
75 9xxx PROGS Single BLK
When Setting 75 is ON and the control is operating in Single Block mode, then the control will stop at each block of
code in a macro program (O9xxxx) and wait for the operator to press Cycle Start. When Setting 75 is OFF, the
macro program is run continuously, the control will not pause at each block, even if Single Block is on. The default
setting is ON.
When Setting 74 and Setting 75 are both ON, the control acts normally. That is, all blocks executed are highlighted
and displayed, and when in Single Block mode there is a pause before each block is executed.
When Setting 74 and Setting 75 are both OFF, the control will execute 9000 series programs without displaying the
program code. If the control is in Single Block mode, no single-block pause will occur during the running of the 9000
series program.
When Setting 75 is ON and Setting 74 is OFF, then 9000 series programs will be displayed as they are executed.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Settings 175

76 Tool Release Lock Out
When this setting is ON, the tool release key on the keyboard is disabled.
77 Scale Integer F
This setting allows the operator to select how the control interprets an F value (feedrate) that does not contain a
decimal point. (It is recommended that programmers always use a decimal point.) This setting helps operators run
programs developed on a control other than HAAS. For Example F12:
Setting 77 OFF 0.0012units/minute
Setting 77 ON 12.0 units/minute
78 Fifth-axis Enable
When this setting is OFF, the fifth axis is disabled and no commands can be sent to that axis. In order to change
this setting the Emergency Stop button must be pressed. See setting 30 for 4th axis. Note that there are two
selections “USER1” and “USER2” that can be used to set-up a unique rotary table.
79 Fifth-axis Diameter
This is used to set the diameter of the B-axis (0.0 to 50 inches), which the control will use to determine the angular
feedrate. The feedrate in a program is always inches per minute (or mm per minute), therefore, the control must
know the diameter of the part being machined in the B-axis in order to compute angular feedrate. See setting 34 for
4th axis diameter.
80 Mirror Image B-axis
This is an On/Off setting. When it is OFF, axis motions occur normally. When it is on, B axis motion may be
mirrored (or reversed) around the work zero point. Also see settings 45-48 and G101.
81 Tool At Power Up
When the Power Up/Restart key is pressed, the control will change to the tool specified in this setting. If zero (0) is
specified, no tool change occurs at power up. The default setting is 1.
Setting 81, will cause one of the following actions to occur during a Power-up/Restart:
A. If Setting 81 is set to zero, the carousel will be rotated to pocket #1. No tool change will be
performed.
B. If Setting 81 contains the tool number of the tool currently in the spindle, the carousel will remain at
the same pocket and no tool change will be performed.
C. If Setting 81 contains the tool number of a tool not currently in the spindle, the carousel will be
rotated to pocket #1 and then to the pocket containing the tool specified by Setting 81. A tool change
will be performed to change the specified tool into the spindle.
82 Language
Languages other than English are available in the Haas control. To change to another language, choose a language
and press Enter.
83 M30 Resets Override
When this setting is ON, an M30 will restore any overrides (feedrate, spindle, rapid) to their default values (100%).
84 Tool Overload Action
This setting causes the specified action (Alarm, Feedhold, Beep, Autofeed) to occur anytime a tool becomes
overloaded. (See the Tool Set up section)
Choosing “Alarm” will cause the machine to stop when the tool is overloaded.
When set to “Feedhold”, the message “Tool Overload” will be displayed and the machine will stop in a feedhold
situation when this condition occurs. Pressing any key will clear the message.
Selecting “Beep” will cause an audible noise (beep) from the control when the tool is overloaded.
When set to “Autofeed”, the mill automatically limits the feedrate based on the tool load.

176 Settings 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 Autofeed Notes:
When tapping (rigid or floating), the feed and spindle overrides will be locked out, so the
Autofeed feature will be ineffective (the control will appear to respond to the override buttons, by
displaying the override messages).
The Autofeed feature should not be used when thread milling or auto reversing tapping heads,
as it may cause unpredictable results or even a crash.
The last commanded feedrate would be restored at the end of the program execution, or when
the operator presses Reset or turns off the Autofeed feature.
The operator may use the keyboard feedrate override buttons while the Autofeed feature is
selected. These buttons will be recognized by the Autofeed feature as the new commanded
feedrate as long as the tool load limit is not exceeded. However, if the tool load limit has already
been exceeded, the control will ignore the feedrate override buttons.
85 Max Corner Rounding
This setting defines the machining accuracy of rounded corners within a selected tolerance. The initial default value
is 0.05 inch. If this setting is zero (0), the control acts as if an exact stop is commanded in each motion block.
G187 can be used in the program to alter the effective value of Setting 85, without changing the setting.

Program Point The following two conditions would occur at the

sameFeed rate and setting 85 value.

No slowdown required to meet accuracy setting

Setting 85= 0.002

Much lower speed needed to machine into the corner

Setting 85= 0.005

Setting 85 Examples
86 M39 Lockout
This is an On/Off setting. When it is ON, M39 commands are ignored.
87 M06 Resets Override
This is an On/Off setting. When this setting is ON and an M06 is commanded, any overrides are canceled and set to
their programmed values or defaults.
88 Reset Resets Overrides
This is an On/Off setting. When it is ON and the Reset key is pressed, any overrides are canceled and set to their
programmed values or defaults.
90 Max Tools To Display
This setting limits the number of tools displayed on the Tool Geometry screen. The range of this setting is 1 to 200.
91 Advanced Jog
Turning this setting ON enables the Index Jog and Jog Travel Limits features. This setting is used on the Tool Room
series of machines. See the Toolroom Mill addendum for more information on these features.
100 Screen Saver Delay
When the setting is zero, the scren saver is disabled. If setting is set to some number of minutes, then after that
time with no keyboard activity, the screen saver will activate the Haas logo that will change position every 2 seconds
(deactivate with any key press, handle jog or alarm). The screen saver will not activate if the control is in Sleep, Jog,
Edit, or Graphics mode.
101 Feed Overide -> Rapid
Turning this setting ON and pressing Handle Control Feedrate will cause, the jog handle to effect both the feedrate
and the rapid rate overrides. Setting 10 affects the maximum rapid rate.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Settings 177

103 CYC Start/FH Same Key
The Cycle Start button must be pressed and held to run a program when this setting is ON. When Cycle Start is
released, a feed hold is generated.
This setting cannot be turned on while Setting 104 is on. When one of them is set to ON, the other will automatically
turn off.
104 Jog Handl to SNGL BLK
The jog handle can be used to single-step through a program when this setting is ON. Reversing the jog handle
direction will generate a feed hold.
This setting cannot be turned ON while Setting 103 is on. When one of them is set to ON, the other will automati-
cally turn off.
108 Quick Rotary G28
Turning this setting ON will return the rotary unit back to zero using the shortest distance.
For example if the rotary unit is at 10° and a zero return is commanded, the rotary table will rotate 350° if this setting
is OFF. If the setting is ON the table will rotate -10°.
In order to use Setting 108, the parameter bit CIRC. WRAP. (10) must be set to 1 on parameter 43 for the A axis and
Parameter 151 for the B-axis. If the parameter bit(s) are not set to 1 the control will ignore setting 108.
109 Warmup Time in Min.
This is the number of minutes (up to 300 minutes from power-up) during which the compensations specified in
Settings 110-112 are applied.
Overview – When the machine is powered on, if Setting 109, and at least one of Settings 110, 111 or 112, are set to
a nonzero value, the following warning will be displayed:
CAUTION! Warm up Compensation is specified!
Do you wish to activate
Warm up Compensation (Y/N)?
If a ‘Y’ is entered, the control immediately applies the total compensation (setting 110,111, 112), and the compensa-
tion begins to decrease as the time elapses. For instance, after 50% of the time in Setting 109 has elapsed, the
compensation distance, will be 50%.
To “restart” the time period, it is necessary to power the machine off and on, and then answer “yes” to the compen-
sation query at start-up. Caution: Changing settings 110, 111 or 112 while compensation is in progress can cause a
sudden movement of up to 0.0044 inch.
The amount of remaining warmup time is displayed on the bottom right hand corner of the Diagnostics Inputs 2
screen using the standard hh:mm:ss format.
110 Warmup X Distance
111 Warmup Y Distance
112 Warmup Z Distance
Settings 110, 111 and 112 specify the amount of compensation (max = ± 0.0020" or ± 0.051 mm) applied to the
axes. Setting 109 must have a value entered for settings 110-112 to have an affect.
114 Conveyor Cycle Time (Minutes)
115 Conveyor On-time (Minutes)
These two settings control the optional chip conveyor. Setting 114 controls how often the cycle is to be repeated,
and Setting 115 specifies the number of minutes the conveyor will run. For example, if Setting 114 is set to 30 and
Setting 115 is set to 2, the chip conveyor will turn itself on every half hour (30 minutes), run for two minutes, then
turn itself off.
116 Pivot Length
Setting 116 is set when the machine is first built and never changed. Only a qualified service technician should
modify this setting.

178 Settings 96-8000 rev L June 2005

117 G143 Global Offset
This setting is provided for customers who have several 5-axis Haas mills and want to transfer the programs and
tools from one to another. The pivot length difference (difference between Setting 116 for each machine) can be
entered into this setting, and it will be applied to the G143 tool length compensation.
118 M99 Bumps M30 CNTRS
When this setting is ON, an M99 will add one to the M30 counters (these are visible on the CURNT COMNDS
displays). Note that an M99 will only increase the counters as it occurs in a main program, not a sub-program.
119 Offset Lock
Turning the setting ON will not allow the values in the Offset display to be altered. However, programs that alter
offsets will still be able to do so.
120 Macro VAR Lock
Turning this setting ON will not allow the macro variables to be altered. However, programs that alter macro variables
will still be able to do so.
121 APC Pal. One Load X
122 APC Pal. One Load Y
123 APC Pal. One Unload X
124 APC Pal. One Unload Y
125 APC Pal. Two Load X
126 APC Pal. Two Load Y
127 APC Pal. Two Unload X
128 APC Pal. Two Unload Y
129 APC Pal. 1 and 2 Safe X Pos
Settings 121-129 are the pallet positions for the X and Y axis. They are set at the time the APC is installed and
should not need altering.
130 Tap Retract Speed
If it is set to zero or 1, the machine behaves normally. If it is set to 2, it will be the equivalent of running a G84 with a
J code of 2. That is, the spindle (tap) will retract twice as fast as it went in. If this setting is set to 3, it will retract
three times as fast. Note that specifying a J code for a rigid tap will override setting 130.
Note: If the machine does not have the Rigid Tap option, this setting has no effect.
131 Auto Door
This setting supports the Auto Door option. It should be set to ON for machines with an autodoor. Also see M80/81
(Autodoor Open/Close M-codes).
The door will close when Cycle Start is pressed and will open when the program reaches an M00, M01 (with Optional
Stop turned on) or M30 and the spindle has stopped turning.
133 Repeat Rigid Tap
This setting ensures that the spindle is oriented during tapping so that the threads will line up when a second
tapping pass, in the same hole, is programmed.
134 Connection Type
This setting can be FLOPPY, NET, or ZIP. When it is set to FLOPPY, loading and saving programs is performed
using the floppy disk drive.
When it is set to NET, loading and saving occur through the user-supplied network connection.
When it is set to ZIP, program loading and saving occurs through the user-supplied Zip™ drive.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Settings 179

135 Network Type
This setting can be NONE, NOVELL, NT/IPX, NT/TCP or ADV/TCP. It specifies the user-supplied network connection
type. When it is set to NONE, only a floppy disk or a user-supplied Zip™ drive is accessible. If ADV/TCP is se-
lected, a setting page will appear in place of setting 135. To revert back, change “Net Type” to “None”.
136 Server
This setting contains the user-entered server name (up to 8 characters long.) Enter a semicolon (EOB symbol) if the
machine is not linked to a server.
137 Username
This setting contains the user-entered account name (up to 8 characters long.) Enter a semicolon (EOB symbol) if
the machine is not linked to a server.
138 Password
This setting contains the user-entered password (up to 8 characters long.) Enter a semicolon (EOB symbol) if the
machine is not linked to a server.
139 Path
This setting contains the user-entered Novell-Path or Windows NT root directory name (up to 18 characters long).
For a Novell network, this is the users path name; for example, U:\USERS\JOHNDOE. For a Microsoft network (i.e.
Windows NT), this is the root directory\desired directory name; for example, USERS\JOHNDOE. Enter a semicolon
(EOB symbol) if the machine is not linked to a server.
140 TCP ADDR
This setting is used only for TCP networks and contains the user-entered TCP/IP address in the server domain (up to
15 characters long). For example: 192.168.1.2. Enter a semicolon (EOB symbol) if the machine is not linked to a
server.
141 Subnet
This setting is used only for TCP networks and contains the user-entered subnet mask (up to 15 characters long; for
example, 255.255.255.0). Enter a semicolon (EOB symbol) if the machine is not linked to a server.
142 Offset CHNG Tolerance
This setting generates a warning message if an offset is changed by more than the amount entered for this setting.
The following prompt will be displayed: “XX changes the offset by more than Setting 142! Accept (Y/N)?” if an attempt
is made to change an offset by more than the entered amount (either positive or negative), If “Y” is entered, the
control updates the offset as usual; otherwise, the change is rejected.
If “Y” is entered, the control updates the offset as usual, otherwise, the change is rejected.
143 Machine Data Collect
This setting enables the user to extract data from the control using a Q command sent through the RS-232 port.
This feature is software-based and requires an additional computer to request, interpret and store data from the
control. Note that the control will only respond to a Q command when this setting is ON. The following output format
is used:
<STX> <CSV response> <ETB> <CR/LF> <0x3E>
(“CSV” means Comma Separated Variable that is a line of information in which each piece of information is sepa-
rated from the next with a comma).
Note: STX = 0x02 (ctrl-B); ETB = 0x17 (ctrl-W)
The following commands can be used:
Q100 - Machine Serial Number
Q101 - Control Software Version
Q102 - Machine Model Number
Q104 - Mode (LIST PROG, MDI, MEM, JOG, etc.)
Q200 - Tool Changes (total)
Q201 - Tool Number in use
Q300 - Power-on Time (total)

180 Settings 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Q301 - Motion Time (total)
Q303 - Last Cycle Time
Q304 - Previous Cycle Time
Q400 - not currently used
Q401 - not currently used
Q402 - M30 Parts Counter #1 (resettable at control)
Q403 - M30 Parts Counter #2 (resettable at control)
Q500 - Three-in-one (PROGRAM, Oxxxxx, STATUS, PARTS, xxxxx)
If the control is busy, the control will output “STATUS, BUSY.” If a request is not recognized, the control will output
“UNKNOWN.”
In addition, when Setting 143 is ON, the user has the ability to request the contents of any macro or system variable
by using the Q600 command, for example, “Q600 xxxx” where xxxx is the macro variable. Macro variables 1 thru
999 and 2001 thru 2800 can be written to using an “E” command, for example, “Exxxx yyyyyy.yyyyyy” where xxxx
is the macro variable and yyyyyy.yyyyyy is the new value. Note that this command should only be used when there
are no alarms present.
This feature can be enhanced with the installation of the following optional parts, M-code relay board, a power-on
relay and a new Emergency Stop switch; contact your dealer for information on these parts. Once installed output
relays 40 thru 47, a power-on relay and the Emergency Stop switch are used to communicate the status of the
control.
The following communications will be received (* are only available when used with the optional parts):
* E-STOP contacts. This will be closed when the E-STOP button is pushed.
* Power ON - 115 VAC. Indicates that the control is turned ON. It should be wired to a 115 VAC coil relay for inter-
face.
* Spare Output Relay 40. Indicates that the control is In-Cycle (running.)
* Spare Output Relay 41 and 42:
11 = MEM mode & no alarms (AUTO mode.)
10 = MDI mode & no alarms (Manual mode.)
01 = Single Block mode (Single mode)
00 = other modes (zero, DNC, jog, list prog, etc.)
* Spare Output Relay 43 and 44:
11 = Feed Hold stop (Feed Hold.)
10 = M00 or M01 stop
01 = M02 or M30 stop (Program Stop)
00 = none of the above (could be single block stop or RESET.)
* Spare Output Relay 45 (Feed Rate Override is active and Feed Rate is NOT 100%)
* Spare Output Relay 46 (Spindle Speed Override active and Spindle Speed is NOT 100%)
* Spare Output Relay 47 (Control is in EDIT mode)
144 Feed Overide->Spindle
This setting is intended to keep the chip load constant when an override is applied. When this setting is ON, any
feedrate override will also be applied to the spindle speed, and the spindle overrides will be disabled.
146 APC Pallet 3 Load X
147 APC Pallet 3 Load Y
148 APC Pallet 3 Unload X
149 APC Pallet 3 Unload Y
150 APC Pallet 4 Load X
151 APC Pallet 4 Load Y
152 APC Pallet 4 Unload X
153 APC Pallet 4 Unload Y
154 APC Pallet 3 & 4 Safe X
See Settings 121-129

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Settings 181

155 Load Pocket Tables
This setting should only be used when a software upgrade is performed and/or memory has been cleared and/or the
control is re-initialized. In order to replace the contents of the side-mount tool changer pocket tool table with the data
from the file, the setting must be ON.
If this setting is OFF when loading an Offset file from a floppy disk or RS-232, the contents of the Pocket Tool table
will be unaltered. Setting 155 automatically defaults to OFF when the machine is turned on.
156 Save Offset with PROG
Turning this setting ON will have the control save the offsets in the same file as the programs, but under the heading
O999999. The offsets will appear in the file before the final % sign.
157 Offset Format Type
This setting controls the format in which offsets are saved with programs.
When it is set to A the format looks like what is displayed on the control, and contains decimal points and column
headings. Offsets saved in this format can be more easily edited on a PC and later reloaded into the control.
When it is set to B, each offset is saved on a separate line with an N value and a V value.
158,159,160 XYZ Screw Thermal COMP%
These settings can be set from -30 to +30 and will adjust the existing screw thermal compensation by -30% to
+30% accordingly.
162 Default to Float
When this setting is ON, the control will add a decimal point to values entered without a decimal point (for certain
address codes). When this setting is Off, the values following the address codes are treated as machinist’s notation
(i.e., thousandths or ten-thousandths.) For example:
Value entered With Setting OFF With Setting ON
In Inch mode X-2 X-.0002 X-2.
In MM mode X-2 X-.002 X-2.
This feature applies to the following address codes:
X,Y,Z,A,B,C,E,F,I,K,U,W
D (except with G73)
R (except with G71 in YASNAC mode)
Note that this setting affects the interpretation of all programs entered either manually or from disk or via RS-232. It
does not alter the effect of setting 77 Scale Integer F.
163 Disable .1 Jog Rate
This setting disables the highest jog rate. If the highest jog rate is selected, the next lower rate is automatically
selected instead.
164 Rotary Increment
This setting applies to the Rotary Index button on the EC300. It specifies the rotation for the rotary table in the load
station. It should be set to a value from -360 to 360 degrees. For example, entering “90” will rotate the pallet 90°
each time the rotary index button is pressed. If it is set to zero, the rotary table will not rotate.

182 Settings 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 MAINTENANCE

GENERAL R EQUIREMENTS
Operating Temperature Range: 41°F to 104°F (5 to 40°C)
Storage Temperature Range: -4°F to 158°F (-20 to 70°C)
Ambient Humidity: 20% – 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
Altitude: 0-7000 ft.

ELECTRICITY R EQUIREMENTS
All Machines Require:
AC input power is three phase Delta or Wye power, except that the power source must be grounded (e.g. leg or
center leg for delta, neutral for Wye)
Frequency range of 47-66 Hz
Line voltage that does not fluctuate more than ± 10%
Harmonic distortion not to exceed 10% of the total RMS voltage
20-15 HP System (Standard VF and 10K, EC300, EC400)
195-260V Voltage Requirements 354-488V High-Voltage Requirements
Power Supply 1 50 AMP 25 AMP
Haas Circuit Breaker 40 AMP 20 AMP
If service run from elec. panel
is less than 100' use: 8 GA. WIRE 12 GA. WIRE
If service run from elec. panel
is more than 100' use: 6 GA. WIRE 10 GA. WIRE
40-30 HP System (50 Taper, 40 Taper HT 10K, VF Super Speed, EC-300, EC-400 12K, VM)
195-260V Voltage Requirements 354-488V High-Voltage Requirements2
1
Power Supply 100 AMP 50 AMP
Haas Circuit Breaker 80 AMP 40 AMP
If service run from elec. panel
is less than 100' use: 4 GA. WIRE 8 GA. WIRE
If service run from elec. panel
is more than 100' use: 2 GA. WIRE 6 GA. WIRE

40-30 HP System (VS 1/3, HS 3-7 incl R models)

195-260V Voltage Requirements
Power Supply 125 AMP
Haas Circuit Breaker 100 AMP
If service run from ele. panel
is less than 100' use: 2 GA. WIRE
If service run from ele. panel
is more than 100' use: 0 GA. WIRE

WARNING!
A separate earth ground wire of the same conductor size as the input power is required to be connected to the
chassis of the machine. This ground wire is required for operator safety and for proper operation. This ground must
be supplied from the main plant ground at the service entrance, and should be routed in the same conduit as the
input power to the machine. A local cold water pipe or ground rod adjacent to the machine cannot be used for this
purpose.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Maintenance 183

Input power to the machine must be grounded. For wye power, the neutral must be grounded. For delta power, a
central leg ground or one leg ground should be used. The machine will not function properly on ungrounded power.
(This is not a factor with the External 480V Option.)
The rated horsepower of the machine may not be achieved if the imbalance of the incoming voltage is beyond an
acceptable limit. The machine may function properly, yet may not deliver the advertised power. This is noticed more
often when using phase converters. A phase converter should only be used if all other methods cannot be used.
The maximum leg-to-leg or leg-to-ground voltage should not exceed 260 volts, or 504 volts for high-voltage ma-
chines with the Internal High Voltage Option.
1
The current requirements shown in the table reflect the circuit breaker size internal to the machine. This breaker
has an extremely slow trip time. It may be necessary to size the external service breaker up by 20-25%, as
indicated by “power supply”, for proper operation.
2
The high-voltage requirements shown reflect the Internal 400V configuration which is standard on European
machines. Domestic and all other users must use the External 480V option.

AIR REQUIREMENTS
The mill requires a minimum of 100 psi at the input to the pressure regulator on the back of the machine. A volume
of 4 scfm (9scfm for EC and HS mills) is also necessary. This should be supplied by at least a two-horsepower
compressor, with a minimum 20-gallon tank, that turns on when the pressure drops to 100 psi.

NOTE: Add 2 scfm to the minimum air requirements (below) if the operator will be
using the air nozzle during pneumatic operations.
Machine Type Main Air Regulator Input Airline Hose Size
EC-300 85 psi 1/2” I.D.
EC-400 85psi 1/2” I.D.
EC-1600 85psi 1/2” I.D.
HS 3/4/6/7 incl R models 85psi. 1/2” I.D.
VF-1 - VF-11 (40Taper), VM 85psi 3/8” I.D.
VF-5 - VF-11 (50 Taper) 85psi 1/2” I.D.
VR Series 85psi 1/2” I.D.
VS 1/3 85psi 1/2” I.D.
The recommended method of attaching the air hose is to the barb fitting at the back of the machine with a hose
clamp. If a quick coupler is desired, use a 1/2" coupler.

NOTE: Excessive oil and water in the air supply will cause the machine to malfunction.
The air filter/regulator has an automatic bowl dump that should be empty
before starting the machine. This must be checked for proper operation
monthly. Also, excessive contaminants in the air line may clog the dump valve
and cause oil and/or water to pass into the machine.

NOTE: Auxiliary air connections should be made on the unregulated side of the air
filter/regulator.
WARNING!
When the machine is operating and the pressure gauge (on the ma-
chine regulator) drops by more than 10 psi during tool changes or
pallet changes, insufficient air is being supplied to the machine.

184 Maintenance 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following is a list of required regular maintenance for the machining center. These required specifications must
be followed in order to keep your machine in good working order and protect your warranty.
Interval Maintenance Performed
Daily • Check coolant level each eight-hour shift (especially during heavy TSC usage).
• Check way lube lubrication tank level.
• Clean chips from way covers and bottom pan.
• Clean chips from tool changer.
• Wipe spindle taper with a clean cloth rag and apply light oil.
Weekly • Check Through the Spindle Coolant (TSC) filters. Clean or replace element if needed.
• Check for proper operation of auto drain on filter regulator.
• On machines with the TSC option, clean the chip basket on the coolant tank.
Remove the tank cover and remove any sediment inside the tank. Disconnect the coolant
pump from the cabinet and power off the machine before working on the coolant tank.
Do this MONTHLY for machines without the TSC option.
• Check air gauge/regulator for 85 psi. Check the spindle air pressure regulator for
17 psi. For 15K-spindle machines, check spindle air pressure regulator for 20 psi.
• For machines with the TSC option, place a dab of grease on the V-flange of tools.
Do this MONTHLY for machines without the TSC option.
• Clean exterior surfaces with mild cleaner. DO NOT use solvents.
• Check the hydraulic counterbalance pressure according to the machine’s specifica-
tions.
Monthly • Check oil level in gear box. For 40 taper spindles: Remove inspection cover beneath
spindle head. Add oil slowly from top until oil begins dripping from overflow tube at
bottom of sump tank. For 50 taper spindles: Check oil level in sight glass. Add from
side of gearbox if necessary.
• Inspect way covers for proper operation and lubricate with light oil, if necessary.
• Place a dab of grease on the outside edge of the guide rails of the tool changer and run
through all tools.
• EC-400 Clean the locating pads on the A-axis and the load station. This requires
removing the pallet
Six Months • Replace coolant and thoroughly clean the coolant tank.
• Check all hoses and lubrication lines for cracking.
• Check the rotary A-axis. If necessary add oil (Mobil SHC-630). The correct oil level is
halfway on the sight glass.
Annually • Replace the gearbox oil. Drain the oil from the bottom of the gearbox.
Remove inspection cover beneath spindle head. Add oil slowly from top until oil begins
dripping from overflow tube at bottom of sump tank. For 50 taper spindles, add oil from
the side of the transmission.
• Check oil filter and clean out residue at bottom of filter.
• Check SMTC oil level in sight glass, (see Side Mount Tool Changer Oil Level in this
section).
2 years • Replace air filter on control box.
• EC-400 Replace the Rotary A-axis oil

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Maintenance 185

 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
A periodic maintenance page is found on the Current Commands screens titled “Scheduled Maintenance” and
accessed by pressing Page Up or Page Down to activate and deactivate a series of tests.
An item on the list can be selected by pressing the up and down arrow keys. The selected item is then activated or
deactivated by pressing Origin. If an item is active, the remaining hours will be displayed, a deactivated item will
display, “—” instead.
The maintenance item time is adjusted by using the left and right arrows. Pressing the Origin key will reinstate the
default time.
Items are tracked either by the time accumulated while power is on (ON-TIME) or by cycle-start time (CS-TIME).
When the time reaches zero the message “Maintenance Due” is displayed at the bottom of the screen (a negative
number of hours indicates the hours past due).
This message is not an alarm and does not interfere with machine operation in any way. After the necessary
maintenance has been performed, the operator can select that item on the “Scheduled Maintenance” screen, press
the Origin button to deactivate it, then press Origin again to reactivate it with the default number of hours remaining.

W INDOWS / G UARDING
Polycarbonate windows and guarding can be weakened by exposure to cutting liquids and chemicals that contain
amines. It is possible to lose up to 10% of the remaining strength annually. If degradation is suspected, replace the
window. It is recommended that the windows be replaced every two years.
Windows and guarding should be replaced if damaged or severely scratched. Replace dam-
aged windows immediately.

WORKLIGHT
There are four types of worklights for the Haas mills. Turn off power to the machine at the main breaker before doing
any work on the mill.

Glass

Screw Lens
Lens
Lens Retainer Screws Frame

Note: The power for the worklight comes from the GFI circuit. If the worklight does
not turn on, check this first, it can be reset at the side of the control panel.

186 Maintenance 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 CHIP AUGER
During normal operation, most chips are discharged from the machine at the discharge tube. However, very small
chips may flow through the drain and collect in the coolant tank strainer. To prevent drain blockage, clean this
strainer regularly. Should the drain become clogged and cause coolant to collect in the pan, stop the machine,
loosen the chips blocking the drain, and allow the coolant to drain. Empty the coolant tank strainer, then resume
operation.

SPINDLE AIR PRESSURE

Verify Spindle air pressure using the gauge located behind the main air regulator. VF, VR, and VS mills should be
set to 17 psi. EC-series and HS Series should be set to 25psi. Adjust if necessary.
15K Spindle
The air pressure for the 15K Spindle is 20 psi. The 15K Spindle requires higher pressure to slightly reduce the
delivery speed and amount of oil on the bearings.

TSC MAINTENANCE
The TSC pump is a precision gear pump and will wear out faster and lose pressure if abrasive particles are present
in the coolant.
• Check the dirt indicator on the 20-micron mesh filter with the TSC system running and no tool in the spindle.
Change the element when the indicator reaches the red zone.
• Clean the pump intake filter when indicator is in the red zone. Reset indicator with button. Gate filters can be
cleaned with a wire brush.
• After changing or cleaning filter elements, run the TSC system with no tool in spindle for at least one minute to
prime system.
• Coolant will be used more quickly when the TSC system is in use. Make sure to keep the coolant level up and
check the level more frequently (check after every eight hour shift). Premature wear of the pump can result
from running with a low coolant level in the tank.

Wing Nuts (4) Disconnect

Hose for IMPORTANT!
Cleaning
GATE
TSC Filter FILTER
Assembly 20 Mesh
Intake
Filter
Dirt
Indicator Gasket

Intake Filter Intake Filter

TSC Coolant Assembly CLEAN THE GATE FILTER
Housing
Pump Assembly REGULARLY

TSC Coolant Pump Assembly Cleaning the Intake Filter Gate Filter

Warnings
Use of coolants with extremely low lubricity can damage the TSC coolant tip and pump.
Shortened pump life, reduction of pressure and increased maintenance are normal and to be expected in abrasive
environments and are not covered by warranty. A special filter, in addition to the standard filter should be used;
contact Haas for recommendations.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Maintenance 187

Machining of ceramics and the like voids all warranty claims for wear and is done entirely at customer's risk.
Increased maintenance schedules are absolutely required with abrasive swarf. The coolant must be changed more
often and the tank thoroughly cleaned of sediment on the bottom. An auxiliary coolant filter is recommended.
When machining castings, sand from the casting process and the abrasive properties of cast aluminum and cast
iron will shorten pump life unless a special filter is used in addition to the 20 mesh intake filter. Contact Haas for
recommendations.

LUBRICATION C HART
System Lubricant Quantity
Vertical Mills
Way lube and pneumatics Mobile Vactra #2 2-2.5 qts
Transmission Mobil DTE 25 40Taper 34 oz, 50 Taper 51 oz
A and B axis (VR-Series) Mobile SHC 630 A-axis 5qts, B-axis 4qts
EC-Series
Way lube and pneumatics Mobile Vactra #2 2-2.5 qts
Transmission Mobil DTE 25 34 oz
Rotary Table Mobil SHC-630 Cover sight glass
HS 3/4/6/7 incl R
Way lube and pneumatics Mobile Vactra #2 2-2.5 qts
Transmission Mobil DTE 25 34 oz
Rotary Table Mobil SHC-630 Cover sight glass

C OOLANT AND COOLANT T ANK

Machine coolant must be water-soluble, synthetic oil based or synthetic based coolant/lubricant. Using mineral
cutting oils will damage rubber components throughout the machine.
Do not use pure water as a coolant; machine components will rust. Do not use flammable liquids as coolant.
If the mill is equipped with Through-the-Spindle Coolant (TSC) do not use coolants with extremely low lubricity;
these types of coolant can damage the TSC Coolant tip and pump.
The coolant tank must be thoroghly cleaned periodically, especially for mills equipped with TSC.
Coolant Overview
As the machine runs the water will evaporate which will change the concentration of the coolant. Coolant is also
carried out with the parts.
A proper coolant mixture is between 6% and 7%. To top-off coolant only more coolant or deionized water should be
used. Be sure that the concentration is still within the range. A refractometer can be used to check the concentra-
tion.
Coolant should be replaced at regular intervals. A schedule should be set and held to. This will avoid a build up of
machine oil and will ensure that coolant is within the proper concentration and lubricity.

A UXILIARY F ILTER E LEMENT REPLACEMENT

Change the filter bag when the filter gauge displays a vacuum level of -5 in. Hg or more. Do not allow the suction to
exceed -10 in. Hg or pump damage may occur. Replace with a 25-micron rated filter bag (Haas P/N 93-9130).
Slowly loosen the eye-bolts. This will relieve the pressure at the top of the filter housing and open lid. Use the
handle to remove the basket (the filter element will be removed with the basket). Remove the filter element from the
basket and discard. Clean the basket. Install a new filter element and replace the basket (with element). Close the
lid and secure by tightening the eye-bolts.

188 Maintenance 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 AIR /L UBRICATION SYSTEM
All machine lubrication is supplied by the external lubrication system. Current lube level is visible in the reservoir;
Add oil as necessary to maintain proper oil level. Warning! Do not add lube above the “high” line marked on the
reservoir. Do not allow the lube level to go below the “low” line marked on the reservoir as machine damage could
result.
Spindle Air/Oil
Pressure Gauge Hose Barb Air Filter/Regulator Oil Pump
(Shop Air)
Pressure
Gauge

MAX

MIN Oil Filter

Oil Fill
Rear View Air Nozzle Air Line (To High Mark) Oil Reservoir

External Lubrication System

Lube Oil Filter

The way lube oil filter element is a 25-micron porous metal filter (94-3059). It is recommended that the filter should
be replaced annually or every 2000 hours of machine operation. The filter element is housed in the filter body, which
is located in the oil pump reservoir (internal filters).
To change the filter element follow these steps:
1. Remove the screws that hold the oil reservoir to the pump body, carefully lower the reservoir and set aside.
2. Use a strap wrench, pipe wrench or adjustable pliers to unscrew the end cap (see the figure). Caution: Use a
screwdriver or similar tool to stop the filter from turning while the end cap is removed.
3. Remove the oil filter element from the filter body once the end cap is removed.
4. Clean the inside of the filter housing and the filter end cap as required.
5. Install the new oil filter element (p/n 94-3059), O-ring and the end cap. Use the same tools that were used to
remove the filter end cap, to tighten it - Do Not Over Tighten.
6. Replace the oil reservoir; ensure the gasket seats properly between the reservoir and the top flange.

Screwdriver

Oil Filter

Filter Element
O-Ring (P/N 94-3059)

Un-screw end cap

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Maintenance 189

 S IDE MOUNT T OOL C HANGER G EARBOX O IL
Checking the oil level

Drain Plug Carousel 12 1 Oil Fill Plug

10 11
Number Disc 14
3

7 8 9
1
5

16

6
17
Disc Mounting

5
18 19

4
BHCS (6)

3
20 2
2
22 23 24 1

1
Oil
OilFill
FillLevel
Level

Vertical Mills EC-Series Mills

Vertical Mills: View the oil level sight glass in the location shown. The proper level is half way on the sight glass. If
more oil is needed, fill the gear box to the proper level at the oil fill/breather where shown.
EC-Series: Remove the plug and feel for oil with your finger. If no oil is felt, add oil until the it starts to come out of
the hole. Replace plug.
SMTC Oil Types
Mobilgear 632 or equivalent, for standard tool changers
Mobil SHC 630 or equivalent, for high speed tool changers

HS 3/4/6/7 38-T OOL T OOL C HANGER M AINTENANCE

Six Months •Lubricate the following parts using red grease:
Magazine Drive Gear,
Tool Pot,
Changer Slide Rack.
• Lubricate the Arm Shaft using Moly grease.
Annually • Lubricate the Changer Slide Linear Guide with red grease.
Tool Pot Chain Tension
The tool pot chain tension should be checked regularly as a preventive maintenance procedure. Chain tension
adjustment is performed in the lower left area of the magazine. Loosen the four 12x50 SHCS from the front of the
magazine. This will allow the plate to move. Loosen the hex lock nut on the shaft and tighten the shaft using the
hex bolt. Lock in the adjustment with the hex lock nut, and retighten the four 12x50 SHCS. Tensioning will not
change the indexed pot location, but check the alignment between the manual tool push cylinder and the tool pot.

190 Maintenance 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 TRANSMISSION
Vertical Mill 40-Taper Transmission Oil Replacement
There is no visible indicator for the level of transmission oil in the VF 1-6/40T models.
To add transmission oil, remove the access panel located directly behind the spindle head. This will expose the
Transmission Oil Overflow Pipe. Place a container on the table, beneath this outlet. Manually jog the Z axis to its
full -Z travel. Power down the machine. Locate the transmission oil fill cup, accessed from the top of the motor
housing. There is a cut-out provided in the top of the motor housing sheetmetal for filling. Slowly pour in Mobil DTE
25 oil until oil starts to come out of the overflow pipe; this overflow indicates the reservoir is full. Close the transmis-
sion oil fill cup, wipe off the overflow pipe and replace the access cover. Consider any overflow oil to be used and
dispose of properly.

Transmission
Oil Fill Cup
Spindle Head Transmission
Motor
Transmission Transmission
Fill Plug
Access
Panel Sight Glass

Reservoir Access Cover

Oil Fill Oil Overflow

View Rotated Pipe
1808 Pipe

VF 1-6 40 Taper VF 6 through 11 50T

NOTE: The VF-5 50 taper, does not have a sight glass; the oil is circulated directly onto the gears by a hose.
Oil Change
1. Remove the sheet metal from the spindle head.
2. Remove the encoder and the encoder mounting plate.
3. Remove the oil drain plug. When the oil drains, check the magnet for metal particles.
4. Replace the oil drain plug and fill the gear case with 1¼ liters of Mobil DTE 25 gear oil at the fill cup on top.
5. Replace the oil overflow plug, put a small amount of thread sealant on the threads. (Do not use thread locking
compound) install encoder and insure that the spindle orientation is correct.
6. Install the sheet metal and run a spindle warm up and check for leaks.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Maintenance 191

 EC-1600 AND HS 3/4/6/7 T RANSMISSION O IL

Oil Fill Port

Oil Fill

Oil Oil Sight

Drain Glass

Oil Drain
Oil Level View Plug

EC-1600 HS-3/4/6/7

Oil Check
Remove the sheet metal necessary to gain access to the transmission. View the sight glass on the side of the
transmission box as shown. The oil level should be half way on the sight glass. Fill as needed.

Oil Change
1. Remove the sheet metal from the spindle head.
2. Remove the drain plug as shown. Inspect the magnetic drainplug for signs of metal particles.
3. Blow downward with an air hose in the vicinity of the fill hole to prevent dirt and metal particles from
entering the gear case. Remove the fill plug.
4. Add Mobil DTE-25 gear oil until the oil level is half way up the sightglass.
5. Run a spindle warm-up and check for leaks.

EC-S ERIES PALLET CHANGER R OTARY TABLE

Oil Replacement
EC-300
Periodically check the oil level in the reservoir and keep it filled. It is not necessary to replace the oil.

Rotary Table Oil Reservoir

Clam Remove row

Shell of (6) BHCS
on Top

Remove
(3) BHCS
on Sides

Remove (8)
BHCS on
Bottom

192 Maintenance 96-8000 rev L June 2005

EC-400 Full Fourth Axis Rotary Table (Perform Every 2 years)

Pallet Side Spindle Side

Oil In Pre-Fill Air Vent
(pressure Oil
Oil Fill relief) Reservoir
Sight
Glass

Oil Fill
Solenoid Connection
Oil Drain
Plunger

1. Remove the fourteen (14) BHCS on the right Z-axis way cover at the receiver end and slide it toward the column.
2. Remove the left Z-axis way cover: Jog the Z-axis all the way toward the column and rotate the H-frame 45°
counter clockwise. Remove the thirteen (13) BHCS that fasten the waycover to the receiver and remove it through
the door at the control pendant.
3. Disconnect the reservoir at the rotary indexer end and plug the end of the hose.
4. Remove the drain plug on the opposite side of the rotary indexer. Replug the hole when the oil has drained.
5. Remove the air escape hole plug on the side of the platter.
6. Fill the rotary table until oil begins to escape from the air escape hole and plug it.
7. Replace the reservoir hose and the way covers. Command the receiver 180° to 0° repeatedly for fifteen minutes.
The reservoir will drop in level as it continues to replace the oil. Add oil as needed to the reservoir to just below the
full line.

Oil Fill
Sight Glass Oil Fill

Air
Vent

Oil Reservoir

Oil Drain
Front View Side View

EC-400 Rotary Indexer

Rotary Indexer (1° or 45°)

1. Remove the drain plug located on the left side of the rotary indexer. Replace the plug when the oil has drained.
2. Remove the air vent plug located to the upper right of the drain hole.
3. Fill the rotary indexer at the oil fill hole shown in the illustration. Replace the plug when oil begins to seep from
the air vent.
4. Command a 180° to 0° rotation for fifteen minutes. This will remove air remaining in the system. The rotary
indexer is full when the oil level is half way on the site glass. Fill as needed.
5. Replace the waycover.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Maintenance 193

 H YDRAULIC B RAKE (EC-1600-3000, HS3-7R)
Check the brake fluid level by viewing the fluid level in the booster. To check the EC 1600-3000 remove the brake
booster cover. The cover/booster is located at the right, front of the machine. The HS 3-7R brake booster is located
on the operator pendant side of the machine. Remove the way cover from the table and slide the way cover away
from the table.

Regulator
Air Lines
Brake Line

Breather Filter

MAX

Booster
MIN

Oil Level Brake Ring

Adding Oil
Use only Mobil DTE 25. Remove the breather filter from the brake booster assembly and add oil. The proper oil level
is between the minimum and maximum marks on the brake booster.

VR-SERIES
The following items must be performed in addition to the regular maintenance items.

Interval Maintenance Performed

Monthly • Grease all pivot points on the tool changer assembly.
• Check the oil in the three (3) areas of the head. The A-axis covers need to be removed
to access the filler cap and the sight glass. The B-axis filler is on the outside of the
casting. Add Mobil SHC-630 to the fill port at the top of the casting.
Annually • Replace the oil in the three (3) areas of the head:
For the areas on either side of the spindle head (A-axis), remove the drain plug
(4 BHCS) and drain the oil. Note: Remove the plug closest to the front on the left side of
the head, and the plug towards the rear of the right side of the head. Fill the two areas
with Mobil SHC-630 as described in the “Monthly” section above.
B-Axis For the area at the rear of the spindle head, remove the 1/4" NPT pipeplug with
an Allen wrench and drain the oil. Note: The plug is near the center of this rear area. Fill
with Mobil SHC-630 as described in the “Monthly” section above.

194 Maintenance 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 Fill Hole Locations Drain Plug Locations

Remove Sight
Glass to Fill
Fill Port 1
Fill Port 3

Fill Port 2
Remove Cover Plates 1 2
(Both Sides) 3

VR-S ERIES A IR F ILTER

The VR mills are equipped with an air filter (P/N 59-9088) for the motor housing. The recommended replacement
interval is monthly, or sooner depending on your machining environment.
The air filter is located on the rear of the head cover. To remove the air filter, simply pull up on the filter; the filter will
slide upward out of its bracket. To replace the filter, slide in the new air filter, oriented properly to filter air into the
motor housing. Filter air-flow direction is determined by a sticker on the replacement filter.

Filter Slides Out

Air Filter
(59-9088)

5AX Head
Cover Back
Plate
(25-4362)

(Back View)

VR-11 Air Filter Location

VR-SERIES AIR SPRING COUNTERBALANCE REPLACEMENT

The counterbalance air spring and rod ends should be replaced every two (2) years.
1. Verify that the Axis is at 0 degrees before beginning. Press E-stop before doing any disassembly.
2. Remove sheet metal cover and loosen the two 3/8-16 SHCS (1).
3. Back out the 1/4-20 SHCS (2), and tighten the two 3/8-16 SHCS (1) this will keep the pre-load cam secure while
the next step is accomplished.
4. Remove 3/8-16 SHCS that mount Air Spring and Rod Ends (3).
5. Tighten the rod ends onto the Air Spring and secure the Air Spring using the two 3/8-16 SHCS removed in step 4.

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Maintenance 195

 Air Spring 1
P/N 93-4367

6. Slightly loosen the 3/8-16 SHCS (1). Screw in the 1/4-20 SHCS to force pre-load cam counterbal-
ance down (this will push the air spring inward). Tighten this adjusting bolt until the slots in the
cam have contacted the tops of the mounting bolts. Tightening the two 3/8-16 SHCS (1), these will
hold the pre-load cam in place.
7. Replace the sheet metal, reset the E-stop and clear the alarms.

196 Maintenance 96-8000 rev L June 2005

 Index
Symbols
200 Hour Demo 25
4th and 5th Axis Programming 99

A
Advanced Editor 64
Advanced Tool Management (ATM) 47
Air Requirements 184
Alarms 14
Auto Air Gun 162
Auto Door 162, 179
AUTOFEED 177
Auxiliary Axis 102
Auxiliary Coolant 12
Axis Load Monitor 19

B
Block Delete 16

C
Calculator 15, 21
Canned Cycles 103, 129
Chip Auger 12, 161, 178
Chip Conveyor 161, 178
Coolant 159
Coolant Up/Down 12
Corner Rounding/Chamfering 106
Current Commands 14
Cursor Keys 15
Cutter compensation 74
Cylindrical Mapping 143

D
Date 21
Deleting Programs 31
Dimensioning 168
Direct Numeric Control 34
DIRECTORY LISTING 34
Display Keys 14
DNC 34

E
Electricity Requirements 183
Emergency Stop 11
End-Of-Block 15
ENGRAVING 119

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Index 197

EOB 15

F
Fifth Axis Installation 102
Five-Axis Programs 99
Floppy Drive 33
Fourth Axis Installation 101
Function Keys 12

G
G65 Macro Call 95
G65 Macro Subroutine Call 95
General Requirements 183
Graphics 14
Guarding 186

H
Handle Control Feedrate 13
Handle Control Spindle 13
Help 15, 21
High Speed Machining (Optional) 27
High-Speed Side Mount Tool Changer 40
HOME G28 17

I
Introduction 9

J
Jog Handle 11
Jog Keys 12
Jog Lock 12
Jog Mode 44

K
Key Switch 12
Keyboard 11

L
Loading Programs 31
Lookahead, Macros 78

M
M codes 159
M-Code Relays 160
Machine Data Collect 180
Machine Power-Up 29
Macro Subroutine Call 95
Macro Subroutine Call (G65) 95
Macro System Variables 80
Maintenance 19, 183

198 Index 96-8000 rev L June 2005

Maintenance Schedule 185
MDI 34
Memory Lock 12
Messages 14
Milling calculator 24
Mirror Image 140, 172

O
Operation Timers 19
Operator Load Station, Pallet Changer 53
Option Try-Out 25
Optional Stop 16
Orient Spindle 160
Overload, Tool 176
Override 13
Override Keys 13

P
P-Cool 12, 161
P-cool 50
Pallet Changer 51
Pallet Changer Programming 53
Pallet Changer Recovery 57
Pallet Loads, Maximum 52
Pallet Replacement 57
Pallet Schedule Table 54
Pallet Storage 58
Parameter Lock 168
Parameters 14
Parentheses ( ) 15
Program Selection 31
Programmable Coolant 50
Pull Studs 37

Q
Quick Code 68

R
Renaming Programs 31
right slash / 15
Run-Stop-Jog-Continue 24

S
Screen Saver Delay 177
Searching the program 31
Second Home 12
Serial Number Engraving 119
Service 183
Settings 14
Settings, Macros 78
Shift key 15

96-8000 rev L June 2005 Index 199

Shortcuts, Advanced Editor 67
Side Mount Tool Changer Recovery 44
Side Mount Tool Changer Recovery Flow Chart 44
SINGLE BLOCK 176
SMTC Recovery 44
Specifications, Tool Changer 38
Spindle Air Pressure 194
Spindle Load Meter 11
Square brackets [ ] 15
Sub Program 164
subprograms 62
subroutine 164
Subroutines 62
System Variables 80

T
Thread Milling 108
Through-Spindle Coolant 163
Time 21
Tips and Tricks 58
Tool Changer 38
Tool Changer Recovery Flow Chart, Side Mount 44
Tool ChangerSpecifications 38
Tool Holders 36
Tool Life 19
Tool Load Monito 19
Tool Loading Flowchart 41
TOOL OFSET MESUR 174
Tool Overload 176
Tooling 36
transmission 161
TSC 163

V
Visual Quick Code 73

W
Warm-up Compensation 178
Warmup 178
Worklight 186

Z
Zero Return 17

200 Index 96-8000 rev L June 2005